1 /* Optimize by combining instructions for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2023 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
20 /* This module is essentially the "combiner" phase of the U. of Arizona
21 Portable Optimizer, but redone to work on our list-structured
22 representation for RTL instead of their string representation.
24 The LOG_LINKS of each insn identify the most recent assignment
25 to each REG used in the insn. It is a list of previous insns,
26 each of which contains a SET for a REG that is used in this insn
27 and not used or set in between. LOG_LINKs never cross basic blocks.
28 They were set up by the preceding pass (lifetime analysis).
30 We try to combine each pair of insns joined by a logical link.
31 We also try to combine triplets of insns A, B and C when C has
32 a link back to B and B has a link back to A. Likewise for a
33 small number of quadruplets of insns A, B, C and D for which
34 there's high likelihood of success.
36 We check (with modified_between_p) to avoid combining in such a way
37 as to move a computation to a place where its value would be different.
39 Combination is done by mathematically substituting the previous
40 insn(s) values for the regs they set into the expressions in
41 the later insns that refer to these regs. If the result is a valid insn
42 for our target machine, according to the machine description,
43 we install it, delete the earlier insns, and update the data flow
44 information (LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES) for what we did.
46 There are a few exceptions where the dataflow information isn't
47 completely updated (however this is only a local issue since it is
48 regenerated before the next pass that uses it):
50 - reg_live_length is not updated
51 - reg_n_refs is not adjusted in the rare case when a register is
52 no longer required in a computation
53 - there are extremely rare cases (see distribute_notes) when a
55 - a LOG_LINKS entry that refers to an insn with multiple SETs may be
56 removed because there is no way to know which register it was
59 To simplify substitution, we combine only when the earlier insn(s)
60 consist of only a single assignment. To simplify updating afterward,
61 we never combine when a subroutine call appears in the middle. */
65 #include "coretypes.h"
80 #include "stor-layout.h"
82 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
83 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
85 #include "insn-attr.h"
86 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
88 #include "tree-pass.h"
91 #include "print-rtl.h"
92 #include "function-abi.h"
95 /* Number of attempts to combine instructions in this function. */
97 static int combine_attempts
;
99 /* Number of attempts that got as far as substitution in this function. */
101 static int combine_merges
;
103 /* Number of instructions combined with added SETs in this function. */
105 static int combine_extras
;
107 /* Number of instructions combined in this function. */
109 static int combine_successes
;
111 /* combine_instructions may try to replace the right hand side of the
112 second instruction with the value of an associated REG_EQUAL note
113 before throwing it at try_combine. That is problematic when there
114 is a REG_DEAD note for a register used in the old right hand side
115 and can cause distribute_notes to do wrong things. This is the
116 second instruction if it has been so modified, null otherwise. */
118 static rtx_insn
*i2mod
;
120 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the old right hand side. */
122 static rtx i2mod_old_rhs
;
124 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the new right hand side. */
126 static rtx i2mod_new_rhs
;
128 struct reg_stat_type
{
129 /* Record last point of death of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
130 rtx_insn
*last_death
;
132 /* Record last point of modification of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
135 /* The next group of fields allows the recording of the last value assigned
136 to (hard or pseudo) register n. We use this information to see if an
137 operation being processed is redundant given a prior operation performed
138 on the register. For example, an `and' with a constant is redundant if
139 all the zero bits are already known to be turned off.
141 We use an approach similar to that used by cse, but change it in the
144 (1) We do not want to reinitialize at each label.
145 (2) It is useful, but not critical, to know the actual value assigned
146 to a register. Often just its form is helpful.
148 Therefore, we maintain the following fields:
150 last_set_value the last value assigned
151 last_set_label records the value of label_tick when the
152 register was assigned
153 last_set_table_tick records the value of label_tick when a
154 value using the register is assigned
155 last_set_invalid set to true when it is not valid
156 to use the value of this register in some
159 To understand the usage of these tables, it is important to understand
160 the distinction between the value in last_set_value being valid and
161 the register being validly contained in some other expression in the
164 (The next two parameters are out of date).
166 reg_stat[i].last_set_value is valid if it is nonzero, and either
167 reg_n_sets[i] is 1 or reg_stat[i].last_set_label == label_tick.
169 Register I may validly appear in any expression returned for the value
170 of another register if reg_n_sets[i] is 1. It may also appear in the
171 value for register J if reg_stat[j].last_set_invalid is zero, or
172 reg_stat[i].last_set_label < reg_stat[j].last_set_label.
174 If an expression is found in the table containing a register which may
175 not validly appear in an expression, the register is replaced by
176 something that won't match, (clobber (const_int 0)). */
178 /* Record last value assigned to (hard or pseudo) register n. */
182 /* Record the value of label_tick when an expression involving register n
183 is placed in last_set_value. */
185 int last_set_table_tick
;
187 /* Record the value of label_tick when the value for register n is placed in
192 /* These fields are maintained in parallel with last_set_value and are
193 used to store the mode in which the register was last set, the bits
194 that were known to be zero when it was last set, and the number of
195 sign bits copies it was known to have when it was last set. */
197 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT last_set_nonzero_bits
;
198 char last_set_sign_bit_copies
;
199 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode
) last_set_mode
: MACHINE_MODE_BITSIZE
;
201 /* Set to true if references to register n in expressions should not be
202 used. last_set_invalid is set nonzero when this register is being
203 assigned to and last_set_table_tick == label_tick. */
205 bool last_set_invalid
;
207 /* Some registers that are set more than once and used in more than one
208 basic block are nevertheless always set in similar ways. For example,
209 a QImode register may be loaded from memory in two places on a machine
210 where byte loads zero extend.
212 We record in the following fields if a register has some leading bits
213 that are always equal to the sign bit, and what we know about the
214 nonzero bits of a register, specifically which bits are known to be
217 If an entry is zero, it means that we don't know anything special. */
219 unsigned char sign_bit_copies
;
221 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_bits
;
223 /* Record the value of the label_tick when the last truncation
224 happened. The field truncated_to_mode is only valid if
225 truncation_label == label_tick. */
227 int truncation_label
;
229 /* Record the last truncation seen for this register. If truncation
230 is not a nop to this mode we might be able to save an explicit
231 truncation if we know that value already contains a truncated
234 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode
) truncated_to_mode
: MACHINE_MODE_BITSIZE
;
238 static vec
<reg_stat_type
> reg_stat
;
240 /* One plus the highest pseudo for which we track REG_N_SETS.
241 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs allocates the array for REG_N_SETS just once,
242 but during combine_split_insns new pseudos can be created. As we don't have
243 updated DF information in that case, it is hard to initialize the array
244 after growing. The combiner only cares about REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1,
245 so instead of growing the arrays, just assume all newly created pseudos
246 during combine might be set multiple times. */
248 static unsigned int reg_n_sets_max
;
250 /* Record the luid of the last insn that invalidated memory
251 (anything that writes memory, and subroutine calls, but not pushes). */
253 static int mem_last_set
;
255 /* Record the luid of the last CALL_INSN
256 so we can tell whether a potential combination crosses any calls. */
258 static int last_call_luid
;
260 /* When `subst' is called, this is the insn that is being modified
261 (by combining in a previous insn). The PATTERN of this insn
262 is still the old pattern partially modified and it should not be
263 looked at, but this may be used to examine the successors of the insn
264 to judge whether a simplification is valid. */
266 static rtx_insn
*subst_insn
;
268 /* This is the lowest LUID that `subst' is currently dealing with.
269 get_last_value will not return a value if the register was set at or
270 after this LUID. If not for this mechanism, we could get confused if
271 I2 or I1 in try_combine were an insn that used the old value of a register
272 to obtain a new value. In that case, we might erroneously get the
273 new value of the register when we wanted the old one. */
275 static int subst_low_luid
;
277 /* This contains any hard registers that are used in newpat; reg_dead_at_p
278 must consider all these registers to be always live. */
280 static HARD_REG_SET newpat_used_regs
;
282 /* This is an insn to which a LOG_LINKS entry has been added. If this
283 insn is the earlier than I2 or I3, combine should rescan starting at
286 static rtx_insn
*added_links_insn
;
288 /* And similarly, for notes. */
290 static rtx_insn
*added_notes_insn
;
292 /* Basic block in which we are performing combines. */
293 static basic_block this_basic_block
;
294 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p
;
297 /* Length of the currently allocated uid_insn_cost array. */
299 static int max_uid_known
;
301 /* The following array records the insn_cost for every insn
302 in the instruction stream. */
304 static int *uid_insn_cost
;
306 /* The following array records the LOG_LINKS for every insn in the
307 instruction stream as struct insn_link pointers. */
312 struct insn_link
*next
;
315 static struct insn_link
**uid_log_links
;
318 insn_uid_check (const_rtx insn
)
320 int uid
= INSN_UID (insn
);
321 gcc_checking_assert (uid
<= max_uid_known
);
325 #define INSN_COST(INSN) (uid_insn_cost[insn_uid_check (INSN)])
326 #define LOG_LINKS(INSN) (uid_log_links[insn_uid_check (INSN)])
328 #define FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK(L, INSN) \
329 for ((L) = LOG_LINKS (INSN); (L); (L) = (L)->next)
331 /* Links for LOG_LINKS are allocated from this obstack. */
333 static struct obstack insn_link_obstack
;
335 /* Allocate a link. */
337 static inline struct insn_link
*
338 alloc_insn_link (rtx_insn
*insn
, unsigned int regno
, struct insn_link
*next
)
341 = (struct insn_link
*) obstack_alloc (&insn_link_obstack
,
342 sizeof (struct insn_link
));
349 /* Incremented for each basic block. */
351 static int label_tick
;
353 /* Reset to label_tick for each extended basic block in scanning order. */
355 static int label_tick_ebb_start
;
357 /* Mode used to compute significance in reg_stat[].nonzero_bits. It is the
358 largest integer mode that can fit in HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
360 static scalar_int_mode nonzero_bits_mode
;
362 /* Nonzero when reg_stat[].nonzero_bits and reg_stat[].sign_bit_copies can
363 be safely used. It is zero while computing them and after combine has
364 completed. This former test prevents propagating values based on
365 previously set values, which can be incorrect if a variable is modified
368 static int nonzero_sign_valid
;
371 /* Record one modification to rtl structure
372 to be undone by storing old_contents into *where. */
374 enum undo_kind
{ UNDO_RTX
, UNDO_INT
, UNDO_MODE
, UNDO_LINKS
};
380 union { rtx r
; int i
; machine_mode m
; struct insn_link
*l
; } old_contents
;
381 union { rtx
*r
; int *i
; int regno
; struct insn_link
**l
; } where
;
384 /* Record a bunch of changes to be undone, up to MAX_UNDO of them.
385 num_undo says how many are currently recorded.
387 other_insn is nonzero if we have modified some other insn in the process
388 of working on subst_insn. It must be verified too. */
394 rtx_insn
*other_insn
;
397 static struct undobuf undobuf
;
399 /* Number of times the pseudo being substituted for
400 was found and replaced. */
402 static int n_occurrences
;
404 static rtx
reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx
, scalar_int_mode
,
406 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*);
407 static rtx
reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx
, scalar_int_mode
,
410 static void do_SUBST (rtx
*, rtx
);
411 static void do_SUBST_INT (int *, int);
412 static void init_reg_last (void);
413 static void setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn
*);
414 static void set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx
, const_rtx
, void *);
415 static bool cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn
*);
416 static bool can_combine_p (rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*,
417 rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx
*, rtx
*);
418 static bool combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn
*, rtx
*, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
,
420 static bool contains_muldiv (rtx
);
421 static rtx_insn
*try_combine (rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*,
423 static void undo_all (void);
424 static void undo_commit (void);
425 static rtx
*find_split_point (rtx
*, rtx_insn
*, bool);
426 static rtx
subst (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, bool, bool, bool);
427 static rtx
combine_simplify_rtx (rtx
, machine_mode
, bool, bool);
428 static rtx
simplify_if_then_else (rtx
);
429 static rtx
simplify_set (rtx
);
430 static rtx
simplify_logical (rtx
);
431 static rtx
expand_compound_operation (rtx
);
432 static const_rtx
expand_field_assignment (const_rtx
);
433 static rtx
make_extraction (machine_mode
, rtx
, HOST_WIDE_INT
, rtx
,
434 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, bool, bool, bool);
435 static int get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
436 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*);
437 static rtx
canon_reg_for_combine (rtx
, rtx
);
438 static rtx
force_int_to_mode (rtx
, scalar_int_mode
, scalar_int_mode
,
439 scalar_int_mode
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, bool);
440 static rtx
force_to_mode (rtx
, machine_mode
,
441 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, bool);
442 static rtx
if_then_else_cond (rtx
, rtx
*, rtx
*);
443 static rtx
known_cond (rtx
, enum rtx_code
, rtx
, rtx
);
444 static bool rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx
, rtx
, bool = false);
445 static rtx
make_field_assignment (rtx
);
446 static rtx
apply_distributive_law (rtx
);
447 static rtx
distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx
, int);
448 static rtx
simplify_and_const_int_1 (scalar_int_mode
, rtx
,
449 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
);
450 static rtx
simplify_and_const_int (rtx
, scalar_int_mode
, rtx
,
451 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
);
452 static bool merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code
*, HOST_WIDE_INT
*, enum rtx_code
,
453 HOST_WIDE_INT
, machine_mode
, bool *);
454 static rtx
simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code
, machine_mode
, rtx
, int);
455 static rtx
simplify_shift_const (rtx
, enum rtx_code
, machine_mode
, rtx
,
457 static int recog_for_combine (rtx
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx
*);
458 static rtx
gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode
, rtx
);
459 static enum rtx_code
simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code
, machine_mode
,
461 static enum rtx_code
simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code
, rtx
*, rtx
*);
462 static void update_table_tick (rtx
);
463 static void record_value_for_reg (rtx
, rtx_insn
*, rtx
);
464 static void check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn
*, rtx
);
465 static void record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx
, const_rtx
, void *);
466 static void record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn
*);
467 static bool get_last_value_validate (rtx
*, rtx_insn
*, int, bool);
468 static rtx
get_last_value (const_rtx
);
469 static void reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx
, const_rtx
, void *);
470 static bool reg_dead_at_p (rtx
, rtx_insn
*);
471 static void move_deaths (rtx
, rtx
, int, rtx_insn
*, rtx
*);
472 static bool reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx
, rtx
);
473 static void distribute_notes (rtx
, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*, rtx_insn
*,
475 static void distribute_links (struct insn_link
*);
476 static void mark_used_regs_combine (rtx
);
477 static void record_promoted_value (rtx_insn
*, rtx
);
478 static bool unmentioned_reg_p (rtx
, rtx
);
479 static void record_truncated_values (rtx
*, void *);
480 static bool reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode
, const_rtx
);
481 static rtx
gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode
, rtx
);
484 /* It is not safe to use ordinary gen_lowpart in combine.
485 See comments in gen_lowpart_for_combine. */
486 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
487 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_for_combine
489 /* Our implementation of gen_lowpart never emits a new pseudo. */
490 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT
491 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT gen_lowpart_for_combine
493 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS
494 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine
496 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES
497 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine
499 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE
500 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE reg_truncated_to_mode
502 static const struct rtl_hooks combine_rtl_hooks
= RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER
;
505 /* Convenience wrapper for the canonicalize_comparison target hook.
506 Target hooks cannot use enum rtx_code. */
508 target_canonicalize_comparison (enum rtx_code
*code
, rtx
*op0
, rtx
*op1
,
509 bool op0_preserve_value
)
511 int code_int
= (int)*code
;
512 targetm
.canonicalize_comparison (&code_int
, op0
, op1
, op0_preserve_value
);
513 *code
= (enum rtx_code
)code_int
;
516 /* Try to split PATTERN found in INSN. This returns NULL_RTX if
517 PATTERN cannot be split. Otherwise, it returns an insn sequence.
518 This is a wrapper around split_insns which ensures that the
519 reg_stat vector is made larger if the splitter creates a new
523 combine_split_insns (rtx pattern
, rtx_insn
*insn
)
528 ret
= split_insns (pattern
, insn
);
529 nregs
= max_reg_num ();
530 if (nregs
> reg_stat
.length ())
531 reg_stat
.safe_grow_cleared (nregs
, true);
535 /* This is used by find_single_use to locate an rtx in LOC that
536 contains exactly one use of DEST, which is typically a REG.
537 It returns a pointer to the innermost rtx expression
538 containing DEST. Appearances of DEST that are being used to
539 totally replace it are not counted. */
542 find_single_use_1 (rtx dest
, rtx
*loc
)
545 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
561 /* If the destination is anything other than PC, a REG or a SUBREG
562 of a REG that occupies all of the REG, the insn uses DEST if
563 it is mentioned in the destination or the source. Otherwise, we
564 need just check the source. */
565 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) != PC
566 && !REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
567 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == SUBREG
568 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
)))
569 && !read_modify_subreg_p (SET_DEST (x
))))
572 return find_single_use_1 (dest
, &SET_SRC (x
));
576 return find_single_use_1 (dest
, &XEXP (x
, 0));
582 /* If it wasn't one of the common cases above, check each expression and
583 vector of this code. Look for a unique usage of DEST. */
585 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
586 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
590 if (dest
== XEXP (x
, i
)
591 || (REG_P (dest
) && REG_P (XEXP (x
, i
))
592 && REGNO (dest
) == REGNO (XEXP (x
, i
))))
595 this_result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &XEXP (x
, i
));
598 result
= this_result
;
599 else if (this_result
)
600 /* Duplicate usage. */
603 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
607 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
609 if (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
) == dest
611 && REG_P (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
))
612 && REGNO (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
)) == REGNO (dest
)))
615 this_result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
618 result
= this_result
;
619 else if (this_result
)
629 /* See if DEST, produced in INSN, is used only a single time in the
630 sequel. If so, return a pointer to the innermost rtx expression in which
633 If PLOC is nonzero, *PLOC is set to the insn containing the single use.
635 Otherwise, we find the single use by finding an insn that has a
636 LOG_LINKS pointing at INSN and has a REG_DEAD note for DEST. If DEST is
637 only referenced once in that insn, we know that it must be the first
638 and last insn referencing DEST. */
641 find_single_use (rtx dest
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx_insn
**ploc
)
646 struct insn_link
*link
;
651 bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
);
652 for (next
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
653 next
&& BLOCK_FOR_INSN (next
) == bb
;
654 next
= NEXT_INSN (next
))
655 if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (next
) && dead_or_set_p (next
, dest
))
657 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, next
)
658 if (link
->insn
== insn
&& link
->regno
== REGNO (dest
))
663 result
= find_single_use_1 (dest
, &PATTERN (next
));
673 /* Substitute NEWVAL, an rtx expression, into INTO, a place in some
674 insn. The substitution can be undone by undo_all. If INTO is already
675 set to NEWVAL, do not record this change. Because computing NEWVAL might
676 also call SUBST, we have to compute it before we put anything into
680 do_SUBST (rtx
*into
, rtx newval
)
685 if (oldval
== newval
)
688 /* We'd like to catch as many invalid transformations here as
689 possible. Unfortunately, there are way too many mode changes
690 that are perfectly valid, so we'd waste too much effort for
691 little gain doing the checks here. Focus on catching invalid
692 transformations involving integer constants. */
693 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (oldval
)) == MODE_INT
694 && CONST_INT_P (newval
))
696 /* Sanity check that we're replacing oldval with a CONST_INT
697 that is a valid sign-extension for the original mode. */
698 gcc_assert (INTVAL (newval
)
699 == trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (newval
), GET_MODE (oldval
)));
701 /* Replacing the operand of a SUBREG or a ZERO_EXTEND with a
702 CONST_INT is not valid, because after the replacement, the
703 original mode would be gone. Unfortunately, we can't tell
704 when do_SUBST is called to replace the operand thereof, so we
705 perform this test on oldval instead, checking whether an
706 invalid replacement took place before we got here. */
707 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval
) == SUBREG
708 && CONST_INT_P (SUBREG_REG (oldval
))));
709 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval
) == ZERO_EXTEND
710 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (oldval
, 0))));
714 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
716 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
718 buf
->kind
= UNDO_RTX
;
720 buf
->old_contents
.r
= oldval
;
723 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
726 #define SUBST(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
728 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is an int expression. Note that substitution
729 for the value of a HOST_WIDE_INT value (including CONST_INT) is
733 do_SUBST_INT (int *into
, int newval
)
738 if (oldval
== newval
)
742 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
744 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
746 buf
->kind
= UNDO_INT
;
748 buf
->old_contents
.i
= oldval
;
751 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
754 #define SUBST_INT(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_INT (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
756 /* Similar to SUBST, but just substitute the mode. This is used when
757 changing the mode of a pseudo-register, so that any other
758 references to the entry in the regno_reg_rtx array will change as
762 subst_mode (int regno
, machine_mode newval
)
765 rtx reg
= regno_reg_rtx
[regno
];
766 machine_mode oldval
= GET_MODE (reg
);
768 if (oldval
== newval
)
772 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
774 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
776 buf
->kind
= UNDO_MODE
;
777 buf
->where
.regno
= regno
;
778 buf
->old_contents
.m
= oldval
;
779 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, newval
);
781 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
784 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is a LOG_LINKS expression. */
787 do_SUBST_LINK (struct insn_link
**into
, struct insn_link
*newval
)
790 struct insn_link
* oldval
= *into
;
792 if (oldval
== newval
)
796 buf
= undobuf
.frees
, undobuf
.frees
= buf
->next
;
798 buf
= XNEW (struct undo
);
800 buf
->kind
= UNDO_LINKS
;
802 buf
->old_contents
.l
= oldval
;
805 buf
->next
= undobuf
.undos
, undobuf
.undos
= buf
;
808 #define SUBST_LINK(oldval, newval) do_SUBST_LINK (&oldval, newval)
810 /* Subroutine of try_combine. Determine whether the replacement patterns
811 NEWPAT, NEWI2PAT and NEWOTHERPAT are cheaper according to insn_cost
812 than the original sequence I0, I1, I2, I3 and undobuf.other_insn. Note
813 that I0, I1 and/or NEWI2PAT may be NULL_RTX. Similarly, NEWOTHERPAT and
814 undobuf.other_insn may also both be NULL_RTX. Return false if the cost
815 of all the instructions can be estimated and the replacements are more
816 expensive than the original sequence. */
819 combine_validate_cost (rtx_insn
*i0
, rtx_insn
*i1
, rtx_insn
*i2
, rtx_insn
*i3
,
820 rtx newpat
, rtx newi2pat
, rtx newotherpat
)
822 int i0_cost
, i1_cost
, i2_cost
, i3_cost
;
823 int new_i2_cost
, new_i3_cost
;
824 int old_cost
, new_cost
;
826 /* Lookup the original insn_costs. */
827 i2_cost
= INSN_COST (i2
);
828 i3_cost
= INSN_COST (i3
);
832 i1_cost
= INSN_COST (i1
);
835 i0_cost
= INSN_COST (i0
);
836 old_cost
= (i0_cost
> 0 && i1_cost
> 0 && i2_cost
> 0 && i3_cost
> 0
837 ? i0_cost
+ i1_cost
+ i2_cost
+ i3_cost
: 0);
841 old_cost
= (i1_cost
> 0 && i2_cost
> 0 && i3_cost
> 0
842 ? i1_cost
+ i2_cost
+ i3_cost
: 0);
848 old_cost
= (i2_cost
> 0 && i3_cost
> 0) ? i2_cost
+ i3_cost
: 0;
849 i1_cost
= i0_cost
= 0;
852 /* If we have split a PARALLEL I2 to I1,I2, we have counted its cost twice;
854 if (old_cost
&& i1
&& INSN_UID (i1
) == INSN_UID (i2
))
858 /* Calculate the replacement insn_costs. */
859 rtx tmp
= PATTERN (i3
);
860 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
861 int tmpi
= INSN_CODE (i3
);
863 new_i3_cost
= insn_cost (i3
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
865 INSN_CODE (i3
) = tmpi
;
869 PATTERN (i2
) = newi2pat
;
870 tmpi
= INSN_CODE (i2
);
872 new_i2_cost
= insn_cost (i2
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
874 INSN_CODE (i2
) = tmpi
;
875 new_cost
= (new_i2_cost
> 0 && new_i3_cost
> 0)
876 ? new_i2_cost
+ new_i3_cost
: 0;
880 new_cost
= new_i3_cost
;
884 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
886 int old_other_cost
, new_other_cost
;
888 old_other_cost
= INSN_COST (undobuf
.other_insn
);
889 tmp
= PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
);
890 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
) = newotherpat
;
891 tmpi
= INSN_CODE (undobuf
.other_insn
);
892 INSN_CODE (undobuf
.other_insn
) = -1;
893 new_other_cost
= insn_cost (undobuf
.other_insn
,
894 optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
895 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
) = tmp
;
896 INSN_CODE (undobuf
.other_insn
) = tmpi
;
897 if (old_other_cost
> 0 && new_other_cost
> 0)
899 old_cost
+= old_other_cost
;
900 new_cost
+= new_other_cost
;
906 /* Disallow this combination if both new_cost and old_cost are greater than
907 zero, and new_cost is greater than old cost. */
908 bool reject
= old_cost
> 0 && new_cost
> old_cost
;
912 fprintf (dump_file
, "%s combination of insns ",
913 reject
? "rejecting" : "allowing");
915 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i0
));
916 if (i1
&& INSN_UID (i1
) != INSN_UID (i2
))
917 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i1
));
918 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d and %d\n", INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
920 fprintf (dump_file
, "original costs ");
922 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d + ", i0_cost
);
923 if (i1
&& INSN_UID (i1
) != INSN_UID (i2
))
924 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d + ", i1_cost
);
925 fprintf (dump_file
, "%d + %d = %d\n", i2_cost
, i3_cost
, old_cost
);
928 fprintf (dump_file
, "replacement costs %d + %d = %d\n",
929 new_i2_cost
, new_i3_cost
, new_cost
);
931 fprintf (dump_file
, "replacement cost %d\n", new_cost
);
937 /* Update the uid_insn_cost array with the replacement costs. */
938 INSN_COST (i2
) = new_i2_cost
;
939 INSN_COST (i3
) = new_i3_cost
;
951 /* Delete any insns that copy a register to itself.
952 Return true if the CFG was changed. */
955 delete_noop_moves (void)
957 rtx_insn
*insn
, *next
;
960 bool edges_deleted
= false;
962 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb
, cfun
)
964 for (insn
= BB_HEAD (bb
); insn
!= NEXT_INSN (BB_END (bb
)); insn
= next
)
966 next
= NEXT_INSN (insn
);
967 if (INSN_P (insn
) && noop_move_p (insn
))
970 fprintf (dump_file
, "deleting noop move %d\n", INSN_UID (insn
));
972 edges_deleted
|= delete_insn_and_edges (insn
);
977 return edges_deleted
;
981 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine DEF. */
983 can_combine_def_p (df_ref def
)
985 /* Do not consider if it is pre/post modification in MEM. */
986 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def
) & DF_REF_PRE_POST_MODIFY
)
989 unsigned int regno
= DF_REF_REGNO (def
);
991 /* Do not combine frame pointer adjustments. */
992 if ((regno
== FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
993 && (!reload_completed
|| frame_pointer_needed
))
994 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
995 && regno
== HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
996 && (!reload_completed
|| frame_pointer_needed
))
997 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
!= ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
998 && regno
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
&& fixed_regs
[regno
]))
1004 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine USE. */
1006 can_combine_use_p (df_ref use
)
1008 /* Do not consider the usage of the stack pointer by function call. */
1009 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (use
) & DF_REF_CALL_STACK_USAGE
)
1015 /* Fill in log links field for all insns. */
1018 create_log_links (void)
1021 rtx_insn
**next_use
;
1025 next_use
= XCNEWVEC (rtx_insn
*, max_reg_num ());
1027 /* Pass through each block from the end, recording the uses of each
1028 register and establishing log links when def is encountered.
1029 Note that we do not clear next_use array in order to save time,
1030 so we have to test whether the use is in the same basic block as def.
1032 There are a few cases below when we do not consider the definition or
1033 usage -- these are taken from original flow.c did. Don't ask me why it is
1034 done this way; I don't know and if it works, I don't want to know. */
1036 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb
, cfun
)
1038 FOR_BB_INSNS_REVERSE (bb
, insn
)
1040 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
1043 /* Log links are created only once. */
1044 gcc_assert (!LOG_LINKS (insn
));
1046 FOR_EACH_INSN_DEF (def
, insn
)
1048 unsigned int regno
= DF_REF_REGNO (def
);
1051 if (!next_use
[regno
])
1054 if (!can_combine_def_p (def
))
1057 use_insn
= next_use
[regno
];
1058 next_use
[regno
] = NULL
;
1060 if (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (use_insn
) != bb
)
1065 We don't build a LOG_LINK for hard registers contained
1066 in ASM_OPERANDs. If these registers get replaced,
1067 we might wind up changing the semantics of the insn,
1068 even if reload can make what appear to be valid
1069 assignments later. */
1070 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1071 && asm_noperands (PATTERN (use_insn
)) >= 0)
1074 /* Don't add duplicate links between instructions. */
1075 struct insn_link
*links
;
1076 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, use_insn
)
1077 if (insn
== links
->insn
&& regno
== links
->regno
)
1081 LOG_LINKS (use_insn
)
1082 = alloc_insn_link (insn
, regno
, LOG_LINKS (use_insn
));
1085 FOR_EACH_INSN_USE (use
, insn
)
1086 if (can_combine_use_p (use
))
1087 next_use
[DF_REF_REGNO (use
)] = insn
;
1094 /* Walk the LOG_LINKS of insn B to see if we find a reference to A. Return
1095 true if we found a LOG_LINK that proves that A feeds B. This only works
1096 if there are no instructions between A and B which could have a link
1097 depending on A, since in that case we would not record a link for B. */
1100 insn_a_feeds_b (rtx_insn
*a
, rtx_insn
*b
)
1102 struct insn_link
*links
;
1103 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, b
)
1104 if (links
->insn
== a
)
1109 /* Main entry point for combiner. F is the first insn of the function.
1110 NREGS is the first unused pseudo-reg number.
1112 Return nonzero if the CFG was changed (e.g. if the combiner has
1113 turned an indirect jump instruction into a direct jump). */
1115 combine_instructions (rtx_insn
*f
, unsigned int nregs
)
1117 rtx_insn
*insn
, *next
;
1118 struct insn_link
*links
, *nextlinks
;
1120 basic_block last_bb
;
1122 bool new_direct_jump_p
= false;
1124 for (first
= f
; first
&& !NONDEBUG_INSN_P (first
); )
1125 first
= NEXT_INSN (first
);
1129 combine_attempts
= 0;
1132 combine_successes
= 0;
1134 rtl_hooks
= combine_rtl_hooks
;
1136 reg_stat
.safe_grow_cleared (nregs
, true);
1138 init_recog_no_volatile ();
1140 /* Allocate array for insn info. */
1141 max_uid_known
= get_max_uid ();
1142 uid_log_links
= XCNEWVEC (struct insn_link
*, max_uid_known
+ 1);
1143 uid_insn_cost
= XCNEWVEC (int, max_uid_known
+ 1);
1144 gcc_obstack_init (&insn_link_obstack
);
1146 nonzero_bits_mode
= int_mode_for_size (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
, 0).require ();
1148 /* Don't use reg_stat[].nonzero_bits when computing it. This can cause
1149 problems when, for example, we have j <<= 1 in a loop. */
1151 nonzero_sign_valid
= 0;
1152 label_tick
= label_tick_ebb_start
= 1;
1154 /* Scan all SETs and see if we can deduce anything about what
1155 bits are known to be zero for some registers and how many copies
1156 of the sign bit are known to exist for those registers.
1158 Also set any known values so that we can use it while searching
1159 for what bits are known to be set. */
1161 setup_incoming_promotions (first
);
1162 /* Allow the entry block and the first block to fall into the same EBB.
1163 Conceptually the incoming promotions are assigned to the entry block. */
1164 last_bb
= ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
);
1166 create_log_links ();
1167 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block
, cfun
)
1169 optimize_this_for_speed_p
= optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block
);
1174 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block
)
1175 || single_pred (this_basic_block
) != last_bb
)
1176 label_tick_ebb_start
= label_tick
;
1177 last_bb
= this_basic_block
;
1179 FOR_BB_INSNS (this_basic_block
, insn
)
1180 if (INSN_P (insn
) && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
))
1184 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
1187 note_stores (insn
, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies
, insn
);
1188 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn
);
1191 for (links
= REG_NOTES (insn
); links
; links
= XEXP (links
, 1))
1192 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (links
) == REG_INC
)
1193 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (XEXP (links
, 0), NULL_RTX
,
1196 /* Record the current insn_cost of this instruction. */
1197 INSN_COST (insn
) = insn_cost (insn
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
);
1200 fprintf (dump_file
, "insn_cost %d for ", INSN_COST (insn
));
1201 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, insn
);
1206 nonzero_sign_valid
= 1;
1208 /* Now scan all the insns in forward order. */
1209 label_tick
= label_tick_ebb_start
= 1;
1211 setup_incoming_promotions (first
);
1212 last_bb
= ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
);
1213 int max_combine
= param_max_combine_insns
;
1215 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block
, cfun
)
1217 rtx_insn
*last_combined_insn
= NULL
;
1219 /* Ignore instruction combination in basic blocks that are going to
1220 be removed as unreachable anyway. See PR82386. */
1221 if (EDGE_COUNT (this_basic_block
->preds
) == 0)
1224 optimize_this_for_speed_p
= optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block
);
1229 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block
)
1230 || single_pred (this_basic_block
) != last_bb
)
1231 label_tick_ebb_start
= label_tick
;
1232 last_bb
= this_basic_block
;
1234 rtl_profile_for_bb (this_basic_block
);
1235 for (insn
= BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
);
1236 insn
!= NEXT_INSN (BB_END (this_basic_block
));
1237 insn
= next
? next
: NEXT_INSN (insn
))
1240 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
1243 while (last_combined_insn
1244 && (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (last_combined_insn
)
1245 || last_combined_insn
->deleted ()))
1246 last_combined_insn
= PREV_INSN (last_combined_insn
);
1247 if (last_combined_insn
== NULL_RTX
1248 || BLOCK_FOR_INSN (last_combined_insn
) != this_basic_block
1249 || DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn
) <= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
))
1250 last_combined_insn
= insn
;
1252 /* See if we know about function return values before this
1253 insn based upon SUBREG flags. */
1254 check_promoted_subreg (insn
, PATTERN (insn
));
1256 /* See if we can find hardregs and subreg of pseudos in
1257 narrower modes. This could help turning TRUNCATEs
1259 note_uses (&PATTERN (insn
), record_truncated_values
, NULL
);
1261 /* Try this insn with each insn it links back to. */
1263 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1264 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, links
->insn
, NULL
,
1265 NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1266 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1268 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "two-insn combine", 1);
1272 /* Try each sequence of three linked insns ending with this one. */
1274 if (max_combine
>= 3)
1275 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1277 rtx_insn
*link
= links
->insn
;
1279 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1280 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1284 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link
)
1285 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, nextlinks
->insn
,
1286 NULL
, &new_direct_jump_p
,
1287 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1289 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "three-insn combine", 1);
1294 /* Try combining an insn with two different insns whose results it
1296 if (max_combine
>= 3)
1297 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1298 for (nextlinks
= links
->next
; nextlinks
;
1299 nextlinks
= nextlinks
->next
)
1300 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, links
->insn
,
1301 nextlinks
->insn
, NULL
,
1303 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1306 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "three-insn combine", 1);
1310 /* Try four-instruction combinations. */
1311 if (max_combine
>= 4)
1312 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1314 struct insn_link
*next1
;
1315 rtx_insn
*link
= links
->insn
;
1317 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1318 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1322 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (next1
, link
)
1324 rtx_insn
*link1
= next1
->insn
;
1327 /* I0 -> I1 -> I2 -> I3. */
1328 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link1
)
1329 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1332 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1334 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1337 /* I0, I1 -> I2, I2 -> I3. */
1338 for (nextlinks
= next1
->next
; nextlinks
;
1339 nextlinks
= nextlinks
->next
)
1340 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1343 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1345 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1350 for (next1
= links
->next
; next1
; next1
= next1
->next
)
1352 rtx_insn
*link1
= next1
->insn
;
1355 /* I0 -> I2; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1356 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link
)
1357 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1360 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1362 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1365 /* I0 -> I1; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1366 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks
, link1
)
1367 if ((next
= try_combine (insn
, link
, link1
,
1370 last_combined_insn
)) != 0)
1372 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "four-insn combine", 1);
1378 /* Try this insn with each REG_EQUAL note it links back to. */
1379 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links
, insn
)
1382 rtx_insn
*temp
= links
->insn
;
1383 if ((set
= single_set (temp
)) != 0
1384 && (note
= find_reg_equal_equiv_note (temp
)) != 0
1385 && (note
= XEXP (note
, 0), GET_CODE (note
)) != EXPR_LIST
1386 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set
))
1387 /* Avoid using a register that may already been marked
1388 dead by an earlier instruction. */
1389 && ! unmentioned_reg_p (note
, SET_SRC (set
))
1390 && (GET_MODE (note
) == VOIDmode
1391 ? SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
)))
1392 : (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
)) == GET_MODE (note
)
1393 && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set
)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
1394 || (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (set
), 0))
1395 == GET_MODE (note
))))))
1397 /* Temporarily replace the set's source with the
1398 contents of the REG_EQUAL note. The insn will
1399 be deleted or recognized by try_combine. */
1400 rtx orig_src
= SET_SRC (set
);
1401 rtx orig_dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
1402 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set
)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
1403 SET_DEST (set
) = XEXP (SET_DEST (set
), 0);
1404 SET_SRC (set
) = note
;
1406 i2mod_old_rhs
= copy_rtx (orig_src
);
1407 i2mod_new_rhs
= copy_rtx (note
);
1408 next
= try_combine (insn
, i2mod
, NULL
, NULL
,
1410 last_combined_insn
);
1414 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "insn-with-note combine", 1);
1417 INSN_CODE (temp
) = -1;
1418 SET_SRC (set
) = orig_src
;
1419 SET_DEST (set
) = orig_dest
;
1424 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn
);
1431 default_rtl_profile ();
1434 if (purge_all_dead_edges ())
1435 new_direct_jump_p
= true;
1436 if (delete_noop_moves ())
1437 new_direct_jump_p
= true;
1440 obstack_free (&insn_link_obstack
, NULL
);
1441 free (uid_log_links
);
1442 free (uid_insn_cost
);
1443 reg_stat
.release ();
1446 struct undo
*undo
, *next
;
1447 for (undo
= undobuf
.frees
; undo
; undo
= next
)
1455 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "attempts", combine_attempts
);
1456 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "merges", combine_merges
);
1457 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "extras", combine_extras
);
1458 statistics_counter_event (cfun
, "successes", combine_successes
);
1460 nonzero_sign_valid
= 0;
1461 rtl_hooks
= general_rtl_hooks
;
1463 /* Make recognizer allow volatile MEMs again. */
1466 return new_direct_jump_p
;
1469 /* Wipe the last_xxx fields of reg_stat in preparation for another pass. */
1472 init_reg_last (void)
1477 FOR_EACH_VEC_ELT (reg_stat
, i
, p
)
1478 memset (p
, 0, offsetof (reg_stat_type
, sign_bit_copies
));
1481 /* Set up any promoted values for incoming argument registers. */
1484 setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn
*first
)
1487 bool strictly_local
= false;
1489 for (arg
= DECL_ARGUMENTS (current_function_decl
); arg
;
1490 arg
= DECL_CHAIN (arg
))
1492 rtx x
, reg
= DECL_INCOMING_RTL (arg
);
1494 machine_mode mode1
, mode2
, mode3
, mode4
;
1496 /* Only continue if the incoming argument is in a register. */
1500 /* Determine, if possible, whether all call sites of the current
1501 function lie within the current compilation unit. (This does
1502 take into account the exporting of a function via taking its
1503 address, and so forth.) */
1505 = cgraph_node::local_info_node (current_function_decl
)->local
;
1507 /* The mode and signedness of the argument before any promotions happen
1508 (equal to the mode of the pseudo holding it at that stage). */
1509 mode1
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (arg
));
1510 uns1
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (arg
));
1512 /* The mode and signedness of the argument after any source language and
1513 TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES-driven promotions. */
1514 mode2
= TYPE_MODE (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg
));
1515 uns3
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg
));
1517 /* The mode and signedness of the argument as it is actually passed,
1518 see assign_parm_setup_reg in function.cc. */
1519 mode3
= promote_function_mode (TREE_TYPE (arg
), mode1
, &uns3
,
1520 TREE_TYPE (cfun
->decl
), 0);
1522 /* The mode of the register in which the argument is being passed. */
1523 mode4
= GET_MODE (reg
);
1525 /* Eliminate sign extensions in the callee when:
1526 (a) A mode promotion has occurred; */
1529 /* (b) The mode of the register is the same as the mode of
1530 the argument as it is passed; */
1533 /* (c) There's no language level extension; */
1536 /* (c.1) All callers are from the current compilation unit. If that's
1537 the case we don't have to rely on an ABI, we only have to know
1538 what we're generating right now, and we know that we will do the
1539 mode1 to mode2 promotion with the given sign. */
1540 else if (!strictly_local
)
1542 /* (c.2) The combination of the two promotions is useful. This is
1543 true when the signs match, or if the first promotion is unsigned.
1544 In the later case, (sign_extend (zero_extend x)) is the same as
1545 (zero_extend (zero_extend x)), so make sure to force UNS3 true. */
1551 /* Record that the value was promoted from mode1 to mode3,
1552 so that any sign extension at the head of the current
1553 function may be eliminated. */
1554 x
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode1
, const0_rtx
);
1555 x
= gen_rtx_fmt_e ((uns3
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
), mode3
, x
);
1556 record_value_for_reg (reg
, first
, x
);
1560 /* If MODE has a precision lower than PREC and SRC is a non-negative constant
1561 that would appear negative in MODE, sign-extend SRC for use in nonzero_bits
1562 because some machines (maybe most) will actually do the sign-extension and
1563 this is the conservative approach.
1565 ??? For 2.5, try to tighten up the MD files in this regard instead of this
1569 sign_extend_short_imm (rtx src
, machine_mode mode
, unsigned int prec
)
1571 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
1572 if (CONST_INT_P (src
)
1573 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
1574 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) < prec
1576 && val_signbit_known_set_p (int_mode
, INTVAL (src
)))
1577 src
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (src
) | ~GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
));
1582 /* Update RSP for pseudo-register X from INSN's REG_EQUAL note (if one exists)
1586 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (reg_stat_type
*rsp
, rtx_insn
*insn
, const_rtx set
,
1589 rtx reg_equal_note
= insn
? find_reg_equal_equiv_note (insn
) : NULL_RTX
;
1590 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bits
= 0;
1591 rtx reg_equal
= NULL
, src
= SET_SRC (set
);
1592 unsigned int num
= 0;
1595 reg_equal
= XEXP (reg_equal_note
, 0);
1597 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
)
1599 src
= sign_extend_short_imm (src
, GET_MODE (x
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
1601 reg_equal
= sign_extend_short_imm (reg_equal
, GET_MODE (x
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
1604 /* Don't call nonzero_bits if it cannot change anything. */
1605 if (rsp
->nonzero_bits
!= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
)
1607 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
1608 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
1609 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
1610 mode
= nonzero_bits_mode
;
1611 bits
= nonzero_bits (src
, mode
);
1612 if (reg_equal
&& bits
)
1613 bits
&= nonzero_bits (reg_equal
, mode
);
1614 rsp
->nonzero_bits
|= bits
;
1617 /* Don't call num_sign_bit_copies if it cannot change anything. */
1618 if (rsp
->sign_bit_copies
!= 1)
1620 num
= num_sign_bit_copies (SET_SRC (set
), GET_MODE (x
));
1621 if (reg_equal
&& maybe_ne (num
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
))))
1623 unsigned int numeq
= num_sign_bit_copies (reg_equal
, GET_MODE (x
));
1624 if (num
== 0 || numeq
> num
)
1627 if (rsp
->sign_bit_copies
== 0 || num
< rsp
->sign_bit_copies
)
1628 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= num
;
1632 /* Called via note_stores. If X is a pseudo that is narrower than
1633 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and is being set, record what bits are known zero.
1635 If we are setting only a portion of X and we can't figure out what
1636 portion, assume all bits will be used since we don't know what will
1639 Similarly, set how many bits of X are known to be copies of the sign bit
1640 at all locations in the function. This is the smallest number implied
1644 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx x
, const_rtx set
, void *data
)
1646 rtx_insn
*insn
= (rtx_insn
*) data
;
1647 scalar_int_mode mode
;
1650 && REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1651 /* If this register is undefined at the start of the file, we can't
1652 say what its contents were. */
1653 && ! REGNO_REG_SET_P
1654 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
), REGNO (x
))
1655 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (x
), &mode
)
1656 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
1658 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
1660 if (set
== 0 || GET_CODE (set
) == CLOBBER
)
1662 rsp
->nonzero_bits
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
1663 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= 1;
1667 /* If this register is being initialized using itself, and the
1668 register is uninitialized in this basic block, and there are
1669 no LOG_LINKS which set the register, then part of the
1670 register is uninitialized. In that case we can't assume
1671 anything about the number of nonzero bits.
1673 ??? We could do better if we checked this in
1674 reg_{nonzero_bits,num_sign_bit_copies}_for_combine. Then we
1675 could avoid making assumptions about the insn which initially
1676 sets the register, while still using the information in other
1677 insns. We would have to be careful to check every insn
1678 involved in the combination. */
1681 && reg_referenced_p (x
, PATTERN (insn
))
1682 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P (DF_LR_IN (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
)),
1685 struct insn_link
*link
;
1687 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, insn
)
1688 if (dead_or_set_p (link
->insn
, x
))
1692 rsp
->nonzero_bits
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
1693 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= 1;
1698 /* If this is a complex assignment, see if we can convert it into a
1699 simple assignment. */
1700 set
= expand_field_assignment (set
);
1702 /* If this is a simple assignment, or we have a paradoxical SUBREG,
1703 set what we know about X. */
1705 if (SET_DEST (set
) == x
1706 || (paradoxical_subreg_p (SET_DEST (set
))
1707 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set
)) == x
))
1708 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (rsp
, insn
, set
, x
);
1711 rsp
->nonzero_bits
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
1712 rsp
->sign_bit_copies
= 1;
1717 /* See if INSN can be combined into I3. PRED, PRED2, SUCC and SUCC2 are
1718 optionally insns that were previously combined into I3 or that will be
1719 combined into the merger of INSN and I3. The order is PRED, PRED2,
1720 INSN, SUCC, SUCC2, I3.
1722 Return false if the combination is not allowed for any reason.
1724 If the combination is allowed, *PDEST will be set to the single
1725 destination of INSN and *PSRC to the single source, and this function
1726 will return true. */
1729 can_combine_p (rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx_insn
*pred ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
1730 rtx_insn
*pred2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, rtx_insn
*succ
, rtx_insn
*succ2
,
1731 rtx
*pdest
, rtx
*psrc
)
1738 bool all_adjacent
= true;
1739 bool (*is_volatile_p
) (const_rtx
);
1745 if (next_active_insn (succ2
) != i3
)
1746 all_adjacent
= false;
1747 if (next_active_insn (succ
) != succ2
)
1748 all_adjacent
= false;
1750 else if (next_active_insn (succ
) != i3
)
1751 all_adjacent
= false;
1752 if (next_active_insn (insn
) != succ
)
1753 all_adjacent
= false;
1755 else if (next_active_insn (insn
) != i3
)
1756 all_adjacent
= false;
1758 /* Can combine only if previous insn is a SET of a REG or a SUBREG,
1759 or a PARALLEL consisting of such a SET and CLOBBERs.
1761 If INSN has CLOBBER parallel parts, ignore them for our processing.
1762 By definition, these happen during the execution of the insn. When it
1763 is merged with another insn, all bets are off. If they are, in fact,
1764 needed and aren't also supplied in I3, they may be added by
1765 recog_for_combine. Otherwise, it won't match.
1767 We can also ignore a SET whose SET_DEST is mentioned in a REG_UNUSED
1770 Get the source and destination of INSN. If more than one, can't
1773 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == SET
)
1774 set
= PATTERN (insn
);
1775 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn
)) == PARALLEL
1776 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, 0)) == SET
)
1778 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn
), 0); i
++)
1780 rtx elt
= XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn
), 0, i
);
1782 switch (GET_CODE (elt
))
1784 /* This is important to combine floating point insns
1785 for the SH4 port. */
1787 /* Combining an isolated USE doesn't make sense.
1788 We depend here on combinable_i3pat to reject them. */
1789 /* The code below this loop only verifies that the inputs of
1790 the SET in INSN do not change. We call reg_set_between_p
1791 to verify that the REG in the USE does not change between
1793 If the USE in INSN was for a pseudo register, the matching
1794 insn pattern will likely match any register; combining this
1795 with any other USE would only be safe if we knew that the
1796 used registers have identical values, or if there was
1797 something to tell them apart, e.g. different modes. For
1798 now, we forgo such complicated tests and simply disallow
1799 combining of USES of pseudo registers with any other USE. */
1800 if (REG_P (XEXP (elt
, 0))
1801 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == PARALLEL
)
1803 rtx i3pat
= PATTERN (i3
);
1804 int i
= XVECLEN (i3pat
, 0) - 1;
1805 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (elt
, 0));
1809 rtx i3elt
= XVECEXP (i3pat
, 0, i
);
1811 if (GET_CODE (i3elt
) == USE
1812 && REG_P (XEXP (i3elt
, 0))
1813 && (REGNO (XEXP (i3elt
, 0)) == regno
1814 ? reg_set_between_p (XEXP (elt
, 0),
1815 PREV_INSN (insn
), i3
)
1816 : regno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
1823 /* We can ignore CLOBBERs. */
1828 /* Ignore SETs whose result isn't used but not those that
1829 have side-effects. */
1830 if (find_reg_note (insn
, REG_UNUSED
, SET_DEST (elt
))
1831 && insn_nothrow_p (insn
)
1832 && !side_effects_p (elt
))
1835 /* If we have already found a SET, this is a second one and
1836 so we cannot combine with this insn. */
1844 /* Anything else means we can't combine. */
1850 /* If SET_SRC is an ASM_OPERANDS we can't throw away these CLOBBERs,
1851 so don't do anything with it. */
1852 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set
)) == ASM_OPERANDS
)
1861 /* The simplification in expand_field_assignment may call back to
1862 get_last_value, so set safe guard here. */
1863 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
1865 set
= expand_field_assignment (set
);
1866 src
= SET_SRC (set
), dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
1868 /* Do not eliminate user-specified register if it is in an
1869 asm input because we may break the register asm usage defined
1870 in GCC manual if allow to do so.
1871 Be aware that this may cover more cases than we expect but this
1872 should be harmless. */
1873 if (REG_P (dest
) && REG_USERVAR_P (dest
) && HARD_REGISTER_P (dest
)
1874 && extract_asm_operands (PATTERN (i3
)))
1877 /* Don't eliminate a store in the stack pointer. */
1878 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
1879 /* Don't combine with an insn that sets a register to itself if it has
1880 a REG_EQUAL note. This may be part of a LIBCALL sequence. */
1881 || (rtx_equal_p (src
, dest
) && find_reg_note (insn
, REG_EQUAL
, NULL_RTX
))
1882 /* Can't merge an ASM_OPERANDS. */
1883 || GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
1884 /* Can't merge a function call. */
1885 || GET_CODE (src
) == CALL
1886 /* Don't eliminate a function call argument. */
1888 && (find_reg_fusage (i3
, USE
, dest
)
1890 && REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1891 && global_regs
[REGNO (dest
)])))
1892 /* Don't substitute into an incremented register. */
1893 || FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i3
, dest
)
1894 || (succ
&& FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ
, dest
))
1895 || (succ2
&& FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ2
, dest
))
1896 /* Don't substitute into a non-local goto, this confuses CFG. */
1897 || (JUMP_P (i3
) && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO
, NULL_RTX
))
1898 /* Make sure that DEST is not used after INSN but before SUCC, or
1899 after SUCC and before SUCC2, or after SUCC2 but before I3. */
1902 && (reg_used_between_p (dest
, succ2
, i3
)
1903 || reg_used_between_p (dest
, succ
, succ2
)))
1904 || (!succ2
&& succ
&& reg_used_between_p (dest
, succ
, i3
))
1905 || (!succ2
&& !succ
&& reg_used_between_p (dest
, insn
, i3
))
1907 /* SUCC and SUCC2 can be split halves from a PARALLEL; in
1908 that case SUCC is not in the insn stream, so use SUCC2
1909 instead for this test. */
1910 && reg_used_between_p (dest
, insn
,
1912 && INSN_UID (succ
) == INSN_UID (succ2
)
1914 /* Make sure that the value that is to be substituted for the register
1915 does not use any registers whose values alter in between. However,
1916 If the insns are adjacent, a use can't cross a set even though we
1917 think it might (this can happen for a sequence of insns each setting
1918 the same destination; last_set of that register might point to
1919 a NOTE). If INSN has a REG_EQUIV note, the register is always
1920 equivalent to the memory so the substitution is valid even if there
1921 are intervening stores. Also, don't move a volatile asm or
1922 UNSPEC_VOLATILE across any other insns. */
1925 || ! find_reg_note (insn
, REG_EQUIV
, src
))
1926 && modified_between_p (src
, insn
, i3
))
1927 || (GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (src
))
1928 || GET_CODE (src
) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE
))
1929 /* Don't combine across a CALL_INSN, because that would possibly
1930 change whether the life span of some REGs crosses calls or not,
1931 and it is a pain to update that information.
1932 Exception: if source is a constant, moving it later can't hurt.
1933 Accept that as a special case. */
1934 || (DF_INSN_LUID (insn
) < last_call_luid
&& ! CONSTANT_P (src
)))
1937 /* DEST must be a REG. */
1940 /* If register alignment is being enforced for multi-word items in all
1941 cases except for parameters, it is possible to have a register copy
1942 insn referencing a hard register that is not allowed to contain the
1943 mode being copied and which would not be valid as an operand of most
1944 insns. Eliminate this problem by not combining with such an insn.
1946 Also, on some machines we don't want to extend the life of a hard
1950 && ((REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1951 && !targetm
.hard_regno_mode_ok (REGNO (dest
), GET_MODE (dest
)))
1952 /* Don't extend the life of a hard register unless it is
1953 user variable (if we have few registers) or it can't
1954 fit into the desired register (meaning something special
1956 Also avoid substituting a return register into I3, because
1957 reload can't handle a conflict with constraints of other
1959 || (REGNO (src
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1960 && !targetm
.hard_regno_mode_ok (REGNO (src
),
1968 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == PARALLEL
)
1969 for (i
= XVECLEN (PATTERN (i3
), 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
1970 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3
), 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
1972 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3
), 0, i
), 0);
1974 /* If the clobber represents an earlyclobber operand, we must not
1975 substitute an expression containing the clobbered register.
1976 As we do not analyze the constraint strings here, we have to
1977 make the conservative assumption. However, if the register is
1978 a fixed hard reg, the clobber cannot represent any operand;
1979 we leave it up to the machine description to either accept or
1980 reject use-and-clobber patterns. */
1982 || REGNO (reg
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1983 || !fixed_regs
[REGNO (reg
)])
1984 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, src
))
1988 /* If INSN contains anything volatile, or is an `asm' (whether volatile
1989 or not), reject, unless nothing volatile comes between it and I3 */
1991 if (GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
|| volatile_refs_p (src
))
1993 /* Make sure neither succ nor succ2 contains a volatile reference. */
1994 if (succ2
!= 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ2
)))
1996 if (succ
!= 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ
)))
1998 /* We'll check insns between INSN and I3 below. */
2001 /* If INSN is an asm, and DEST is a hard register, reject, since it has
2002 to be an explicit register variable, and was chosen for a reason. */
2004 if (GET_CODE (src
) == ASM_OPERANDS
2005 && REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2008 /* If INSN contains volatile references (specifically volatile MEMs),
2009 we cannot combine across any other volatile references.
2010 Even if INSN doesn't contain volatile references, any intervening
2011 volatile insn might affect machine state. */
2013 is_volatile_p
= volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (insn
))
2017 for (p
= NEXT_INSN (insn
); p
!= i3
; p
= NEXT_INSN (p
))
2018 if (INSN_P (p
) && p
!= succ
&& p
!= succ2
&& is_volatile_p (PATTERN (p
)))
2021 /* If INSN contains an autoincrement or autodecrement, make sure that
2022 register is not used between there and I3, and not already used in
2023 I3 either. Neither must it be used in PRED or SUCC, if they exist.
2024 Also insist that I3 not be a jump if using LRA; if it were one
2025 and the incremented register were spilled, we would lose.
2026 Reload handles this correctly. */
2029 for (link
= REG_NOTES (insn
); link
; link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
2030 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_INC
2031 && ((JUMP_P (i3
) && targetm
.lra_p ())
2032 || reg_used_between_p (XEXP (link
, 0), insn
, i3
)
2033 || (pred
!= NULL_RTX
2034 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (pred
)))
2035 || (pred2
!= NULL_RTX
2036 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (pred2
)))
2037 || (succ
!= NULL_RTX
2038 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (succ
)))
2039 || (succ2
!= NULL_RTX
2040 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (succ2
)))
2041 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (i3
))))
2044 /* If we get here, we have passed all the tests and the combination is
2053 /* LOC is the location within I3 that contains its pattern or the component
2054 of a PARALLEL of the pattern. We validate that it is valid for combining.
2056 One problem is if I3 modifies its output, as opposed to replacing it
2057 entirely, we can't allow the output to contain I2DEST, I1DEST or I0DEST as
2058 doing so would produce an insn that is not equivalent to the original insns.
2062 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))
2063 (set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 101) 0) <foo>)
2065 This is NOT equivalent to:
2067 (parallel [(set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 100) 0) <foo>)
2068 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))])
2070 Not only does this modify 100 (in which case it might still be valid
2071 if 100 were dead in I2), it sets 101 to the ORIGINAL value of 100.
2073 We can also run into a problem if I2 sets a register that I1
2074 uses and I1 gets directly substituted into I3 (not via I2). In that
2075 case, we would be getting the wrong value of I2DEST into I3, so we
2076 must reject the combination. This case occurs when I2 and I1 both
2077 feed into I3, rather than when I1 feeds into I2, which feeds into I3.
2078 If I1_NOT_IN_SRC is nonzero, it means that finding I1 in the source
2079 of a SET must prevent combination from occurring. The same situation
2080 can occur for I0, in which case I0_NOT_IN_SRC is set.
2082 Before doing the above check, we first try to expand a field assignment
2083 into a set of logical operations.
2085 If PI3_DEST_KILLED is nonzero, it is a pointer to a location in which
2086 we place a register that is both set and used within I3. If more than one
2087 such register is detected, we fail.
2089 Return true if the combination is valid, false otherwise. */
2092 combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx
*loc
, rtx i2dest
, rtx i1dest
, rtx i0dest
,
2093 bool i1_not_in_src
, bool i0_not_in_src
, rtx
*pi3dest_killed
)
2097 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SET
)
2100 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
2101 rtx src
= SET_SRC (set
);
2102 rtx inner_dest
= dest
;
2105 while (GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2106 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == SUBREG
2107 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
2108 inner_dest
= XEXP (inner_dest
, 0);
2110 /* Check for the case where I3 modifies its output, as discussed
2111 above. We don't want to prevent pseudos from being combined
2112 into the address of a MEM, so only prevent the combination if
2113 i1 or i2 set the same MEM. */
2114 if ((inner_dest
!= dest
&&
2115 (!MEM_P (inner_dest
)
2116 || rtx_equal_p (i2dest
, inner_dest
)
2117 || (i1dest
&& rtx_equal_p (i1dest
, inner_dest
))
2118 || (i0dest
&& rtx_equal_p (i0dest
, inner_dest
)))
2119 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, inner_dest
)
2120 || (i1dest
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, inner_dest
))
2121 || (i0dest
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, inner_dest
))))
2123 /* This is the same test done in can_combine_p except we can't test
2124 all_adjacent; we don't have to, since this instruction will stay
2125 in place, thus we are not considering increasing the lifetime of
2128 Also, if this insn sets a function argument, combining it with
2129 something that might need a spill could clobber a previous
2130 function argument; the all_adjacent test in can_combine_p also
2131 checks this; here, we do a more specific test for this case. */
2133 || (REG_P (inner_dest
)
2134 && REGNO (inner_dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2135 && !targetm
.hard_regno_mode_ok (REGNO (inner_dest
),
2136 GET_MODE (inner_dest
)))
2137 || (i1_not_in_src
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, src
))
2138 || (i0_not_in_src
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, src
)))
2141 /* If DEST is used in I3, it is being killed in this insn, so
2142 record that for later. We have to consider paradoxical
2143 subregs here, since they kill the whole register, but we
2144 ignore partial subregs, STRICT_LOW_PART, etc.
2145 Never add REG_DEAD notes for the FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM or the
2146 STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, since these are always considered to be
2147 live. Similarly for ARG_POINTER_REGNUM if it is fixed. */
2149 if (GET_CODE (subdest
) == SUBREG
&& !partial_subreg_p (subdest
))
2150 subdest
= SUBREG_REG (subdest
);
2153 && reg_referenced_p (subdest
, PATTERN (i3
))
2154 && REGNO (subdest
) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2155 && (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2156 || REGNO (subdest
) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
2157 && (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2158 || (REGNO (subdest
) != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2159 || ! fixed_regs
[REGNO (subdest
)]))
2160 && REGNO (subdest
) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
)
2162 if (*pi3dest_killed
)
2165 *pi3dest_killed
= subdest
;
2169 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == PARALLEL
)
2173 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (x
, 0); i
++)
2174 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3
, &XVECEXP (x
, 0, i
), i2dest
, i1dest
, i0dest
,
2175 i1_not_in_src
, i0_not_in_src
, pi3dest_killed
))
2182 /* Return true if X is an arithmetic expression that contains a multiplication
2183 and division. We don't count multiplications by powers of two here. */
2186 contains_muldiv (rtx x
)
2188 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
2190 case MOD
: case DIV
: case UMOD
: case UDIV
:
2194 return ! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
2195 && pow2p_hwi (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))));
2198 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x
, 0))
2199 || contains_muldiv (XEXP (x
, 1));
2202 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x
, 0));
2208 /* Determine whether INSN can be used in a combination. Return true if
2209 not. This is used in try_combine to detect early some cases where we
2210 can't perform combinations. */
2213 cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2218 /* If this isn't really an insn, we can't do anything.
2219 This can occur when flow deletes an insn that it has merged into an
2220 auto-increment address. */
2221 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
2224 /* Never combine loads and stores involving hard regs that are likely
2225 to be spilled. The register allocator can usually handle such
2226 reg-reg moves by tying. If we allow the combiner to make
2227 substitutions of likely-spilled regs, reload might die.
2228 As an exception, we allow combinations involving fixed regs; these are
2229 not available to the register allocator so there's no risk involved. */
2231 set
= single_set (insn
);
2234 src
= SET_SRC (set
);
2235 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
2236 if (GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
)
2237 src
= SUBREG_REG (src
);
2238 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
2239 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
2240 if (REG_P (src
) && REG_P (dest
)
2241 && ((HARD_REGISTER_P (src
)
2242 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set
, REGNO (src
))
2243 #ifdef LEAF_REGISTERS
2244 && ! LEAF_REGISTERS
[REGNO (src
)])
2248 || (HARD_REGISTER_P (dest
)
2249 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set
, REGNO (dest
))
2250 && targetm
.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (dest
))))))
2256 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
2258 unsigned regno
, nregs
;
2262 /* Called via note_stores by likely_spilled_retval_p. Remove from info->mask
2263 hard registers that are known to be written to / clobbered in full. */
2265 likely_spilled_retval_1 (rtx x
, const_rtx set
, void *data
)
2267 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
*const info
=
2268 (struct likely_spilled_retval_info
*) data
;
2269 unsigned regno
, nregs
;
2272 if (!REG_P (XEXP (set
, 0)))
2275 if (regno
>= info
->regno
+ info
->nregs
)
2277 nregs
= REG_NREGS (x
);
2278 if (regno
+ nregs
<= info
->regno
)
2280 new_mask
= (2U << (nregs
- 1)) - 1;
2281 if (regno
< info
->regno
)
2282 new_mask
>>= info
->regno
- regno
;
2284 new_mask
<<= regno
- info
->regno
;
2285 info
->mask
&= ~new_mask
;
2288 /* Return true iff part of the return value is live during INSN, and
2289 it is likely spilled. This can happen when more than one insn is needed
2290 to copy the return value, e.g. when we consider to combine into the
2291 second copy insn for a complex value. */
2294 likely_spilled_retval_p (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2296 rtx_insn
*use
= BB_END (this_basic_block
);
2299 unsigned regno
, nregs
;
2300 /* We assume here that no machine mode needs more than
2301 32 hard registers when the value overlaps with a register
2302 for which TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P is true. */
2304 struct likely_spilled_retval_info info
;
2306 if (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (use
) || GET_CODE (PATTERN (use
)) != USE
|| insn
== use
)
2308 reg
= XEXP (PATTERN (use
), 0);
2309 if (!REG_P (reg
) || !targetm
.calls
.function_value_regno_p (REGNO (reg
)))
2311 regno
= REGNO (reg
);
2312 nregs
= REG_NREGS (reg
);
2315 mask
= (2U << (nregs
- 1)) - 1;
2317 /* Disregard parts of the return value that are set later. */
2321 for (p
= PREV_INSN (use
); info
.mask
&& p
!= insn
; p
= PREV_INSN (p
))
2323 note_stores (p
, likely_spilled_retval_1
, &info
);
2326 /* Check if any of the (probably) live return value registers is
2331 if ((mask
& 1 << nregs
)
2332 && targetm
.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno
+ nregs
)))
2338 /* Adjust INSN after we made a change to its destination.
2340 Changing the destination can invalidate notes that say something about
2341 the results of the insn and a LOG_LINK pointing to the insn. */
2344 adjust_for_new_dest (rtx_insn
*insn
)
2346 /* For notes, be conservative and simply remove them. */
2347 remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes (insn
, true);
2349 /* The new insn will have a destination that was previously the destination
2350 of an insn just above it. Call distribute_links to make a LOG_LINK from
2351 the next use of that destination. */
2353 rtx set
= single_set (insn
);
2356 rtx reg
= SET_DEST (set
);
2358 while (GET_CODE (reg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
2359 || GET_CODE (reg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2360 || GET_CODE (reg
) == SUBREG
)
2361 reg
= XEXP (reg
, 0);
2362 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg
));
2364 distribute_links (alloc_insn_link (insn
, REGNO (reg
), NULL
));
2366 df_insn_rescan (insn
);
2369 /* Return TRUE if combine can reuse reg X in mode MODE.
2370 ADDED_SETS is trueif the original set is still required. */
2372 can_change_dest_mode (rtx x
, bool added_sets
, machine_mode mode
)
2379 /* Don't change between modes with different underlying register sizes,
2380 since this could lead to invalid subregs. */
2381 if (maybe_ne (REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (mode
),
2382 REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
))))
2386 /* Allow hard registers if the new mode is legal, and occupies no more
2387 registers than the old mode. */
2388 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2389 return (targetm
.hard_regno_mode_ok (regno
, mode
)
2390 && REG_NREGS (x
) >= hard_regno_nregs (regno
, mode
));
2392 /* Or a pseudo that is only used once. */
2393 return (regno
< reg_n_sets_max
2394 && REG_N_SETS (regno
) == 1
2396 && !REG_USERVAR_P (x
));
2400 /* Check whether X, the destination of a set, refers to part of
2401 the register specified by REG. */
2404 reg_subword_p (rtx x
, rtx reg
)
2406 /* Check that reg is an integer mode register. */
2407 if (!REG_P (reg
) || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (reg
)) != MODE_INT
)
2410 if (GET_CODE (x
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2411 || GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
2414 return GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
2415 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x
)
2416 && SUBREG_REG (x
) == reg
2417 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
)) == MODE_INT
;
2420 /* Return whether PAT is a PARALLEL of exactly N register SETs followed
2421 by an arbitrary number of CLOBBERs. */
2423 is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx pat
, int n
)
2425 if (GET_CODE (pat
) != PARALLEL
)
2428 int len
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0);
2433 for (i
= 0; i
< n
; i
++)
2434 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) != SET
2435 || !REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
))))
2437 for ( ; i
< len
; i
++)
2438 switch (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)))
2441 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
), 0) == const0_rtx
)
2450 /* Return whether INSN, a PARALLEL of N register SETs (and maybe some
2451 CLOBBERs), can be split into individual SETs in that order, without
2452 changing semantics. */
2454 can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx_insn
*insn
, int n
)
2456 if (!insn_nothrow_p (insn
))
2459 rtx pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
2462 for (i
= 0; i
< n
; i
++)
2464 if (side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
))))
2467 rtx reg
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
));
2469 for (j
= i
+ 1; j
< n
; j
++)
2470 if (reg_referenced_p (reg
, XVECEXP (pat
, 0, j
)))
2477 /* Return whether X is just a single_set, with the source
2478 a general_operand. */
2480 is_just_move (rtx_insn
*x
)
2482 rtx set
= single_set (x
);
2486 return general_operand (SET_SRC (set
), VOIDmode
);
2489 /* Callback function to count autoincs. */
2492 count_auto_inc (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, void *arg
)
2499 /* Try to combine the insns I0, I1 and I2 into I3.
2500 Here I0, I1 and I2 appear earlier than I3.
2501 I0 and I1 can be zero; then we combine just I2 into I3, or I1 and I2 into
2504 If we are combining more than two insns and the resulting insn is not
2505 recognized, try splitting it into two insns. If that happens, I2 and I3
2506 are retained and I1/I0 are pseudo-deleted by turning them into a NOTE.
2507 Otherwise, I0, I1 and I2 are pseudo-deleted.
2509 Return 0 if the combination does not work. Then nothing is changed.
2510 If we did the combination, return the insn at which combine should
2513 Set NEW_DIRECT_JUMP_P to true if try_combine creates a
2514 new direct jump instruction.
2516 LAST_COMBINED_INSN is either I3, or some insn after I3 that has
2517 been I3 passed to an earlier try_combine within the same basic
2521 try_combine (rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx_insn
*i2
, rtx_insn
*i1
, rtx_insn
*i0
,
2522 bool *new_direct_jump_p
, rtx_insn
*last_combined_insn
)
2524 /* New patterns for I3 and I2, respectively. */
2525 rtx newpat
, newi2pat
= 0;
2526 rtvec newpat_vec_with_clobbers
= 0;
2527 bool substed_i2
= false, substed_i1
= false, substed_i0
= false;
2528 /* Indicates need to preserve SET in I0, I1 or I2 in I3 if it is not
2530 bool added_sets_0
, added_sets_1
, added_sets_2
;
2531 /* Total number of SETs to put into I3. */
2533 /* Nonzero if I2's or I1's body now appears in I3. */
2534 int i2_is_used
= 0, i1_is_used
= 0;
2535 /* INSN_CODEs for new I3, new I2, and user of condition code. */
2536 int insn_code_number
, i2_code_number
= 0, other_code_number
= 0;
2537 /* Contains I3 if the destination of I3 is used in its source, which means
2538 that the old life of I3 is being killed. If that usage is placed into
2539 I2 and not in I3, a REG_DEAD note must be made. */
2540 rtx i3dest_killed
= 0;
2541 /* SET_DEST and SET_SRC of I2, I1 and I0. */
2542 rtx i2dest
= 0, i2src
= 0, i1dest
= 0, i1src
= 0, i0dest
= 0, i0src
= 0;
2543 /* Copy of SET_SRC of I1 and I0, if needed. */
2544 rtx i1src_copy
= 0, i0src_copy
= 0, i0src_copy2
= 0;
2545 /* Set if I2DEST was reused as a scratch register. */
2546 bool i2scratch
= false;
2547 /* The PATTERNs of I0, I1, and I2, or a copy of them in certain cases. */
2548 rtx i0pat
= 0, i1pat
= 0, i2pat
= 0;
2549 /* Indicates if I2DEST or I1DEST is in I2SRC or I1_SRC. */
2550 bool i2dest_in_i2src
= false, i1dest_in_i1src
= false;
2551 bool i2dest_in_i1src
= false, i0dest_in_i0src
= false;
2552 bool i1dest_in_i0src
= false, i2dest_in_i0src
= false;;
2553 bool i2dest_killed
= false, i1dest_killed
= false, i0dest_killed
= false;
2554 bool i1_feeds_i2_n
= false, i0_feeds_i2_n
= false, i0_feeds_i1_n
= false;
2555 /* Notes that must be added to REG_NOTES in I3 and I2. */
2556 rtx new_i3_notes
, new_i2_notes
;
2557 /* Notes that we substituted I3 into I2 instead of the normal case. */
2558 bool i3_subst_into_i2
= false;
2559 /* Notes that I1, I2 or I3 is a MULT operation. */
2560 bool have_mult
= false;
2561 bool swap_i2i3
= false;
2562 bool split_i2i3
= false;
2563 bool changed_i3_dest
= false;
2564 bool i2_was_move
= false, i3_was_move
= false;
2568 rtx_insn
*temp_insn
;
2570 struct insn_link
*link
;
2572 rtx new_other_notes
;
2574 scalar_int_mode dest_mode
, temp_mode
;
2575 bool has_non_call_exception
= false;
2577 /* Immediately return if any of I0,I1,I2 are the same insn (I3 can
2579 if (i1
== i2
|| i0
== i2
|| (i0
&& i0
== i1
))
2582 /* Only try four-insn combinations when there's high likelihood of
2583 success. Look for simple insns, such as loads of constants or
2584 binary operations involving a constant. */
2592 if (!flag_expensive_optimizations
)
2595 for (i
= 0; i
< 4; i
++)
2597 rtx_insn
*insn
= i
== 0 ? i0
: i
== 1 ? i1
: i
== 2 ? i2
: i3
;
2598 rtx set
= single_set (insn
);
2602 src
= SET_SRC (set
);
2603 if (CONSTANT_P (src
))
2608 else if (BINARY_P (src
) && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (src
, 1)))
2610 else if (GET_CODE (src
) == ASHIFT
|| GET_CODE (src
) == ASHIFTRT
2611 || GET_CODE (src
) == LSHIFTRT
)
2615 /* If I0 loads a memory and I3 sets the same memory, then I1 and I2
2616 are likely manipulating its value. Ideally we'll be able to combine
2617 all four insns into a bitfield insertion of some kind.
2619 Note the source in I0 might be inside a sign/zero extension and the
2620 memory modes in I0 and I3 might be different. So extract the address
2621 from the destination of I3 and search for it in the source of I0.
2623 In the event that there's a match but the source/dest do not actually
2624 refer to the same memory, the worst that happens is we try some
2625 combinations that we wouldn't have otherwise. */
2626 if ((set0
= single_set (i0
))
2627 /* Ensure the source of SET0 is a MEM, possibly buried inside
2629 && (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0
)) == MEM
2630 || ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0
)) == ZERO_EXTEND
2631 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0
)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
2632 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set0
), 0)) == MEM
))
2633 && (set3
= single_set (i3
))
2634 /* Ensure the destination of SET3 is a MEM. */
2635 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set3
)) == MEM
2636 /* Would it be better to extract the base address for the MEM
2637 in SET3 and look for that? I don't have cases where it matters
2638 but I could envision such cases. */
2639 && rtx_referenced_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (set3
), 0), SET_SRC (set0
)))
2642 if (ngood
< 2 && nshift
< 2)
2646 /* Exit early if one of the insns involved can't be used for
2649 || (i1
&& CALL_P (i1
))
2650 || (i0
&& CALL_P (i0
))
2651 || cant_combine_insn_p (i3
)
2652 || cant_combine_insn_p (i2
)
2653 || (i1
&& cant_combine_insn_p (i1
))
2654 || (i0
&& cant_combine_insn_p (i0
))
2655 || likely_spilled_retval_p (i3
))
2659 undobuf
.other_insn
= 0;
2661 /* Reset the hard register usage information. */
2662 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs
);
2664 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
2667 fprintf (dump_file
, "\nTrying %d, %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2668 INSN_UID (i0
), INSN_UID (i1
), INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
2670 fprintf (dump_file
, "\nTrying %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2671 INSN_UID (i1
), INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
2673 fprintf (dump_file
, "\nTrying %d -> %d:\n",
2674 INSN_UID (i2
), INSN_UID (i3
));
2677 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i0
);
2679 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i1
);
2680 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i2
);
2681 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i3
);
2684 /* If multiple insns feed into one of I2 or I3, they can be in any
2685 order. To simplify the code below, reorder them in sequence. */
2686 if (i0
&& DF_INSN_LUID (i0
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
2688 if (i0
&& DF_INSN_LUID (i0
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i1
))
2690 if (i1
&& DF_INSN_LUID (i1
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
))
2693 added_links_insn
= 0;
2694 added_notes_insn
= 0;
2696 /* First check for one important special case that the code below will
2697 not handle. Namely, the case where I1 is zero, I2 is a PARALLEL
2698 and I3 is a SET whose SET_SRC is a SET_DEST in I2. In that case,
2699 we may be able to replace that destination with the destination of I3.
2700 This occurs in the common code where we compute both a quotient and
2701 remainder into a structure, in which case we want to do the computation
2702 directly into the structure to avoid register-register copies.
2704 Note that this case handles both multiple sets in I2 and also cases
2705 where I2 has a number of CLOBBERs inside the PARALLEL.
2707 We make very conservative checks below and only try to handle the
2708 most common cases of this. For example, we only handle the case
2709 where I2 and I3 are adjacent to avoid making difficult register
2712 if (i1
== 0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (i3
) && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
2713 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2714 && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2715 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_DEAD
, SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2716 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2
)) == PARALLEL
2717 && ! side_effects_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)))
2718 /* If the dest of I3 is a ZERO_EXTRACT or STRICT_LOW_PART, the code
2719 below would need to check what is inside (and reg_overlap_mentioned_p
2720 doesn't support those codes anyway). Don't allow those destinations;
2721 the resulting insn isn't likely to be recognized anyway. */
2722 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
2723 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
2724 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)),
2725 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)))
2726 && next_active_insn (i2
) == i3
)
2728 rtx p2
= PATTERN (i2
);
2730 /* Make sure that the destination of I3,
2731 which we are going to substitute into one output of I2,
2732 is not used within another output of I2. We must avoid making this:
2733 (parallel [(set (mem (reg 69)) ...)
2734 (set (reg 69) ...)])
2735 which is not well-defined as to order of actions.
2736 (Besides, reload can't handle output reloads for this.)
2738 The problem can also happen if the dest of I3 is a memory ref,
2739 if another dest in I2 is an indirect memory ref.
2741 Neither can this PARALLEL be an asm. We do not allow combining
2742 that usually (see can_combine_p), so do not here either. */
2744 for (i
= 0; ok
&& i
< XVECLEN (p2
, 0); i
++)
2746 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET
2747 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
2748 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)),
2749 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
))))
2751 else if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET
2752 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
))) == ASM_OPERANDS
)
2757 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (p2
, 0); i
++)
2758 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET
2759 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2764 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
2766 added_sets_2
= added_sets_1
= added_sets_0
= false;
2767 i2src
= SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
));
2768 i2dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
));
2769 i2dest_killed
= dead_or_set_p (i2
, i2dest
);
2771 /* Replace the dest in I2 with our dest and make the resulting
2772 insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we validate
2773 the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2774 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2
, 0, i
)), SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)));
2776 i3_subst_into_i2
= true;
2777 goto validate_replacement
;
2781 /* If I2 is setting a pseudo to a constant and I3 is setting some
2782 sub-part of it to another constant, merge them by making a new
2785 && (temp_expr
= single_set (i2
)) != 0
2786 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr
)), &temp_mode
)
2787 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (temp_expr
))
2788 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
2789 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
2790 && reg_subword_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)), SET_DEST (temp_expr
)))
2792 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
));
2793 rtx temp_dest
= SET_DEST (temp_expr
);
2797 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
2799 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest
, 1))
2800 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest
, 2))
2801 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (dest
, 0)),
2804 width
= INTVAL (XEXP (dest
, 1));
2805 offset
= INTVAL (XEXP (dest
, 2));
2806 dest
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
2807 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
2808 offset
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode
) - width
- offset
;
2813 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
2814 dest
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
2815 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (dest
), &dest_mode
))
2817 width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode
);
2824 /* If this is the low part, we're done. */
2825 if (subreg_lowpart_p (dest
))
2827 /* Handle the case where inner is twice the size of outer. */
2828 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (temp_mode
)
2829 == 2 * GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode
))
2830 offset
+= GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode
);
2831 /* Otherwise give up for now. */
2838 rtx inner
= SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
));
2839 rtx outer
= SET_SRC (temp_expr
);
2841 wide_int o
= wi::insert (rtx_mode_t (outer
, temp_mode
),
2842 rtx_mode_t (inner
, dest_mode
),
2847 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
2848 added_sets_2
= added_sets_1
= added_sets_0
= false;
2850 i2dest_killed
= dead_or_set_p (i2
, i2dest
);
2852 /* Replace the source in I2 with the new constant and make the
2853 resulting insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we
2854 validate the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2855 SUBST (SET_SRC (temp_expr
),
2856 immed_wide_int_const (o
, temp_mode
));
2858 newpat
= PATTERN (i2
);
2860 /* The dest of I3 has been replaced with the dest of I2. */
2861 changed_i3_dest
= true;
2862 goto validate_replacement
;
2866 /* If we have no I1 and I2 looks like:
2867 (parallel [(set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC OP (const_int 0)))
2869 make up a dummy I1 that is
2872 (set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC Y (const_int 0)))
2874 (We can ignore any trailing CLOBBERs.)
2876 This undoes a previous combination and allows us to match a branch-and-
2880 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2
), 2)
2881 && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0))))
2883 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0))) == COMPARE
2884 && XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), 1) == const0_rtx
2885 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), 0),
2886 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)))
2887 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), i2
, i3
)
2888 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)), i2
, i3
))
2890 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2891 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2892 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2893 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2895 i1
= gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode
, NULL
, i2
, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2
),
2896 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1), INSN_LOCATION (i2
),
2898 INSN_UID (i1
) = INSN_UID (i2
);
2900 SUBST (PATTERN (i2
), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0));
2901 SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i2
)), 0),
2902 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1
)));
2903 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1
)));
2904 SUBST_LINK (LOG_LINKS (i2
),
2905 alloc_insn_link (i1
, regno
, LOG_LINKS (i2
)));
2908 /* If I2 is a PARALLEL of two SETs of REGs (and perhaps some CLOBBERs),
2909 make those two SETs separate I1 and I2 insns, and make an I0 that is
2912 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2
), 2)
2913 && can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (i2
, 2)
2914 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), i2
, i3
)
2915 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)), i2
, i3
)
2916 && !reg_set_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0)), i2
, i3
)
2917 && !reg_set_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1)), i2
, i3
))
2919 /* If there is no I1, there is no I0 either. */
2922 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2923 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2924 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2925 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2927 i1
= gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode
, NULL
, i2
, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2
),
2928 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 0), INSN_LOCATION (i2
),
2930 INSN_UID (i1
) = INSN_UID (i2
);
2932 SUBST (PATTERN (i2
), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, 1));
2935 /* Verify that I2 and maybe I1 and I0 can be combined into I3. */
2936 if (!can_combine_p (i2
, i3
, i0
, i1
, NULL
, NULL
, &i2dest
, &i2src
))
2938 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
2939 fprintf (dump_file
, "Can't combine i2 into i3\n");
2943 if (i1
&& !can_combine_p (i1
, i3
, i0
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, &i1dest
, &i1src
))
2945 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
2946 fprintf (dump_file
, "Can't combine i1 into i3\n");
2950 if (i0
&& !can_combine_p (i0
, i3
, NULL
, NULL
, i1
, i2
, &i0dest
, &i0src
))
2952 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
2953 fprintf (dump_file
, "Can't combine i0 into i3\n");
2958 /* With non-call exceptions we can end up trying to combine multiple
2959 insns with possible EH side effects. Make sure we can combine
2960 that to a single insn which means there must be at most one insn
2961 in the combination with an EH side effect. */
2962 if (cfun
->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
)
2964 if (find_reg_note (i3
, REG_EH_REGION
, NULL_RTX
)
2965 || find_reg_note (i2
, REG_EH_REGION
, NULL_RTX
)
2966 || (i1
&& find_reg_note (i1
, REG_EH_REGION
, NULL_RTX
))
2967 || (i0
&& find_reg_note (i0
, REG_EH_REGION
, NULL_RTX
)))
2969 has_non_call_exception
= true;
2970 if (insn_could_throw_p (i3
)
2971 + insn_could_throw_p (i2
)
2972 + (i1
? insn_could_throw_p (i1
) : 0)
2973 + (i0
? insn_could_throw_p (i0
) : 0) > 1)
2975 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
2976 fprintf (dump_file
, "Can't combine multiple insns with EH "
2984 /* Record whether i2 and i3 are trivial moves. */
2985 i2_was_move
= is_just_move (i2
);
2986 i3_was_move
= is_just_move (i3
);
2988 /* Record whether I2DEST is used in I2SRC and similarly for the other
2989 cases. Knowing this will help in register status updating below. */
2990 i2dest_in_i2src
= reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, i2src
);
2991 i1dest_in_i1src
= i1
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, i1src
);
2992 i2dest_in_i1src
= i1
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, i1src
);
2993 i0dest_in_i0src
= i0
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, i0src
);
2994 i1dest_in_i0src
= i0
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, i0src
);
2995 i2dest_in_i0src
= i0
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, i0src
);
2996 i2dest_killed
= dead_or_set_p (i2
, i2dest
);
2997 i1dest_killed
= i1
&& dead_or_set_p (i1
, i1dest
);
2998 i0dest_killed
= i0
&& dead_or_set_p (i0
, i0dest
);
3000 /* For the earlier insns, determine which of the subsequent ones they
3002 i1_feeds_i2_n
= i1
&& insn_a_feeds_b (i1
, i2
);
3003 i0_feeds_i1_n
= i0
&& insn_a_feeds_b (i0
, i1
);
3004 i0_feeds_i2_n
= (i0
&& (!i0_feeds_i1_n
? insn_a_feeds_b (i0
, i2
)
3005 : (!reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest
, i0dest
)
3006 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest
, i2src
))));
3008 /* Ensure that I3's pattern can be the destination of combines. */
3009 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3
, &PATTERN (i3
), i2dest
, i1dest
, i0dest
,
3010 i1
&& i2dest_in_i1src
&& !i1_feeds_i2_n
,
3011 i0
&& ((i2dest_in_i0src
&& !i0_feeds_i2_n
)
3012 || (i1dest_in_i0src
&& !i0_feeds_i1_n
)),
3019 /* See if any of the insns is a MULT operation. Unless one is, we will
3020 reject a combination that is, since it must be slower. Be conservative
3022 if (GET_CODE (i2src
) == MULT
3023 || (i1
!= 0 && GET_CODE (i1src
) == MULT
)
3024 || (i0
!= 0 && GET_CODE (i0src
) == MULT
)
3025 || (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
3026 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
))) == MULT
))
3029 /* If I3 has an inc, then give up if I1 or I2 uses the reg that is inc'd.
3030 We used to do this EXCEPT in one case: I3 has a post-inc in an
3031 output operand. However, that exception can give rise to insns like
3033 which is a famous insn on the PDP-11 where the value of r3 used as the
3034 source was model-dependent. Avoid this sort of thing. */
3037 if (!(GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
3038 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)))
3039 && MEM_P (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)))
3040 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)), 0)) == POST_INC
3041 || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3
)), 0)) == POST_DEC
)))
3042 /* It's not the exception. */
3047 for (link
= REG_NOTES (i3
); link
; link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
3048 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_INC
3049 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (i2
))
3051 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link
, 0), PATTERN (i1
)))))
3058 /* See if the SETs in I1 or I2 need to be kept around in the merged
3059 instruction: whenever the value set there is still needed past I3.
3060 For the SET in I2, this is easy: we see if I2DEST dies or is set in I3.
3062 For the SET in I1, we have two cases: if I1 and I2 independently feed
3063 into I3, the set in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies
3064 or is set in I3. Otherwise (if I1 feeds I2 which feeds I3), the set
3065 in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies or is set in either
3066 I2 or I3. The same considerations apply to I0. */
3068 added_sets_2
= !dead_or_set_p (i3
, i2dest
);
3071 added_sets_1
= !(dead_or_set_p (i3
, i1dest
)
3072 || (i1_feeds_i2_n
&& dead_or_set_p (i2
, i1dest
)));
3074 added_sets_1
= false;
3077 added_sets_0
= !(dead_or_set_p (i3
, i0dest
)
3078 || (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& dead_or_set_p (i1
, i0dest
))
3079 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n
|| (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
))
3080 && dead_or_set_p (i2
, i0dest
)));
3082 added_sets_0
= false;
3084 /* We are about to copy insns for the case where they need to be kept
3085 around. Check that they can be copied in the merged instruction. */
3087 if (targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p
3088 && ((added_sets_2
&& targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p (i2
))
3089 || (i1
&& added_sets_1
&& targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p (i1
))
3090 || (i0
&& added_sets_0
&& targetm
.cannot_copy_insn_p (i0
))))
3096 /* We cannot safely duplicate volatile references in any case. */
3098 if ((added_sets_2
&& volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (i2
)))
3099 || (added_sets_1
&& volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (i1
)))
3100 || (added_sets_0
&& volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (i0
))))
3106 /* Count how many auto_inc expressions there were in the original insns;
3107 we need to have the same number in the resulting patterns. */
3110 for_each_inc_dec (PATTERN (i0
), count_auto_inc
, &n_auto_inc
);
3112 for_each_inc_dec (PATTERN (i1
), count_auto_inc
, &n_auto_inc
);
3113 for_each_inc_dec (PATTERN (i2
), count_auto_inc
, &n_auto_inc
);
3114 for_each_inc_dec (PATTERN (i3
), count_auto_inc
, &n_auto_inc
);
3116 /* If the set in I2 needs to be kept around, we must make a copy of
3117 PATTERN (I2), so that when we substitute I1SRC for I1DEST in
3118 PATTERN (I2), we are only substituting for the original I1DEST, not into
3119 an already-substituted copy. This also prevents making self-referential
3120 rtx. If I2 is a PARALLEL, we just need the piece that assigns I2SRC to
3125 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2
)) == PARALLEL
)
3126 i2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i2dest
, copy_rtx (i2src
));
3128 i2pat
= copy_rtx (PATTERN (i2
));
3133 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i1
)) == PARALLEL
)
3134 i1pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i1dest
, copy_rtx (i1src
));
3136 i1pat
= copy_rtx (PATTERN (i1
));
3141 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i0
)) == PARALLEL
)
3142 i0pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i0dest
, copy_rtx (i0src
));
3144 i0pat
= copy_rtx (PATTERN (i0
));
3149 /* Substitute in the latest insn for the regs set by the earlier ones. */
3151 maxreg
= max_reg_num ();
3155 /* Many machines have insns that can both perform an
3156 arithmetic operation and set the condition code. These operations will
3157 be represented as a PARALLEL with the first element of the vector
3158 being a COMPARE of an arithmetic operation with the constant zero.
3159 The second element of the vector will set some pseudo to the result
3160 of the same arithmetic operation. If we simplify the COMPARE, we won't
3161 match such a pattern and so will generate an extra insn. Here we test
3162 for this case, where both the comparison and the operation result are
3163 needed, and make the PARALLEL by just replacing I2DEST in I3SRC with
3164 I2SRC. Later we will make the PARALLEL that contains I2. */
3166 if (i1
== 0 && added_sets_2
&& GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == SET
3167 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
))) == COMPARE
3168 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)), 1))
3169 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)), 0), i2dest
))
3172 rtx
*cc_use_loc
= NULL
;
3173 rtx_insn
*cc_use_insn
= NULL
;
3174 rtx op0
= i2src
, op1
= XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3
)), 1);
3175 machine_mode compare_mode
, orig_compare_mode
;
3176 enum rtx_code compare_code
= UNKNOWN
, orig_compare_code
= UNKNOWN
;
3177 scalar_int_mode mode
;
3179 newpat
= PATTERN (i3
);
3180 newpat_dest
= SET_DEST (newpat
);
3181 compare_mode
= orig_compare_mode
= GET_MODE (newpat_dest
);
3183 if (undobuf
.other_insn
== 0
3184 && (cc_use_loc
= find_single_use (SET_DEST (newpat
), i3
,
3187 compare_code
= orig_compare_code
= GET_CODE (*cc_use_loc
);
3188 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (i2dest
), &mode
))
3189 compare_code
= simplify_compare_const (compare_code
, mode
,
3191 target_canonicalize_comparison (&compare_code
, &op0
, &op1
, 1);
3194 /* Do the rest only if op1 is const0_rtx, which may be the
3195 result of simplification. */
3196 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
3198 /* If a single use of the CC is found, prepare to modify it
3199 when SELECT_CC_MODE returns a new CC-class mode, or when
3200 the above simplify_compare_const() returned a new comparison
3201 operator. undobuf.other_insn is assigned the CC use insn
3202 when modifying it. */
3205 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
3206 machine_mode new_mode
3207 = SELECT_CC_MODE (compare_code
, op0
, op1
);
3208 if (new_mode
!= orig_compare_mode
3209 && can_change_dest_mode (SET_DEST (newpat
),
3210 added_sets_2
, new_mode
))
3212 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (newpat_dest
);
3213 compare_mode
= new_mode
;
3214 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3215 newpat_dest
= gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode
, regno
);
3218 subst_mode (regno
, compare_mode
);
3219 newpat_dest
= regno_reg_rtx
[regno
];
3223 /* Cases for modifying the CC-using comparison. */
3224 if (compare_code
!= orig_compare_code
3225 /* ??? Do we need to verify the zero rtx? */
3226 && XEXP (*cc_use_loc
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
3228 /* Replace cc_use_loc with entire new RTX. */
3230 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code
, GET_MODE (*cc_use_loc
),
3231 newpat_dest
, const0_rtx
));
3232 undobuf
.other_insn
= cc_use_insn
;
3234 else if (compare_mode
!= orig_compare_mode
)
3236 /* Just replace the CC reg with a new mode. */
3237 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use_loc
, 0), newpat_dest
);
3238 undobuf
.other_insn
= cc_use_insn
;
3242 /* Now we modify the current newpat:
3243 First, SET_DEST(newpat) is updated if the CC mode has been
3244 altered. For targets without SELECT_CC_MODE, this should be
3246 if (compare_mode
!= orig_compare_mode
)
3247 SUBST (SET_DEST (newpat
), newpat_dest
);
3248 /* This is always done to propagate i2src into newpat. */
3249 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat
),
3250 gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode
, op0
, op1
));
3251 /* Create new version of i2pat if needed; the below PARALLEL
3252 creation needs this to work correctly. */
3253 if (! rtx_equal_p (i2src
, op0
))
3254 i2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (i2dest
, op0
);
3259 if (i2_is_used
== 0)
3261 /* It is possible that the source of I2 or I1 may be performing
3262 an unneeded operation, such as a ZERO_EXTEND of something
3263 that is known to have the high part zero. Handle that case
3264 by letting subst look at the inner insns.
3266 Another way to do this would be to have a function that tries
3267 to simplify a single insn instead of merging two or more
3268 insns. We don't do this because of the potential of infinite
3269 loops and because of the potential extra memory required.
3270 However, doing it the way we are is a bit of a kludge and
3271 doesn't catch all cases.
3273 But only do this if -fexpensive-optimizations since it slows
3274 things down and doesn't usually win.
3276 This is not done in the COMPARE case above because the
3277 unmodified I2PAT is used in the PARALLEL and so a pattern
3278 with a modified I2SRC would not match. */
3280 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
)
3282 /* Pass pc_rtx so no substitutions are done, just
3286 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i1
);
3287 i1src
= subst (i1src
, pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, false, false, false);
3290 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
3291 i2src
= subst (i2src
, pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, false, false, false);
3294 n_occurrences
= 0; /* `subst' counts here */
3295 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
3297 /* If I1 feeds into I2 and I1DEST is in I1SRC, we need to make a unique
3298 copy of I2SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3299 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I1SRC for I1DEST
3300 later. Likewise if I0 feeds into I2, either directly or indirectly
3301 through I1, and I0DEST is in I0SRC. */
3302 newpat
= subst (PATTERN (i3
), i2dest
, i2src
, false, false,
3303 (i1_feeds_i2_n
&& i1dest_in_i1src
)
3304 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n
|| (i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
))
3305 && i0dest_in_i0src
));
3308 /* Record whether I2's body now appears within I3's body. */
3309 i2_is_used
= n_occurrences
;
3312 /* If we already got a failure, don't try to do more. Otherwise, try to
3313 substitute I1 if we have it. */
3315 if (i1
&& GET_CODE (newpat
) != CLOBBER
)
3317 /* Before we can do this substitution, we must redo the test done
3318 above (see detailed comments there) that ensures I1DEST isn't
3319 mentioned in any SETs in NEWPAT that are field assignments. */
3320 if (!combinable_i3pat (NULL
, &newpat
, i1dest
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
3328 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i1
);
3330 /* If the following substitution will modify I1SRC, make a copy of it
3331 for the case where it is substituted for I1DEST in I2PAT later. */
3332 if (added_sets_2
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
)
3333 i1src_copy
= copy_rtx (i1src
);
3335 /* If I0 feeds into I1 and I0DEST is in I0SRC, we need to make a unique
3336 copy of I1SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3337 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I0SRC for I0DEST
3339 newpat
= subst (newpat
, i1dest
, i1src
, false, false,
3340 i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i0dest_in_i0src
);
3343 /* Record whether I1's body now appears within I3's body. */
3344 i1_is_used
= n_occurrences
;
3347 /* Likewise for I0 if we have it. */
3349 if (i0
&& GET_CODE (newpat
) != CLOBBER
)
3351 if (!combinable_i3pat (NULL
, &newpat
, i0dest
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
3358 /* If the following substitution will modify I0SRC, make a copy of it
3359 for the case where it is substituted for I0DEST in I1PAT later. */
3360 if (added_sets_1
&& i0_feeds_i1_n
)
3361 i0src_copy
= copy_rtx (i0src
);
3362 /* And a copy for I0DEST in I2PAT substitution. */
3363 if (added_sets_2
&& ((i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
)
3364 || (i0_feeds_i2_n
)))
3365 i0src_copy2
= copy_rtx (i0src
);
3368 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i0
);
3369 newpat
= subst (newpat
, i0dest
, i0src
, false, false, false);
3375 int new_n_auto_inc
= 0;
3376 for_each_inc_dec (newpat
, count_auto_inc
, &new_n_auto_inc
);
3378 if (n_auto_inc
!= new_n_auto_inc
)
3380 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
3381 fprintf (dump_file
, "Number of auto_inc expressions changed\n");
3387 /* Fail if an autoincrement side-effect has been duplicated. Be careful
3388 to count all the ways that I2SRC and I1SRC can be used. */
3389 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i2
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3390 && i2_is_used
+ added_sets_2
> 1)
3391 || (i1
!= 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3392 && (i1_is_used
+ added_sets_1
+ (added_sets_2
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
) > 1))
3393 || (i0
!= 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0
, NULL_RTX
) != 0
3394 && (n_occurrences
+ added_sets_0
3395 + (added_sets_1
&& i0_feeds_i1_n
)
3396 + (added_sets_2
&& i0_feeds_i2_n
) > 1))
3397 /* Fail if we tried to make a new register. */
3398 || max_reg_num () != maxreg
3399 /* Fail if we couldn't do something and have a CLOBBER. */
3400 || GET_CODE (newpat
) == CLOBBER
3401 /* Fail if this new pattern is a MULT and we didn't have one before
3402 at the outer level. */
3403 || (GET_CODE (newpat
) == SET
&& GET_CODE (SET_SRC (newpat
)) == MULT
3410 /* If the actions of the earlier insns must be kept
3411 in addition to substituting them into the latest one,
3412 we must make a new PARALLEL for the latest insn
3413 to hold additional the SETs. */
3415 if (added_sets_0
|| added_sets_1
|| added_sets_2
)
3417 int extra_sets
= added_sets_0
+ added_sets_1
+ added_sets_2
;
3420 if (GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
)
3422 rtvec old
= XVEC (newpat
, 0);
3423 total_sets
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) + extra_sets
;
3424 newpat
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, rtvec_alloc (total_sets
));
3425 memcpy (XVEC (newpat
, 0)->elem
, &old
->elem
[0],
3426 sizeof (old
->elem
[0]) * old
->num_elem
);
3431 total_sets
= 1 + extra_sets
;
3432 newpat
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, rtvec_alloc (total_sets
));
3433 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0) = old
;
3437 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, --total_sets
) = i0pat
;
3443 t
= subst (t
, i0dest
, i0src_copy
? i0src_copy
: i0src
,
3444 false, false, false);
3446 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, --total_sets
) = t
;
3452 t
= subst (t
, i1dest
, i1src_copy
? i1src_copy
: i1src
, false, false,
3453 i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i0dest_in_i0src
);
3454 if ((i0_feeds_i1_n
&& i1_feeds_i2_n
) || i0_feeds_i2_n
)
3455 t
= subst (t
, i0dest
, i0src_copy2
? i0src_copy2
: i0src
,
3456 false, false, false);
3458 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, --total_sets
) = t
;
3462 validate_replacement
:
3464 /* Note which hard regs this insn has as inputs. */
3465 mark_used_regs_combine (newpat
);
3467 /* If recog_for_combine fails, it strips existing clobbers. If we'll
3468 consider splitting this pattern, we might need these clobbers. */
3469 if (i1
&& GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
3470 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) - 1)) == CLOBBER
)
3472 int len
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0);
3474 newpat_vec_with_clobbers
= rtvec_alloc (len
);
3475 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
3476 RTVEC_ELT (newpat_vec_with_clobbers
, i
) = XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
);
3479 /* We have recognized nothing yet. */
3480 insn_code_number
= -1;
3482 /* See if this is a PARALLEL of two SETs where one SET's destination is
3483 a register that is unused and this isn't marked as an instruction that
3484 might trap in an EH region. In that case, we just need the other SET.
3485 We prefer this over the PARALLEL.
3487 This can occur when simplifying a divmod insn. We *must* test for this
3488 case here because the code below that splits two independent SETs doesn't
3489 handle this case correctly when it updates the register status.
3491 It's pointless doing this if we originally had two sets, one from
3492 i3, and one from i2. Combining then splitting the parallel results
3493 in the original i2 again plus an invalid insn (which we delete).
3494 The net effect is only to move instructions around, which makes
3495 debug info less accurate.
3497 If the remaining SET came from I2 its destination should not be used
3498 between I2 and I3. See PR82024. */
3500 if (!(added_sets_2
&& i1
== 0)
3501 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (newpat
, 2)
3502 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0)
3504 rtx set0
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0);
3505 rtx set1
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1);
3506 rtx oldpat
= newpat
;
3508 if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set1
))
3509 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, SET_DEST (set1
)))
3510 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1
)) == SUBREG
3511 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1
)))))
3512 && insn_nothrow_p (i3
)
3513 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set1
)))
3516 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3519 else if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set0
))
3520 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, SET_DEST (set0
)))
3521 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0
)) == SUBREG
3522 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
,
3523 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0
)))))
3524 && insn_nothrow_p (i3
)
3525 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set0
)))
3527 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (set1
);
3528 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
3529 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
3530 if (!reg_used_between_p (dest
, i2
, i3
))
3533 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3535 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3536 changed_i3_dest
= true;
3540 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
3544 /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */
3545 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
3546 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3548 /* If we were combining three insns and the result is a simple SET
3549 with no ASM_OPERANDS that wasn't recognized, try to split it into two
3550 insns. There are two ways to do this. It can be split using a
3551 machine-specific method (like when you have an addition of a large
3552 constant) or by combine in the function find_split_point. */
3554 if (i1
&& insn_code_number
< 0 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == SET
3555 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0)
3557 rtx parallel
, *split
;
3558 rtx_insn
*m_split_insn
;
3560 /* See if the MD file can split NEWPAT. If it can't, see if letting it
3561 use I2DEST as a scratch register will help. In the latter case,
3562 convert I2DEST to the mode of the source of NEWPAT if we can. */
3564 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (newpat
, i3
);
3566 /* We can only use I2DEST as a scratch reg if it doesn't overlap any
3567 inputs of NEWPAT. */
3569 /* ??? If I2DEST is not safe, and I1DEST exists, then it would be
3570 possible to try that as a scratch reg. This would require adding
3571 more code to make it work though. */
3573 if (m_split_insn
== 0 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest
, newpat
))
3575 machine_mode new_mode
= GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat
));
3577 /* ??? Reusing i2dest without resetting the reg_stat entry for it
3578 (temporarily, until we are committed to this instruction
3579 combination) does not work: for example, any call to nonzero_bits
3580 on the register (from a splitter in the MD file, for example)
3581 will get the old information, which is invalid.
3583 Since nowadays we can create registers during combine just fine,
3584 we should just create a new one here, not reuse i2dest. */
3586 /* First try to split using the original register as a
3587 scratch register. */
3588 parallel
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
,
3589 gen_rtvec (2, newpat
,
3590 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
,
3592 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (parallel
, i3
);
3594 /* If that didn't work, try changing the mode of I2DEST if
3596 if (m_split_insn
== 0
3597 && new_mode
!= GET_MODE (i2dest
)
3598 && new_mode
!= VOIDmode
3599 && can_change_dest_mode (i2dest
, added_sets_2
, new_mode
))
3601 machine_mode old_mode
= GET_MODE (i2dest
);
3604 if (REGNO (i2dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3605 ni2dest
= gen_rtx_REG (new_mode
, REGNO (i2dest
));
3608 subst_mode (REGNO (i2dest
), new_mode
);
3609 ni2dest
= regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)];
3612 parallel
= (gen_rtx_PARALLEL
3614 gen_rtvec (2, newpat
,
3615 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
,
3617 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (parallel
, i3
);
3619 if (m_split_insn
== 0
3620 && REGNO (i2dest
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3624 adjust_reg_mode (regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)], old_mode
);
3625 buf
= undobuf
.undos
;
3626 undobuf
.undos
= buf
->next
;
3627 buf
->next
= undobuf
.frees
;
3628 undobuf
.frees
= buf
;
3632 i2scratch
= m_split_insn
!= 0;
3635 /* If recog_for_combine has discarded clobbers, try to use them
3636 again for the split. */
3637 if (m_split_insn
== 0 && newpat_vec_with_clobbers
)
3639 parallel
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
, newpat_vec_with_clobbers
);
3640 m_split_insn
= combine_split_insns (parallel
, i3
);
3643 if (m_split_insn
&& NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
) == NULL_RTX
)
3645 rtx m_split_pat
= PATTERN (m_split_insn
);
3646 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&m_split_pat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3647 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3648 newpat
= m_split_pat
;
3650 else if (m_split_insn
&& NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
)) == NULL_RTX
3651 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
3652 || !modified_between_p (PATTERN (m_split_insn
), i2
, i3
)))
3655 rtx newi3pat
= PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
));
3656 newi2pat
= PATTERN (m_split_insn
);
3658 i3set
= single_set (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn
));
3659 i2set
= single_set (m_split_insn
);
3661 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3663 /* If I2 or I3 has multiple SETs, we won't know how to track
3664 register status, so don't use these insns. If I2's destination
3665 is used between I2 and I3, we also can't use these insns. */
3667 if (i2_code_number
>= 0 && i2set
&& i3set
3668 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
3669 || ! reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (i2set
), i2
, i3
)))
3670 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi3pat
, i3
,
3672 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3675 /* It is possible that both insns now set the destination of I3.
3676 If so, we must show an extra use of it. */
3678 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3680 rtx new_i3_dest
= SET_DEST (i3set
);
3681 rtx new_i2_dest
= SET_DEST (i2set
);
3683 while (GET_CODE (new_i3_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3684 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3685 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest
) == SUBREG
)
3686 new_i3_dest
= XEXP (new_i3_dest
, 0);
3688 while (GET_CODE (new_i2_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3689 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3690 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest
) == SUBREG
)
3691 new_i2_dest
= XEXP (new_i2_dest
, 0);
3693 if (REG_P (new_i3_dest
)
3694 && REG_P (new_i2_dest
)
3695 && REGNO (new_i3_dest
) == REGNO (new_i2_dest
)
3696 && REGNO (new_i2_dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
3697 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (new_i2_dest
), 1);
3701 /* If we can split it and use I2DEST, go ahead and see if that
3702 helps things be recognized. Verify that none of the registers
3703 are set between I2 and I3. */
3704 if (insn_code_number
< 0
3705 && (split
= find_split_point (&newpat
, i3
, false)) != 0
3706 /* We need I2DEST in the proper mode. If it is a hard register
3707 or the only use of a pseudo, we can change its mode.
3708 Make sure we don't change a hard register to have a mode that
3709 isn't valid for it, or change the number of registers. */
3710 && (GET_MODE (*split
) == GET_MODE (i2dest
)
3711 || GET_MODE (*split
) == VOIDmode
3712 || can_change_dest_mode (i2dest
, added_sets_2
,
3714 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
3715 || !modified_between_p (*split
, i2
, i3
))
3716 /* We can't overwrite I2DEST if its value is still used by
3718 && ! reg_referenced_p (i2dest
, newpat
)
3719 /* We should not split a possibly trapping part when we
3720 care about non-call EH and have REG_EH_REGION notes
3722 && ! (cfun
->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
3723 && has_non_call_exception
3724 && may_trap_p (*split
)))
3726 rtx newdest
= i2dest
;
3727 enum rtx_code split_code
= GET_CODE (*split
);
3728 machine_mode split_mode
= GET_MODE (*split
);
3729 bool subst_done
= false;
3730 newi2pat
= NULL_RTX
;
3734 /* *SPLIT may be part of I2SRC, so make sure we have the
3735 original expression around for later debug processing.
3736 We should not need I2SRC any more in other cases. */
3737 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
)
3738 i2src
= copy_rtx (i2src
);
3742 /* Get NEWDEST as a register in the proper mode. We have already
3743 validated that we can do this. */
3744 if (GET_MODE (i2dest
) != split_mode
&& split_mode
!= VOIDmode
)
3746 if (REGNO (i2dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3747 newdest
= gen_rtx_REG (split_mode
, REGNO (i2dest
));
3750 subst_mode (REGNO (i2dest
), split_mode
);
3751 newdest
= regno_reg_rtx
[REGNO (i2dest
)];
3755 /* If *SPLIT is a (mult FOO (const_int pow2)), convert it to
3756 an ASHIFT. This can occur if it was inside a PLUS and hence
3757 appeared to be a memory address. This is a kludge. */
3758 if (split_code
== MULT
3759 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*split
, 1))
3760 && INTVAL (XEXP (*split
, 1)) > 0
3761 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (*split
, 1)))) >= 0)
3763 rtx i_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (split_mode
, i
);
3764 SUBST (*split
, gen_rtx_ASHIFT (split_mode
,
3765 XEXP (*split
, 0), i_rtx
));
3766 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3768 split_code
= GET_CODE (*split
);
3771 /* Similarly for (plus (mult FOO (const_int pow2))). */
3772 if (split_code
== PLUS
3773 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*split
, 0)) == MULT
3774 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (*split
, 0), 1))
3775 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split
, 0), 1)) > 0
3776 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split
, 0), 1)))) >= 0)
3778 rtx nsplit
= XEXP (*split
, 0);
3779 rtx i_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (GET_MODE (nsplit
), i
);
3780 SUBST (XEXP (*split
, 0), gen_rtx_ASHIFT (GET_MODE (nsplit
),
3783 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3785 split_code
= GET_CODE (*split
);
3788 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
3789 /* If *SPLIT is a paradoxical SUBREG, when we split it, it should
3790 be written as a ZERO_EXTEND. */
3791 if (split_code
== SUBREG
&& MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (*split
)))
3793 /* Or as a SIGN_EXTEND if LOAD_EXTEND_OP says that that's
3794 what it really is. */
3795 if (load_extend_op (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*split
)))
3797 SUBST (*split
, gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (split_mode
,
3798 SUBREG_REG (*split
)));
3800 SUBST (*split
, gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (split_mode
,
3801 SUBREG_REG (*split
)));
3805 /* Attempt to split binary operators using arithmetic identities. */
3806 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (newpat
))
3807 && split_mode
== GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat
))
3808 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (newpat
)))
3810 rtx setsrc
= SET_SRC (newpat
);
3811 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (setsrc
);
3812 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (setsrc
);
3813 rtx src_op0
= XEXP (setsrc
, 0);
3814 rtx src_op1
= XEXP (setsrc
, 1);
3816 /* Split "X = Y op Y" as "Z = Y; X = Z op Z". */
3817 if (rtx_equal_p (src_op0
, src_op1
))
3819 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, src_op0
);
3820 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 0), newdest
);
3821 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 1), newdest
);
3824 /* Split "((P op Q) op R) op S" where op is PLUS or MULT. */
3825 else if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MULT
)
3826 && GET_CODE (src_op0
) == code
3827 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_op0
, 0)) == code
3828 && (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode
)
3829 || (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
)
3830 && flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)))
3832 rtx p
= XEXP (XEXP (src_op0
, 0), 0);
3833 rtx q
= XEXP (XEXP (src_op0
, 0), 1);
3834 rtx r
= XEXP (src_op0
, 1);
3837 /* Split both "((X op Y) op X) op Y" and
3838 "((X op Y) op Y) op X" as "T op T" where T is
3840 if ((rtx_equal_p (p
,r
) && rtx_equal_p (q
,s
))
3841 || (rtx_equal_p (p
,s
) && rtx_equal_p (q
,r
)))
3843 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, XEXP (src_op0
, 0));
3844 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 0), newdest
);
3845 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 1), newdest
);
3848 /* Split "((X op X) op Y) op Y)" as "T op T" where
3850 else if (rtx_equal_p (p
,q
) && rtx_equal_p (r
,s
))
3852 rtx tmp
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, p
, r
);
3853 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, tmp
);
3854 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 0), newdest
);
3855 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc
, 1), newdest
);
3863 newi2pat
= gen_rtx_SET (newdest
, *split
);
3864 SUBST (*split
, newdest
);
3867 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3869 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3870 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3871 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat
) == PARALLEL
)
3872 for (i
= XVECLEN (newi2pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
3873 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
3875 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
), 0);
3876 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, newpat
))
3883 /* If the split point was a MULT and we didn't have one before,
3884 don't use one now. */
3885 if (i2_code_number
>= 0 && ! (split_code
== MULT
&& ! have_mult
))
3886 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3890 /* Check for a case where we loaded from memory in a narrow mode and
3891 then sign extended it, but we need both registers. In that case,
3892 we have a PARALLEL with both loads from the same memory location.
3893 We can split this into a load from memory followed by a register-register
3894 copy. This saves at least one insn, more if register allocation can
3897 We cannot do this if the destination of the first assignment is a
3898 condition code register. We eliminate this case by making sure
3899 the SET_DEST and SET_SRC have the same mode.
3901 We cannot do this if the destination of the second assignment is
3902 a register that we have already assumed is zero-extended. Similarly
3903 for a SUBREG of such a register. */
3905 else if (i1
&& insn_code_number
< 0 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0
3906 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
3907 && XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) == 2
3908 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)) == SET
3909 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))) == SIGN_EXTEND
3910 && (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)))
3911 == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))))
3912 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)) == SET
3913 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3914 XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)), 0))
3915 && !modified_between_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)), i2
, i3
)
3916 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3917 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3918 && ! (temp_expr
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3920 && reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
!= 0
3921 && known_lt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)),
3923 && known_lt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)),
3925 && (reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
3926 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode
))))
3927 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) == SUBREG
3928 && (temp_expr
= SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))),
3930 && reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
!= 0
3931 && known_lt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)),
3933 && known_lt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr
)),
3935 && (reg_stat
[REGNO (temp_expr
)].nonzero_bits
3936 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode
)))))
3937 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3938 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)))
3939 && ! find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
,
3940 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))))
3944 newi2pat
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0);
3945 ni2dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0));
3946 newpat
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1);
3947 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat
),
3948 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat
)), ni2dest
));
3949 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
3951 if (i2_code_number
>= 0)
3952 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
3954 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
3958 /* Similarly, check for a case where we have a PARALLEL of two independent
3959 SETs but we started with three insns. In this case, we can do the sets
3960 as two separate insns. This case occurs when some SET allows two
3961 other insns to combine, but the destination of that SET is still live.
3963 Also do this if we started with two insns and (at least) one of the
3964 resulting sets is a noop; this noop will be deleted later.
3966 Also do this if we started with two insns neither of which was a simple
3969 else if (insn_code_number
< 0 && asm_noperands (newpat
) < 0
3970 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
3971 && XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) == 2
3972 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)) == SET
3973 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)) == SET
3975 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))
3976 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))
3977 || (!i2_was_move
&& !i3_was_move
))
3978 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3979 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3980 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3981 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3982 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)),
3983 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0))
3984 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)),
3985 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1))
3986 && ! (contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0)))
3987 && contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1)))))
3989 rtx set0
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0);
3990 rtx set1
= XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 1);
3992 /* Normally, it doesn't matter which of the two is done first, but
3993 one which uses any regs/memory set in between i2 and i3 can't
3994 be first. The PARALLEL might also have been pre-existing in i3,
3995 so we need to make sure that we won't wrongly hoist a SET to i2
3996 that would conflict with a death note present in there, or would
3997 have its dest modified between i2 and i3. */
3998 if (!modified_between_p (SET_SRC (set1
), i2
, i3
)
3999 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set1
))
4000 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
, SET_DEST (set1
)))
4001 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1
)) == SUBREG
4002 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
,
4003 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1
))))
4004 && !modified_between_p (SET_DEST (set1
), i2
, i3
)
4005 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set0 is a jump so that
4006 we do not create invalid RTL. */
4007 && (!JUMP_P (i3
) || SET_DEST (set0
) == pc_rtx
)
4013 else if (!modified_between_p (SET_SRC (set0
), i2
, i3
)
4014 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set0
))
4015 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
, SET_DEST (set0
)))
4016 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0
)) == SUBREG
4017 && find_reg_note (i2
, REG_DEAD
,
4018 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0
))))
4019 && !modified_between_p (SET_DEST (set0
), i2
, i3
)
4020 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set1 is a jump so that
4021 we do not create invalid RTL. */
4022 && (!JUMP_P (i3
) || SET_DEST (set1
) == pc_rtx
)
4034 i2_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newi2pat
, i2
, &new_i2_notes
);
4036 if (i2_code_number
>= 0)
4038 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
4039 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
4040 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat
) == PARALLEL
)
4042 for (i
= XVECLEN (newi2pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
4043 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
4045 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, i
), 0);
4046 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, newpat
))
4054 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&newpat
, i3
, &new_i3_notes
);
4056 /* Likewise, recog_for_combine might have added clobbers to NEWPAT.
4057 Checking that the SET0's SET_DEST and SET1's SET_DEST aren't
4058 mentioned/clobbered, ensures NEWI2PAT's SET_DEST is live. */
4059 if (insn_code_number
>= 0 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == PARALLEL
)
4061 for (i
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
4062 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
4064 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0);
4065 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, SET_DEST (set0
))
4066 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, SET_DEST (set1
)))
4074 if (insn_code_number
>= 0)
4079 /* If it still isn't recognized, fail and change things back the way they
4081 if ((insn_code_number
< 0
4082 /* Is the result a reasonable ASM_OPERANDS? */
4083 && (! check_asm_operands (newpat
) || added_sets_1
|| added_sets_2
)))
4089 /* If we had to change another insn, make sure it is valid also. */
4090 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4092 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs
);
4094 other_pat
= PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4095 other_code_number
= recog_for_combine (&other_pat
, undobuf
.other_insn
,
4098 if (other_code_number
< 0 && ! check_asm_operands (other_pat
))
4105 /* Only allow this combination if insn_cost reports that the
4106 replacement instructions are cheaper than the originals. */
4107 if (!combine_validate_cost (i0
, i1
, i2
, i3
, newpat
, newi2pat
, other_pat
))
4113 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
)
4117 for (undo
= undobuf
.undos
; undo
; undo
= undo
->next
)
4118 if (undo
->kind
== UNDO_MODE
)
4120 rtx reg
= regno_reg_rtx
[undo
->where
.regno
];
4121 machine_mode new_mode
= GET_MODE (reg
);
4122 machine_mode old_mode
= undo
->old_contents
.m
;
4124 /* Temporarily revert mode back. */
4125 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, old_mode
);
4127 if (reg
== i2dest
&& i2scratch
)
4129 /* If we used i2dest as a scratch register with a
4130 different mode, substitute it for the original
4131 i2src while its original mode is temporarily
4132 restored, and then clear i2scratch so that we don't
4133 do it again later. */
4134 propagate_for_debug (i2
, last_combined_insn
, reg
, i2src
,
4137 /* Put back the new mode. */
4138 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, new_mode
);
4142 rtx tempreg
= gen_raw_REG (old_mode
, REGNO (reg
));
4143 rtx_insn
*first
, *last
;
4148 last
= last_combined_insn
;
4153 last
= undobuf
.other_insn
;
4155 if (DF_INSN_LUID (last
)
4156 < DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn
))
4157 last
= last_combined_insn
;
4160 /* We're dealing with a reg that changed mode but not
4161 meaning, so we want to turn it into a subreg for
4162 the new mode. However, because of REG sharing and
4163 because its mode had already changed, we have to do
4164 it in two steps. First, replace any debug uses of
4165 reg, with its original mode temporarily restored,
4166 with this copy we have created; then, replace the
4167 copy with the SUBREG of the original shared reg,
4168 once again changed to the new mode. */
4169 propagate_for_debug (first
, last
, reg
, tempreg
,
4171 adjust_reg_mode (reg
, new_mode
);
4172 propagate_for_debug (first
, last
, tempreg
,
4173 lowpart_subreg (old_mode
, reg
, new_mode
),
4179 /* If we will be able to accept this, we have made a
4180 change to the destination of I3. This requires us to
4181 do a few adjustments. */
4183 if (changed_i3_dest
)
4185 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
4186 adjust_for_new_dest (i3
);
4189 /* We now know that we can do this combination. Merge the insns and
4190 update the status of registers and LOG_LINKS. */
4192 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4196 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
) = other_pat
;
4198 /* If any of the notes in OTHER_INSN were REG_DEAD or REG_UNUSED,
4199 ensure that they are still valid. Then add any non-duplicate
4200 notes added by recog_for_combine. */
4201 for (note
= REG_NOTES (undobuf
.other_insn
); note
; note
= next
)
4203 next
= XEXP (note
, 1);
4205 if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_DEAD
4206 && !reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0),
4207 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)))
4208 ||(REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_UNUSED
4209 && !reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0),
4210 PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)))
4211 /* Simply drop equal note since it may be no longer valid
4212 for other_insn. It may be possible to record that CC
4213 register is changed and only discard those notes, but
4214 in practice it's unnecessary complication and doesn't
4215 give any meaningful improvement.
4218 || REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_EQUAL
4219 || REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_EQUIV
)
4220 remove_note (undobuf
.other_insn
, note
);
4223 distribute_notes (new_other_notes
, undobuf
.other_insn
,
4224 undobuf
.other_insn
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
4230 /* I3 now uses what used to be its destination and which is now
4231 I2's destination. This requires us to do a few adjustments. */
4232 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
4233 adjust_for_new_dest (i3
);
4236 if (swap_i2i3
|| split_i2i3
)
4238 /* We might need a LOG_LINK from I3 to I2. But then we used to
4239 have one, so we still will.
4241 However, some later insn might be using I2's dest and have
4242 a LOG_LINK pointing at I3. We should change it to point at
4245 /* newi2pat is usually a SET here; however, recog_for_combine might
4246 have added some clobbers. */
4248 if (GET_CODE (x
) == PARALLEL
)
4249 x
= XVECEXP (newi2pat
, 0, 0);
4251 if (REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
4252 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == SUBREG
4253 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
)))))
4255 unsigned int regno
= reg_or_subregno (SET_DEST (x
));
4258 for (rtx_insn
*insn
= NEXT_INSN (i3
);
4262 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
) == this_basic_block
;
4263 insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
4265 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
4267 struct insn_link
*link
;
4268 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, insn
)
4269 if (link
->insn
== i3
&& link
->regno
== regno
)
4280 rtx i3notes
, i2notes
, i1notes
= 0, i0notes
= 0;
4281 struct insn_link
*i3links
, *i2links
, *i1links
= 0, *i0links
= 0;
4284 /* Compute which registers we expect to eliminate. newi2pat may be setting
4285 either i3dest or i2dest, so we must check it. */
4286 rtx elim_i2
= ((newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i2dest
, newi2pat
))
4287 || i2dest_in_i2src
|| i2dest_in_i1src
|| i2dest_in_i0src
4290 /* For i1, we need to compute both local elimination and global
4291 elimination information with respect to newi2pat because i1dest
4292 may be the same as i3dest, in which case newi2pat may be setting
4293 i1dest. Global information is used when distributing REG_DEAD
4294 note for i2 and i3, in which case it does matter if newi2pat sets
4297 Local information is used when distributing REG_DEAD note for i1,
4298 in which case it doesn't matter if newi2pat sets i1dest or not.
4299 See PR62151, if we have four insns combination:
4301 i1: r1 <- i1src (using r0)
4303 i2: r0 <- i2src (using r1)
4304 i3: r3 <- i3src (using r0)
4306 From i1's point of view, r0 is eliminated, no matter if it is set
4307 by newi2pat or not. In other words, REG_DEAD info for r0 in i1
4308 should be discarded.
4310 Note local information only affects cases in forms like "I1->I2->I3",
4311 "I0->I1->I2->I3" or "I0&I1->I2, I2->I3". For other cases like
4312 "I0->I1, I1&I2->I3" or "I1&I2->I3", newi2pat won't set i1dest or
4314 rtx local_elim_i1
= (i1
== 0 || i1dest_in_i1src
|| i1dest_in_i0src
4317 rtx elim_i1
= (local_elim_i1
== 0
4318 || (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i1dest
, newi2pat
))
4320 /* Same case as i1. */
4321 rtx local_elim_i0
= (i0
== 0 || i0dest_in_i0src
|| !i0dest_killed
4323 rtx elim_i0
= (local_elim_i0
== 0
4324 || (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i0dest
, newi2pat
))
4327 /* Get the old REG_NOTES and LOG_LINKS from all our insns and
4329 i3notes
= REG_NOTES (i3
), i3links
= LOG_LINKS (i3
);
4330 i2notes
= REG_NOTES (i2
), i2links
= LOG_LINKS (i2
);
4332 i1notes
= REG_NOTES (i1
), i1links
= LOG_LINKS (i1
);
4334 i0notes
= REG_NOTES (i0
), i0links
= LOG_LINKS (i0
);
4336 /* Ensure that we do not have something that should not be shared but
4337 occurs multiple times in the new insns. Check this by first
4338 resetting all the `used' flags and then copying anything is shared. */
4340 reset_used_flags (i3notes
);
4341 reset_used_flags (i2notes
);
4342 reset_used_flags (i1notes
);
4343 reset_used_flags (i0notes
);
4344 reset_used_flags (newpat
);
4345 reset_used_flags (newi2pat
);
4346 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4347 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
));
4349 i3notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i3notes
);
4350 i2notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i2notes
);
4351 i1notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i1notes
);
4352 i0notes
= copy_rtx_if_shared (i0notes
);
4353 newpat
= copy_rtx_if_shared (newpat
);
4354 newi2pat
= copy_rtx_if_shared (newi2pat
);
4355 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4356 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
));
4358 INSN_CODE (i3
) = insn_code_number
;
4359 PATTERN (i3
) = newpat
;
4361 if (CALL_P (i3
) && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3
))
4363 for (rtx link
= CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3
); link
;
4364 link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
4368 /* I2SRC must still be meaningful at this point. Some
4369 splitting operations can invalidate I2SRC, but those
4370 operations do not apply to calls. */
4372 XEXP (link
, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link
, 0),
4376 XEXP (link
, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link
, 0),
4379 XEXP (link
, 0) = simplify_replace_rtx (XEXP (link
, 0),
4384 if (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4385 INSN_CODE (undobuf
.other_insn
) = other_code_number
;
4387 /* We had one special case above where I2 had more than one set and
4388 we replaced a destination of one of those sets with the destination
4389 of I3. In that case, we have to update LOG_LINKS of insns later
4390 in this basic block. Note that this (expensive) case is rare.
4392 Also, in this case, we must pretend that all REG_NOTEs for I2
4393 actually came from I3, so that REG_UNUSED notes from I2 will be
4394 properly handled. */
4396 if (i3_subst_into_i2
)
4398 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2
), 0); i
++)
4399 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)) == SET
4400 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
)
4401 && REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)))
4402 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
)) != i2dest
4403 && ! find_reg_note (i2
, REG_UNUSED
,
4404 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2
), 0, i
))))
4405 for (temp_insn
= NEXT_INSN (i2
);
4407 && (this_basic_block
->next_bb
== EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)
4408 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
) != temp_insn
);
4409 temp_insn
= NEXT_INSN (temp_insn
))
4410 if (temp_insn
!= i3
&& NONDEBUG_INSN_P (temp_insn
))
4411 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, temp_insn
)
4412 if (link
->insn
== i2
)
4418 while (XEXP (link
, 1))
4419 link
= XEXP (link
, 1);
4420 XEXP (link
, 1) = i2notes
;
4427 LOG_LINKS (i3
) = NULL
;
4429 LOG_LINKS (i2
) = NULL
;
4434 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
&& i2scratch
)
4435 propagate_for_debug (i2
, last_combined_insn
, i2dest
, i2src
,
4437 INSN_CODE (i2
) = i2_code_number
;
4438 PATTERN (i2
) = newi2pat
;
4442 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
&& i2src
)
4443 propagate_for_debug (i2
, last_combined_insn
, i2dest
, i2src
,
4445 SET_INSN_DELETED (i2
);
4450 LOG_LINKS (i1
) = NULL
;
4452 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
)
4453 propagate_for_debug (i1
, last_combined_insn
, i1dest
, i1src
,
4455 SET_INSN_DELETED (i1
);
4460 LOG_LINKS (i0
) = NULL
;
4462 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
)
4463 propagate_for_debug (i0
, last_combined_insn
, i0dest
, i0src
,
4465 SET_INSN_DELETED (i0
);
4468 /* Get death notes for everything that is now used in either I3 or
4469 I2 and used to die in a previous insn. If we built two new
4470 patterns, move from I1 to I2 then I2 to I3 so that we get the
4471 proper movement on registers that I2 modifies. */
4474 from_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i0
);
4476 from_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i1
);
4478 from_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (i2
);
4480 move_deaths (newi2pat
, NULL_RTX
, from_luid
, i2
, &midnotes
);
4481 move_deaths (newpat
, newi2pat
, from_luid
, i3
, &midnotes
);
4483 /* Distribute all the LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES from I1, I2, and I3. */
4485 distribute_notes (i3notes
, i3
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4486 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4488 distribute_notes (i2notes
, i2
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4489 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4491 distribute_notes (i1notes
, i1
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4492 elim_i2
, local_elim_i1
, local_elim_i0
);
4494 distribute_notes (i0notes
, i0
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4495 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, local_elim_i0
);
4497 distribute_notes (midnotes
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4498 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4500 /* Distribute any notes added to I2 or I3 by recog_for_combine. We
4501 know these are REG_UNUSED and want them to go to the desired insn,
4502 so we always pass it as i3. */
4504 if (newi2pat
&& new_i2_notes
)
4505 distribute_notes (new_i2_notes
, i2
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
4509 distribute_notes (new_i3_notes
, i3
, i3
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
4512 /* If I3DEST was used in I3SRC, it really died in I3. We may need to
4513 put a REG_DEAD note for it somewhere. If NEWI2PAT exists and sets
4514 I3DEST, the death must be somewhere before I2, not I3. If we passed I3
4515 in that case, it might delete I2. Similarly for I2 and I1.
4516 Show an additional death due to the REG_DEAD note we make here. If
4517 we discard it in distribute_notes, we will decrement it again. */
4521 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i3dest_killed
, NULL_RTX
);
4522 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i3dest_killed
, newi2pat
))
4523 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, elim_i2
,
4526 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4527 elim_i2
, elim_i1
, elim_i0
);
4530 if (i2dest_in_i2src
)
4532 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i2dest
, NULL_RTX
);
4533 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i2dest
, newi2pat
))
4534 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
,
4535 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4537 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4538 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4541 if (i1dest_in_i1src
)
4543 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i1dest
, NULL_RTX
);
4544 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i1dest
, newi2pat
))
4545 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
,
4546 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4548 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4549 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4552 if (i0dest_in_i0src
)
4554 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, i0dest
, NULL_RTX
);
4555 if (newi2pat
&& reg_set_p (i0dest
, newi2pat
))
4556 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i2
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
,
4557 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4559 distribute_notes (new_note
, NULL
, i3
, newi2pat
? i2
: NULL
,
4560 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
4563 distribute_links (i3links
);
4564 distribute_links (i2links
);
4565 distribute_links (i1links
);
4566 distribute_links (i0links
);
4570 struct insn_link
*link
;
4571 rtx_insn
*i2_insn
= 0;
4572 rtx i2_val
= 0, set
;
4574 /* The insn that used to set this register doesn't exist, and
4575 this life of the register may not exist either. See if one of
4576 I3's links points to an insn that sets I2DEST. If it does,
4577 that is now the last known value for I2DEST. If we don't update
4578 this and I2 set the register to a value that depended on its old
4579 contents, we will get confused. If this insn is used, thing
4580 will be set correctly in combine_instructions. */
4581 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, i3
)
4582 if ((set
= single_set (link
->insn
)) != 0
4583 && rtx_equal_p (i2dest
, SET_DEST (set
)))
4584 i2_insn
= link
->insn
, i2_val
= SET_SRC (set
);
4586 record_value_for_reg (i2dest
, i2_insn
, i2_val
);
4588 /* If the reg formerly set in I2 died only once and that was in I3,
4589 zero its use count so it won't make `reload' do any work. */
4591 && (newi2pat
== 0 || ! reg_mentioned_p (i2dest
, newi2pat
))
4592 && ! i2dest_in_i2src
4593 && REGNO (i2dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
4594 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i2dest
), -1);
4597 if (i1
&& REG_P (i1dest
))
4599 struct insn_link
*link
;
4600 rtx_insn
*i1_insn
= 0;
4601 rtx i1_val
= 0, set
;
4603 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, i3
)
4604 if ((set
= single_set (link
->insn
)) != 0
4605 && rtx_equal_p (i1dest
, SET_DEST (set
)))
4606 i1_insn
= link
->insn
, i1_val
= SET_SRC (set
);
4608 record_value_for_reg (i1dest
, i1_insn
, i1_val
);
4611 && ! i1dest_in_i1src
4612 && REGNO (i1dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
4613 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i1dest
), -1);
4616 if (i0
&& REG_P (i0dest
))
4618 struct insn_link
*link
;
4619 rtx_insn
*i0_insn
= 0;
4620 rtx i0_val
= 0, set
;
4622 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link
, i3
)
4623 if ((set
= single_set (link
->insn
)) != 0
4624 && rtx_equal_p (i0dest
, SET_DEST (set
)))
4625 i0_insn
= link
->insn
, i0_val
= SET_SRC (set
);
4627 record_value_for_reg (i0dest
, i0_insn
, i0_val
);
4630 && ! i0dest_in_i0src
4631 && REGNO (i0dest
) < reg_n_sets_max
)
4632 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i0dest
), -1);
4635 /* Update reg_stat[].nonzero_bits et al for any changes that may have
4636 been made to this insn. The order is important, because newi2pat
4637 can affect nonzero_bits of newpat. */
4639 note_pattern_stores (newi2pat
, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies
, NULL
);
4640 note_pattern_stores (newpat
, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies
, NULL
);
4643 if (undobuf
.other_insn
!= NULL_RTX
)
4647 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying other_insn ");
4648 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, undobuf
.other_insn
);
4650 df_insn_rescan (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4653 if (i0
&& !(NOTE_P (i0
) && (NOTE_KIND (i0
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4657 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i0 ");
4658 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i0
);
4660 df_insn_rescan (i0
);
4663 if (i1
&& !(NOTE_P (i1
) && (NOTE_KIND (i1
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4667 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i1 ");
4668 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i1
);
4670 df_insn_rescan (i1
);
4673 if (i2
&& !(NOTE_P (i2
) && (NOTE_KIND (i2
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4677 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i2 ");
4678 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i2
);
4680 df_insn_rescan (i2
);
4683 if (i3
&& !(NOTE_P (i3
) && (NOTE_KIND (i3
) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED
)))
4687 fprintf (dump_file
, "modifying insn i3 ");
4688 dump_insn_slim (dump_file
, i3
);
4690 df_insn_rescan (i3
);
4693 /* Set new_direct_jump_p if a new return or simple jump instruction
4694 has been created. Adjust the CFG accordingly. */
4695 if (returnjump_p (i3
) || any_uncondjump_p (i3
))
4697 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4698 mark_jump_label (PATTERN (i3
), i3
, 0);
4699 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3
);
4702 if (undobuf
.other_insn
!= NULL_RTX
4703 && (returnjump_p (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4704 || any_uncondjump_p (undobuf
.other_insn
)))
4706 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4707 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4710 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3
)) == TRAP_IF
4711 && XEXP (PATTERN (i3
), 0) == const1_rtx
)
4713 basic_block bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i3
);
4715 remove_edge (split_block (bb
, i3
));
4716 emit_barrier_after_bb (bb
);
4717 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4720 if (undobuf
.other_insn
4721 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == TRAP_IF
4722 && XEXP (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
), 0) == const1_rtx
)
4724 basic_block bb
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4726 remove_edge (split_block (bb
, undobuf
.other_insn
));
4727 emit_barrier_after_bb (bb
);
4728 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4731 /* A noop might also need cleaning up of CFG, if it comes from the
4732 simplification of a jump. */
4734 && GET_CODE (newpat
) == SET
4735 && SET_SRC (newpat
) == pc_rtx
4736 && SET_DEST (newpat
) == pc_rtx
)
4738 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4739 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3
);
4742 if (undobuf
.other_insn
!= NULL_RTX
4743 && JUMP_P (undobuf
.other_insn
)
4744 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == SET
4745 && SET_SRC (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == pc_rtx
4746 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (undobuf
.other_insn
)) == pc_rtx
)
4748 *new_direct_jump_p
= 1;
4749 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf
.other_insn
);
4752 combine_successes
++;
4755 rtx_insn
*ret
= newi2pat
? i2
: i3
;
4756 if (added_links_insn
&& DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn
) < DF_INSN_LUID (ret
))
4757 ret
= added_links_insn
;
4758 if (added_notes_insn
&& DF_INSN_LUID (added_notes_insn
) < DF_INSN_LUID (ret
))
4759 ret
= added_notes_insn
;
4764 /* Get a marker for undoing to the current state. */
4767 get_undo_marker (void)
4769 return undobuf
.undos
;
4772 /* Undo the modifications up to the marker. */
4775 undo_to_marker (void *marker
)
4777 struct undo
*undo
, *next
;
4779 for (undo
= undobuf
.undos
; undo
!= marker
; undo
= next
)
4787 *undo
->where
.r
= undo
->old_contents
.r
;
4790 *undo
->where
.i
= undo
->old_contents
.i
;
4793 adjust_reg_mode (regno_reg_rtx
[undo
->where
.regno
],
4794 undo
->old_contents
.m
);
4797 *undo
->where
.l
= undo
->old_contents
.l
;
4803 undo
->next
= undobuf
.frees
;
4804 undobuf
.frees
= undo
;
4807 undobuf
.undos
= (struct undo
*) marker
;
4810 /* Undo all the modifications recorded in undobuf. */
4818 /* We've committed to accepting the changes we made. Move all
4819 of the undos to the free list. */
4824 struct undo
*undo
, *next
;
4826 for (undo
= undobuf
.undos
; undo
; undo
= next
)
4829 undo
->next
= undobuf
.frees
;
4830 undobuf
.frees
= undo
;
4835 /* Find the innermost point within the rtx at LOC, possibly LOC itself,
4836 where we have an arithmetic expression and return that point. LOC will
4839 try_combine will call this function to see if an insn can be split into
4843 find_split_point (rtx
*loc
, rtx_insn
*insn
, bool set_src
)
4846 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
4848 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
= 0;
4849 HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= 0;
4850 bool unsignedp
= false;
4851 rtx inner
= NULL_RTX
;
4852 scalar_int_mode mode
, inner_mode
;
4854 /* First special-case some codes. */
4858 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
4859 /* If we are making a paradoxical SUBREG invalid, it becomes a split
4861 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
4864 return find_split_point (&SUBREG_REG (x
), insn
, false);
4867 /* If we have (mem (const ..)) or (mem (symbol_ref ...)), split it
4868 using LO_SUM and HIGH. */
4869 if (HAVE_lo_sum
&& (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == CONST
4870 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
))
4872 machine_mode address_mode
= get_address_mode (x
);
4875 gen_rtx_LO_SUM (address_mode
,
4876 gen_rtx_HIGH (address_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
4878 return &XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
4881 /* If we have a PLUS whose second operand is a constant and the
4882 address is not valid, perhaps we can split it up using
4883 the machine-specific way to split large constants. We use
4884 the first pseudo-reg (one of the virtual regs) as a placeholder;
4885 it will not remain in the result. */
4886 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
4887 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
4888 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
4889 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
4891 rtx reg
= regno_reg_rtx
[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
];
4892 rtx_insn
*seq
= combine_split_insns (gen_rtx_SET (reg
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
4895 /* This should have produced two insns, each of which sets our
4896 placeholder. If the source of the second is a valid address,
4897 we can put both sources together and make a split point
4901 && NEXT_INSN (seq
) != NULL_RTX
4902 && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (seq
)) == NULL_RTX
4903 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (seq
)
4904 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq
)) == SET
4905 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (seq
)) == reg
4906 && ! reg_mentioned_p (reg
,
4907 SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq
)))
4908 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (NEXT_INSN (seq
))
4909 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
))) == SET
4910 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
))) == reg
4911 && memory_address_addr_space_p
4912 (GET_MODE (x
), SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
))),
4913 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
4915 rtx src1
= SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq
));
4916 rtx src2
= SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq
)));
4918 /* Replace the placeholder in SRC2 with SRC1. If we can
4919 find where in SRC2 it was placed, that can become our
4920 split point and we can replace this address with SRC2.
4921 Just try two obvious places. */
4923 src2
= replace_rtx (src2
, reg
, src1
);
4925 if (XEXP (src2
, 0) == src1
)
4926 split
= &XEXP (src2
, 0);
4927 else if (GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (XEXP (src2
, 0)))[0] == 'e'
4928 && XEXP (XEXP (src2
, 0), 0) == src1
)
4929 split
= &XEXP (XEXP (src2
, 0), 0);
4933 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), src2
);
4938 /* If that didn't work and we have a nested plus, like:
4939 ((REG1 * CONST1) + REG2) + CONST2 and (REG1 + REG2) + CONST2
4940 is valid address, try to split (REG1 * CONST1). */
4941 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == PLUS
4942 && !OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0))
4943 && OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1))
4944 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4945 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0),
4948 rtx tem
= XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0);
4949 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0) = reg
;
4950 if (memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
4951 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
4953 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0) = tem
;
4954 return &XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0);
4956 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0) = tem
;
4958 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == PLUS
4959 && OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0))
4960 && !OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1))
4961 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1)) == SUBREG
4962 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0),
4965 rtx tem
= XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1);
4966 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1) = reg
;
4967 if (memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
4968 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
4970 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1) = tem
;
4971 return &XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1);
4973 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1) = tem
;
4976 /* If that didn't work, perhaps the first operand is complex and
4977 needs to be computed separately, so make a split point there.
4978 This will occur on machines that just support REG + CONST
4979 and have a constant moved through some previous computation. */
4980 if (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
4981 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4982 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)))))
4983 return &XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
4986 /* If we have a PLUS whose first operand is complex, try computing it
4987 separately by making a split there. */
4988 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
4989 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
4991 && ! OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
4992 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4993 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)))))
4994 return &XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
4998 /* See if we can split SET_SRC as it stands. */
4999 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5000 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5003 /* See if we can split SET_DEST as it stands. */
5004 split
= find_split_point (&SET_DEST (x
), insn
, false);
5005 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_DEST (x
))
5008 /* See if this is a bitfield assignment with everything constant. If
5009 so, this is an IOR of an AND, so split it into that. */
5010 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5011 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)),
5013 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (inner_mode
)
5014 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1))
5015 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2))
5016 && CONST_INT_P (SET_SRC (x
))
5017 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1))
5018 + INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2)))
5019 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
))
5020 && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)))
5022 HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2));
5023 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1));
5024 rtx dest
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0);
5025 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1;
5026 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT src
= INTVAL (SET_SRC (x
)) & mask
;
5029 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
5030 pos
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) - len
- pos
;
5032 or_mask
= gen_int_mode (src
<< pos
, inner_mode
);
5035 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, inner_mode
, dest
, or_mask
));
5038 rtx negmask
= gen_int_mode (~(mask
<< pos
), inner_mode
);
5040 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, inner_mode
,
5041 simplify_gen_binary (AND
, inner_mode
,
5046 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
), dest
);
5048 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5049 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5053 /* Otherwise, see if this is an operation that we can split into two.
5054 If so, try to split that. */
5055 code
= GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x
));
5060 /* If we are AND'ing with a large constant that is only a single
5061 bit and the result is only being used in a context where we
5062 need to know if it is zero or nonzero, replace it with a bit
5063 extraction. This will avoid the large constant, which might
5064 have taken more than one insn to make. If the constant were
5065 not a valid argument to the AND but took only one insn to make,
5066 this is no worse, but if it took more than one insn, it will
5069 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1))
5070 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))
5071 && (pos
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1)))) >= 7
5072 && REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
5073 && (split
= find_single_use (SET_DEST (x
), insn
, NULL
)) != 0
5074 && (GET_CODE (*split
) == EQ
|| GET_CODE (*split
) == NE
)
5075 && XEXP (*split
, 0) == SET_DEST (x
)
5076 && XEXP (*split
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
5078 rtx extraction
= make_extraction (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x
)),
5079 XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0),
5081 true, false, false);
5082 if (extraction
!= 0)
5084 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), extraction
);
5085 return find_split_point (loc
, insn
, false);
5091 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, this is (NE X 0) and only one bit of X
5092 is known to be on, this can be converted into a NEG of a shift. */
5093 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1 && XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1) == const0_rtx
5094 && GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x
)) == GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))
5095 && ((pos
= exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0),
5096 GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
),
5099 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0));
5100 rtx pos_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (mode
, pos
);
5103 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode
,
5104 XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0),
5107 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5108 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5114 inner
= XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0);
5116 /* We can't optimize if either mode is a partial integer
5117 mode as we don't know how many bits are significant
5119 if (!is_int_mode (GET_MODE (inner
), &inner_mode
)
5120 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x
))) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
5124 len
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
);
5130 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0)),
5132 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1))
5133 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 2)))
5135 inner
= XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0);
5136 len
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1));
5137 pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 2));
5139 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
5140 pos
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) - len
- pos
;
5141 unsignedp
= (code
== ZERO_EXTRACT
);
5150 && known_subrange_p (pos
, len
,
5151 0, GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)))
5152 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x
)), &mode
))
5154 /* For unsigned, we have a choice of a shift followed by an
5155 AND or two shifts. Use two shifts for field sizes where the
5156 constant might be too large. We assume here that we can
5157 always at least get 8-bit constants in an AND insn, which is
5158 true for every current RISC. */
5160 if (unsignedp
&& len
<= 8)
5162 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
5163 = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1;
5164 rtx pos_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (mode
, pos
);
5168 (mode
, gen_lowpart (mode
, inner
), pos_rtx
),
5169 gen_int_mode (mask
, mode
)));
5171 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5172 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5177 int left_bits
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - len
- pos
;
5178 int right_bits
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - len
;
5181 (unsignedp
? LSHIFTRT
: ASHIFTRT
, mode
,
5182 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode
,
5183 gen_lowpart (mode
, inner
),
5184 gen_int_shift_amount (mode
, left_bits
)),
5185 gen_int_shift_amount (mode
, right_bits
)));
5187 split
= find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x
), insn
, true);
5188 if (split
&& split
!= &SET_SRC (x
))
5193 /* See if this is a simple operation with a constant as the second
5194 operand. It might be that this constant is out of range and hence
5195 could be used as a split point. */
5196 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x
))
5197 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1))
5198 && (OBJECT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))
5199 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0)) == SUBREG
5200 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0))))))
5201 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 1);
5203 /* Finally, see if this is a simple operation with its first operand
5204 not in a register. The operation might require this operand in a
5205 register, so return it as a split point. We can always do this
5206 because if the first operand were another operation, we would have
5207 already found it as a split point. */
5208 if ((BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x
)) || UNARY_P (SET_SRC (x
)))
5209 && ! register_operand (XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0), VOIDmode
))
5210 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x
), 0);
5216 /* We write NOR as (and (not A) (not B)), but if we don't have a NOR,
5217 it is better to write this as (not (ior A B)) so we can split it.
5218 Similarly for IOR. */
5219 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == NOT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == NOT
)
5222 gen_rtx_NOT (GET_MODE (x
),
5223 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
== IOR
? AND
: IOR
,
5225 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
5226 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0))));
5227 return find_split_point (loc
, insn
, set_src
);
5230 /* Many RISC machines have a large set of logical insns. If the
5231 second operand is a NOT, put it first so we will try to split the
5232 other operand first. */
5233 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == NOT
)
5235 rtx tem
= XEXP (x
, 0);
5236 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5237 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), tem
);
5243 /* Canonicalization can produce (minus A (mult B C)), where C is a
5244 constant. It may be better to try splitting (plus (mult B -C) A)
5245 instead if this isn't a multiply by a power of two. */
5246 if (set_src
&& code
== MINUS
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == MULT
5247 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT
5248 && !pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1))))
5250 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
5251 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_int
= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1));
5252 HOST_WIDE_INT other_int
= trunc_int_for_mode (-this_int
, mode
);
5253 SUBST (*loc
, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode
,
5255 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0),
5256 gen_int_mode (other_int
,
5259 return find_split_point (loc
, insn
, set_src
);
5262 /* Split at a multiply-accumulate instruction. However if this is
5263 the SET_SRC, we likely do not have such an instruction and it's
5264 worthless to try this split. */
5266 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
5267 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFT
5268 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
)))
5275 /* Otherwise, select our actions depending on our rtx class. */
5276 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
))
5278 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS
: /* This is ZERO_EXTRACT and SIGN_EXTRACT. */
5280 split
= find_split_point (&XEXP (x
, 2), insn
, false);
5285 case RTX_COMM_ARITH
:
5287 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE
:
5288 split
= find_split_point (&XEXP (x
, 1), insn
, false);
5293 /* Some machines have (and (shift ...) ...) insns. If X is not
5294 an AND, but XEXP (X, 0) is, use it as our split point. */
5295 if (GET_CODE (x
) != AND
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == AND
)
5296 return &XEXP (x
, 0);
5298 split
= find_split_point (&XEXP (x
, 0), insn
, false);
5304 /* Otherwise, we don't have a split point. */
5309 /* Throughout X, replace FROM with TO, and return the result.
5310 The result is TO if X is FROM;
5311 otherwise the result is X, but its contents may have been modified.
5312 If they were modified, a record was made in undobuf so that
5313 undo_all will (among other things) return X to its original state.
5315 If the number of changes necessary is too much to record to undo,
5316 the excess changes are not made, so the result is invalid.
5317 The changes already made can still be undone.
5318 undobuf.num_undo is incremented for such changes, so by testing that
5319 the caller can tell whether the result is valid.
5321 `n_occurrences' is incremented each time FROM is replaced.
5323 IN_DEST is true if we are processing the SET_DEST of a SET.
5325 IN_COND is true if we are at the top level of a condition.
5327 UNIQUE_COPY is true if each substitution must be unique. We do this
5328 by copying if `n_occurrences' is nonzero. */
5331 subst (rtx x
, rtx from
, rtx to
, bool in_dest
, bool in_cond
, bool unique_copy
)
5333 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5334 machine_mode op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5339 /* Two expressions are equal if they are identical copies of a shared
5340 RTX or if they are both registers with the same register number
5343 #define COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P(X,Y) \
5345 || (REG_P (X) && REG_P (Y) \
5346 && REGNO (X) == REGNO (Y) && GET_MODE (X) == GET_MODE (Y)))
5348 /* Do not substitute into clobbers of regs -- this will never result in
5350 if (GET_CODE (x
) == CLOBBER
&& REG_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5353 if (! in_dest
&& COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x
, from
))
5356 return (unique_copy
&& n_occurrences
> 1 ? copy_rtx (to
) : to
);
5359 /* If X and FROM are the same register but different modes, they
5360 will not have been seen as equal above. However, the log links code
5361 will make a LOG_LINKS entry for that case. If we do nothing, we
5362 will try to rerecognize our original insn and, when it succeeds,
5363 we will delete the feeding insn, which is incorrect.
5365 So force this insn not to match in this (rare) case. */
5366 if (! in_dest
&& code
== REG
&& REG_P (from
)
5367 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x
, from
))
5368 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x
), const0_rtx
);
5370 /* If this is an object, we are done unless it is a MEM or LO_SUM, both
5371 of which may contain things that can be combined. */
5372 if (code
!= MEM
&& code
!= LO_SUM
&& OBJECT_P (x
))
5375 /* It is possible to have a subexpression appear twice in the insn.
5376 Suppose that FROM is a register that appears within TO.
5377 Then, after that subexpression has been scanned once by `subst',
5378 the second time it is scanned, TO may be found. If we were
5379 to scan TO here, we would find FROM within it and create a
5380 self-referent rtl structure which is completely wrong. */
5381 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x
, to
))
5384 /* Parallel asm_operands need special attention because all of the
5385 inputs are shared across the arms. Furthermore, unsharing the
5386 rtl results in recognition failures. Failure to handle this case
5387 specially can result in circular rtl.
5389 Solve this by doing a normal pass across the first entry of the
5390 parallel, and only processing the SET_DESTs of the subsequent
5393 if (code
== PARALLEL
5394 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0)) == SET
5395 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0))) == ASM_OPERANDS
)
5397 new_rtx
= subst (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0), from
, to
, false, false, unique_copy
);
5399 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5400 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
5401 && XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5404 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, 0, 0), new_rtx
);
5406 for (i
= XVECLEN (x
, 0) - 1; i
>= 1; i
--)
5408 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x
, 0, i
));
5410 if (!REG_P (dest
) && GET_CODE (dest
) != PC
)
5412 new_rtx
= subst (dest
, from
, to
, false, false, unique_copy
);
5414 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5415 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
5416 && XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5419 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x
, 0, i
)), new_rtx
);
5425 len
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
);
5426 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
5428 /* We don't need to process a SET_DEST that is a register or PC, so
5429 set up to skip this common case. All other cases where we want
5430 to suppress replacing something inside a SET_SRC are handled via
5431 the IN_DEST operand. */
5433 && (REG_P (SET_DEST (x
))
5434 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == PC
))
5437 /* Trying to simplify the operands of a widening MULT is not likely
5438 to create RTL matching a machine insn. */
5440 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5441 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
5442 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5443 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
5444 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
5445 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0))
5450 /* Get the mode of operand 0 in case X is now a SIGN_EXTEND of a
5453 op0_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
5455 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
5460 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
5462 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), from
))
5464 new_rtx
= (unique_copy
&& n_occurrences
5465 ? copy_rtx (to
) : to
);
5470 new_rtx
= subst (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), from
, to
,
5471 false, false, unique_copy
);
5473 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing
5475 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
5476 && XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5480 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), new_rtx
);
5483 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e')
5485 /* If this is a register being set, ignore it. */
5486 new_rtx
= XEXP (x
, i
);
5489 && (((code
== SUBREG
|| code
== ZERO_EXTRACT
)
5491 || code
== STRICT_LOW_PART
))
5494 else if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XEXP (x
, i
), from
))
5496 /* In general, don't install a subreg involving two
5497 modes not tieable. It can worsen register
5498 allocation, and can even make invalid reload
5499 insns, since the reg inside may need to be copied
5500 from in the outside mode, and that may be invalid
5501 if it is an fp reg copied in integer mode.
5503 We allow an exception to this: It is valid if
5504 it is inside another SUBREG and the mode of that
5505 SUBREG and the mode of the inside of TO is
5508 if (GET_CODE (to
) == SUBREG
5509 && !targetm
.modes_tieable_p (GET_MODE (to
),
5510 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to
)))
5511 && ! (code
== SUBREG
5512 && (targetm
.modes_tieable_p
5513 (GET_MODE (x
), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to
))))))
5514 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, const0_rtx
);
5518 && REGNO (to
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5519 && simplify_subreg_regno (REGNO (to
), GET_MODE (to
),
5522 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, const0_rtx
);
5524 new_rtx
= (unique_copy
&& n_occurrences
? copy_rtx (to
) : to
);
5528 /* If we are in a SET_DEST, suppress most cases unless we
5529 have gone inside a MEM, in which case we want to
5530 simplify the address. We assume here that things that
5531 are actually part of the destination have their inner
5532 parts in the first expression. This is true for SUBREG,
5533 STRICT_LOW_PART, and ZERO_EXTRACT, which are the only
5534 things aside from REG and MEM that should appear in a
5536 new_rtx
= subst (XEXP (x
, i
), from
, to
,
5538 && (code
== SUBREG
|| code
== STRICT_LOW_PART
5539 || code
== ZERO_EXTRACT
))
5542 code
== IF_THEN_ELSE
&& i
== 0,
5545 /* If we found that we will have to reject this combination,
5546 indicate that by returning the CLOBBER ourselves, rather than
5547 an expression containing it. This will speed things up as
5548 well as prevent accidents where two CLOBBERs are considered
5549 to be equal, thus producing an incorrect simplification. */
5551 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == CLOBBER
&& XEXP (new_rtx
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
5554 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
))
5556 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
5558 x
= simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x
), new_rtx
,
5559 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)),
5562 x
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode
, const0_rtx
);
5564 else if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
)
5565 && (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
5566 || GET_CODE (x
) == SIGN_EXTEND
5567 || GET_CODE (x
) == FLOAT
5568 || GET_CODE (x
) == UNSIGNED_FLOAT
))
5570 x
= simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
),
5572 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
5574 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, const0_rtx
);
5576 /* CONST_INTs shouldn't be substituted into PRE_DEC, PRE_MODIFY
5577 etc. arguments, otherwise we can ICE before trying to recog
5578 it. See PR104446. */
5579 else if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
)
5580 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x
)) == RTX_AUTOINC
)
5581 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, const0_rtx
);
5583 SUBST (XEXP (x
, i
), new_rtx
);
5588 /* Check if we are loading something from the constant pool via float
5589 extension; in this case we would undo compress_float_constant
5590 optimization and degenerate constant load to an immediate value. */
5591 if (GET_CODE (x
) == FLOAT_EXTEND
5592 && MEM_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5593 && MEM_READONLY_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
5595 rtx tmp
= avoid_constant_pool_reference (x
);
5600 /* Try to simplify X. If the simplification changed the code, it is likely
5601 that further simplification will help, so loop, but limit the number
5602 of repetitions that will be performed. */
5604 for (i
= 0; i
< 4; i
++)
5606 /* If X is sufficiently simple, don't bother trying to do anything
5608 if (code
!= CONST_INT
&& code
!= REG
&& code
!= CLOBBER
)
5609 x
= combine_simplify_rtx (x
, op0_mode
, in_dest
, in_cond
);
5611 if (GET_CODE (x
) == code
)
5614 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5616 /* We no longer know the original mode of operand 0 since we
5617 have changed the form of X) */
5618 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5624 /* If X is a commutative operation whose operands are not in the canonical
5625 order, use substitutions to swap them. */
5628 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (rtx x
)
5630 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
)
5631 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1)))
5633 rtx temp
= XEXP (x
, 0);
5634 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5635 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), temp
);
5638 unsigned n_elts
= 0;
5639 if (GET_CODE (x
) == VEC_MERGE
5640 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 2))
5641 && GET_MODE_NUNITS (GET_MODE (x
)).is_constant (&n_elts
)
5642 && (swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1))
5643 /* Two operands have same precedence, then
5644 first bit of mask select first operand. */
5645 || (!swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x
, 1), XEXP (x
, 0))
5646 && !(UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 2)) & 1))))
5648 rtx temp
= XEXP (x
, 0);
5649 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sel
= UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 2));
5650 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
;
5651 if (n_elts
== HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
5654 mask
= (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< n_elts
) - 1;
5655 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5656 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), temp
);
5657 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 2), GEN_INT (~sel
& mask
));
5661 /* Simplify X, a piece of RTL. We just operate on the expression at the
5662 outer level; call `subst' to simplify recursively. Return the new
5665 OP0_MODE is the original mode of XEXP (x, 0). IN_DEST is true
5666 if we are inside a SET_DEST. IN_COND is true if we are at the top level
5670 combine_simplify_rtx (rtx x
, machine_mode op0_mode
, bool in_dest
, bool in_cond
)
5672 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5673 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
5674 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
5678 /* If this is a commutative operation, put a constant last and a complex
5679 expression first. We don't need to do this for comparisons here. */
5680 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x
);
5682 /* Try to fold this expression in case we have constants that weren't
5685 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
))
5688 if (op0_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5689 op0_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
5690 temp
= simplify_unary_operation (code
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), op0_mode
);
5693 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE
:
5695 machine_mode cmp_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
5696 if (cmp_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5698 cmp_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1));
5699 if (cmp_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5700 cmp_mode
= op0_mode
;
5702 temp
= simplify_relational_operation (code
, mode
, cmp_mode
,
5703 XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5706 case RTX_COMM_ARITH
:
5708 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (code
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
5710 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS
:
5712 temp
= simplify_ternary_operation (code
, mode
, op0_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
5713 XEXP (x
, 1), XEXP (x
, 2));
5722 code
= GET_CODE (temp
);
5723 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5724 mode
= GET_MODE (temp
);
5727 /* If this is a simple operation applied to an IF_THEN_ELSE, try
5728 applying it to the arms of the IF_THEN_ELSE. This often simplifies
5729 things. Check for cases where both arms are testing the same
5732 Don't do anything if all operands are very simple. */
5735 && ((!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5736 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
5737 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)))))
5738 || (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
5739 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == SUBREG
5740 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 1)))))))
5742 && (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
5743 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
5744 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)))))))
5746 rtx cond
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
;
5748 cond
= if_then_else_cond (x
, &true_rtx
, &false_rtx
);
5750 /* If everything is a comparison, what we have is highly unlikely
5751 to be simpler, so don't use it. */
5752 && ! (COMPARISON_P (x
)
5753 && (COMPARISON_P (true_rtx
) || COMPARISON_P (false_rtx
)))
5754 /* Similarly, if we end up with one of the expressions the same
5755 as the original, it is certainly not simpler. */
5756 && ! rtx_equal_p (x
, true_rtx
)
5757 && ! rtx_equal_p (x
, false_rtx
))
5759 rtx cop1
= const0_rtx
;
5760 enum rtx_code cond_code
= simplify_comparison (NE
, &cond
, &cop1
);
5762 if (cond_code
== NE
&& COMPARISON_P (cond
))
5765 /* Simplify the alternative arms; this may collapse the true and
5766 false arms to store-flag values. Be careful to use copy_rtx
5767 here since true_rtx or false_rtx might share RTL with x as a
5768 result of the if_then_else_cond call above. */
5769 true_rtx
= subst (copy_rtx (true_rtx
), pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
,
5770 false, false, false);
5771 false_rtx
= subst (copy_rtx (false_rtx
), pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
,
5772 false, false, false);
5774 /* If true_rtx and false_rtx are not general_operands, an if_then_else
5775 is unlikely to be simpler. */
5776 if (general_operand (true_rtx
, VOIDmode
)
5777 && general_operand (false_rtx
, VOIDmode
))
5779 enum rtx_code reversed
;
5781 /* Restarting if we generate a store-flag expression will cause
5782 us to loop. Just drop through in this case. */
5784 /* If the result values are STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero, we can
5785 just make the comparison operation. */
5786 if (true_rtx
== const_true_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const0_rtx
)
5787 x
= simplify_gen_relational (cond_code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
5789 else if (true_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const_true_rtx
5790 && ((reversed
= reversed_comparison_code_parts
5791 (cond_code
, cond
, cop1
, NULL
))
5793 x
= simplify_gen_relational (reversed
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
5796 /* Likewise, we can make the negate of a comparison operation
5797 if the result values are - STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero. */
5798 else if (CONST_INT_P (true_rtx
)
5799 && INTVAL (true_rtx
) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5800 && false_rtx
== const0_rtx
)
5801 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
5802 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code
,
5806 else if (CONST_INT_P (false_rtx
)
5807 && INTVAL (false_rtx
) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5808 && true_rtx
== const0_rtx
5809 && ((reversed
= reversed_comparison_code_parts
5810 (cond_code
, cond
, cop1
, NULL
))
5812 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
5813 simplify_gen_relational (reversed
,
5818 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5819 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5824 /* First see if we can apply the inverse distributive law. */
5825 if (code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
5826 || code
== AND
|| code
== IOR
|| code
== XOR
)
5828 x
= apply_distributive_law (x
);
5829 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
5830 op0_mode
= VOIDmode
;
5833 /* If CODE is an associative operation not otherwise handled, see if we
5834 can associate some operands. This can win if they are constants or
5835 if they are logically related (i.e. (a & b) & a). */
5836 if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
|| code
== MULT
|| code
== DIV
5837 || code
== AND
|| code
== IOR
|| code
== XOR
5838 || code
== SMAX
|| code
== SMIN
|| code
== UMAX
|| code
== UMIN
)
5839 && ((INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode
) && code
!= DIV
)
5840 || (flag_associative_math
&& FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
))))
5842 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == code
)
5844 rtx other
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
5845 rtx inner_op0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
5846 rtx inner_op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
5849 /* Make sure we pass the constant operand if any as the second
5850 one if this is a commutative operation. */
5851 if (CONSTANT_P (inner_op0
) && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
))
5852 std::swap (inner_op0
, inner_op1
);
5853 inner
= simplify_binary_operation (code
== MINUS
? PLUS
5854 : code
== DIV
? MULT
5856 mode
, inner_op0
, inner_op1
);
5858 /* For commutative operations, try the other pair if that one
5860 if (inner
== 0 && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
))
5862 other
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
5863 inner
= simplify_binary_operation (code
, mode
,
5864 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
5869 return simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, other
, inner
);
5873 /* A little bit of algebraic simplification here. */
5877 /* Ensure that our address has any ASHIFTs converted to MULT in case
5878 address-recognizing predicates are called later. */
5879 temp
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), MEM
);
5880 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), temp
);
5884 if (op0_mode
== VOIDmode
)
5885 op0_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
));
5887 /* See if this can be moved to simplify_subreg. */
5888 if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
5889 && known_eq (subreg_lowpart_offset (mode
, op0_mode
), SUBREG_BYTE (x
))
5890 /* Don't call gen_lowpart if the inner mode
5891 is VOIDmode and we cannot simplify it, as SUBREG without
5892 inner mode is invalid. */
5893 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)) != VOIDmode
5894 || gen_lowpart_common (mode
, SUBREG_REG (x
))))
5895 return gen_lowpart (mode
, SUBREG_REG (x
));
5897 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))) == MODE_CC
)
5901 temp
= simplify_subreg (mode
, SUBREG_REG (x
), op0_mode
,
5906 /* If op is known to have all lower bits zero, the result is zero. */
5907 scalar_int_mode int_mode
, int_op0_mode
;
5909 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
5910 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (op0_mode
, &int_op0_mode
)
5911 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)
5912 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_op0_mode
))
5913 && known_eq (subreg_lowpart_offset (int_mode
, int_op0_mode
),
5915 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_op0_mode
)
5916 && ((nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x
), int_op0_mode
)
5917 & GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
)) == 0)
5918 && !side_effects_p (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
5919 return CONST0_RTX (int_mode
);
5922 /* Don't change the mode of the MEM if that would change the meaning
5924 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
5925 && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
5926 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (x
), 0),
5927 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (SUBREG_REG (x
)))))
5928 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode
, const0_rtx
);
5930 /* Note that we cannot do any narrowing for non-constants since
5931 we might have been counting on using the fact that some bits were
5932 zero. We now do this in the SET. */
5937 temp
= expand_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0));
5939 /* For C equal to the width of MODE minus 1, (neg (ashiftrt X C)) can be
5940 replaced by (lshiftrt X C). This will convert
5941 (neg (sign_extract X 1 Y)) to (zero_extract X 1 Y). */
5943 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == ASHIFTRT
5944 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (temp
, 1))
5945 && INTVAL (XEXP (temp
, 1)) == GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode
) - 1)
5946 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, mode
, XEXP (temp
, 0),
5947 INTVAL (XEXP (temp
, 1)));
5949 /* If X has only a single bit that might be nonzero, say, bit I, convert
5950 (neg X) to (ashiftrt (ashift X C-I) C-I) where C is the bitsize of
5951 MODE minus 1. This will convert (neg (zero_extract X 1 Y)) to
5952 (sign_extract X 1 Y). But only do this if TEMP isn't a register
5953 or a SUBREG of one since we'd be making the expression more
5954 complex if it was just a register. */
5957 && ! (GET_CODE (temp
) == SUBREG
5958 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (temp
)))
5959 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
5960 && (i
= exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (temp
, int_mode
))) >= 0)
5962 rtx temp1
= simplify_shift_const
5963 (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFTRT
, int_mode
,
5964 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, int_mode
, temp
,
5965 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 - i
),
5966 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 - i
);
5968 /* If all we did was surround TEMP with the two shifts, we
5969 haven't improved anything, so don't use it. Otherwise,
5970 we are better off with TEMP1. */
5971 if (GET_CODE (temp1
) != ASHIFTRT
5972 || GET_CODE (XEXP (temp1
, 0)) != ASHIFT
5973 || XEXP (XEXP (temp1
, 0), 0) != temp
)
5979 /* We can't handle truncation to a partial integer mode here
5980 because we don't know the real bitsize of the partial
5982 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
5985 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
5987 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)),
5988 GET_MODE_MASK (mode
), false));
5990 /* We can truncate a constant value and return it. */
5993 if (poly_int_rtx_p (XEXP (x
, 0), &c
))
5994 return gen_int_mode (c
, mode
);
5997 /* Similarly to what we do in simplify-rtx.cc, a truncate of a register
5998 whose value is a comparison can be replaced with a subreg if
5999 STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. */
6000 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
6001 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0
6002 && (temp
= get_last_value (XEXP (x
, 0)))
6003 && COMPARISON_P (temp
)
6004 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
6005 return gen_lowpart (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
6009 /* (const (const X)) can become (const X). Do it this way rather than
6010 returning the inner CONST since CONST can be shared with a
6012 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == CONST
)
6013 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0));
6017 /* Convert (lo_sum (high FOO) FOO) to FOO. This is necessary so we
6018 can add in an offset. find_split_point will split this address up
6019 again if it doesn't match. */
6020 if (HAVE_lo_sum
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == HIGH
6021 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), XEXP (x
, 1)))
6026 /* (plus (xor (and <foo> (const_int pow2 - 1)) <c>) <-c>)
6027 when c is (const_int (pow2 + 1) / 2) is a sign extension of a
6028 bit-field and can be replaced by either a sign_extend or a
6029 sign_extract. The `and' may be a zero_extend and the two
6030 <c>, -<c> constants may be reversed. */
6031 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == XOR
6032 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
6033 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
6034 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
6035 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) == -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
6036 && ((i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)))) >= 0
6037 || (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)))) >= 0)
6038 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6039 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == AND
6040 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1))
6041 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 1))
6042 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (i
+ 1)) - 1))
6043 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
6044 && known_eq ((GET_MODE_PRECISION
6045 (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0)))),
6046 (unsigned int) i
+ 1))))
6047 return simplify_shift_const
6048 (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFTRT
, int_mode
,
6049 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, int_mode
,
6050 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), 0),
6051 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - (i
+ 1)),
6052 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - (i
+ 1));
6054 /* If only the low-order bit of X is possibly nonzero, (plus x -1)
6055 can become (ashiftrt (ashift (xor x 1) C) C) where C is
6056 the bitsize of the mode - 1. This allows simplification of
6057 "a = (b & 8) == 0;" */
6058 if (XEXP (x
, 1) == constm1_rtx
6059 && !REG_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
6060 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
6061 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))))
6062 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
6063 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), int_mode
) == 1)
6064 return simplify_shift_const
6065 (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFTRT
, int_mode
,
6066 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, int_mode
,
6067 gen_rtx_XOR (int_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
6069 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1),
6070 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1);
6072 /* If we are adding two things that have no bits in common, convert
6073 the addition into an IOR. This will often be further simplified,
6074 for example in cases like ((a & 1) + (a & 2)), which can
6077 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
6078 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
)
6079 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 1), mode
)) == 0)
6081 /* Try to simplify the expression further. */
6082 rtx tor
= simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
6083 temp
= combine_simplify_rtx (tor
, VOIDmode
, in_dest
, false);
6085 /* If we could, great. If not, do not go ahead with the IOR
6086 replacement, since PLUS appears in many special purpose
6087 address arithmetic instructions. */
6088 if (GET_CODE (temp
) != CLOBBER
6089 && (GET_CODE (temp
) != IOR
6090 || ((XEXP (temp
, 0) != XEXP (x
, 0)
6091 || XEXP (temp
, 1) != XEXP (x
, 1))
6092 && (XEXP (temp
, 0) != XEXP (x
, 1)
6093 || XEXP (temp
, 1) != XEXP (x
, 0)))))
6097 /* Canonicalize x + x into x << 1. */
6098 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
6099 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1))
6100 && !side_effects_p (XEXP (x
, 0)))
6101 return simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), const1_rtx
);
6106 /* (minus <foo> (and <foo> (const_int -pow2))) becomes
6107 (and <foo> (const_int pow2-1)) */
6108 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
6109 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == AND
6110 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1))
6111 && pow2p_hwi (-UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1)))
6112 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0), XEXP (x
, 0)))
6113 return simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, int_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
6114 -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1)) - 1);
6118 /* If we have (mult (plus A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
6119 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. This
6120 occurs mostly in addresses, often when unrolling loops. */
6122 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
)
6124 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 0);
6129 /* Try simplify a*(b/c) as (a*b)/c. */
6130 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
) && flag_associative_math
6131 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == DIV
)
6133 rtx tem
= simplify_binary_operation (MULT
, mode
,
6134 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
6137 return simplify_gen_binary (DIV
, mode
, tem
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
6142 /* If this is a divide by a power of two, treat it as a shift if
6143 its first operand is a shift. */
6144 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
6145 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
6146 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)))) >= 0
6147 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFT
6148 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6149 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
6150 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ROTATE
6151 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ROTATERT
))
6152 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, int_mode
,
6157 case GT
: case GTU
: case GE
: case GEU
:
6158 case LT
: case LTU
: case LE
: case LEU
:
6159 case UNEQ
: case LTGT
:
6160 case UNGT
: case UNGE
:
6161 case UNLT
: case UNLE
:
6162 case UNORDERED
: case ORDERED
:
6163 /* If the first operand is a condition code, we can't do anything
6165 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == COMPARE
6166 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))) != MODE_CC
)
6168 rtx op0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
6169 rtx op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6170 enum rtx_code new_code
;
6172 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == COMPARE
)
6173 op1
= XEXP (op0
, 1), op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
6175 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6176 new_code
= simplify_comparison (code
, &op0
, &op1
);
6178 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1, we can convert (ne x 0) to simply X
6179 if only the low-order bit is possibly nonzero in X (such as when
6180 X is a ZERO_EXTRACT of one bit). Similarly, we can convert EQ to
6181 (xor X 1) or (minus 1 X); we use the former. Finally, if X is
6182 known to be either 0 or -1, NE becomes a NEG and EQ becomes
6185 Remove any ZERO_EXTRACT we made when thinking this was a
6186 comparison. It may now be simpler to use, e.g., an AND. If a
6187 ZERO_EXTRACT is indeed appropriate, it will be placed back by
6188 the call to make_compound_operation in the SET case.
6190 Don't apply these optimizations if the caller would
6191 prefer a comparison rather than a value.
6192 E.g., for the condition in an IF_THEN_ELSE most targets need
6193 an explicit comparison. */
6198 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6200 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6201 && op1
== const0_rtx
6202 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6203 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6204 return gen_lowpart (int_mode
,
6205 expand_compound_operation (op0
));
6207 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6209 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6210 && op1
== const0_rtx
6211 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6212 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6213 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6215 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6216 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, int_mode
,
6217 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6221 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6223 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6224 && op1
== const0_rtx
6225 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6226 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6228 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6229 return simplify_gen_binary (XOR
, int_mode
,
6230 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6234 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1
6236 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6237 && op1
== const0_rtx
6238 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6239 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6240 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6242 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6243 return plus_constant (int_mode
, gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
), 1);
6246 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, we have cases similar to
6251 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6253 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6254 && op1
== const0_rtx
6255 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6256 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6257 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6258 return gen_lowpart (int_mode
, expand_compound_operation (op0
));
6260 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6262 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6263 && op1
== const0_rtx
6264 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6265 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6267 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6268 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, int_mode
,
6269 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6273 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6275 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6276 && op1
== const0_rtx
6277 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6278 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
)
6279 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)))
6281 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6282 return simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, int_mode
,
6283 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
),
6287 /* If X is 0/1, (eq X 0) is X-1. */
6288 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
6290 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6291 && op1
== const0_rtx
6292 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6293 && nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
) == 1)
6295 op0
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
6296 return plus_constant (int_mode
, gen_lowpart (int_mode
, op0
), -1);
6299 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE says to just test the sign bit and X has just
6300 one bit that might be nonzero, we can convert (ne x 0) to
6301 (ashift x c) where C puts the bit in the sign bit. Remove any
6302 AND with STORE_FLAG_VALUE when we are done, since we are only
6303 going to test the sign bit. */
6305 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6306 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6307 && val_signbit_p (int_mode
, STORE_FLAG_VALUE
)
6308 && op1
== const0_rtx
6309 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (op0
)
6310 && (i
= exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
))) >= 0)
6312 x
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, int_mode
,
6313 expand_compound_operation (op0
),
6314 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 - i
);
6315 if (GET_CODE (x
) == AND
&& XEXP (x
, 1) == const_true_rtx
)
6321 /* If the code changed, return a whole new comparison.
6322 We also need to avoid using SUBST in cases where
6323 simplify_comparison has widened a comparison with a CONST_INT,
6324 since in that case the wider CONST_INT may fail the sanity
6325 checks in do_SUBST. */
6326 if (new_code
!= code
6327 || (CONST_INT_P (op1
)
6328 && GET_MODE (op0
) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))
6329 && GET_MODE (op0
) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1))))
6330 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code
, mode
, op0
, op1
);
6332 /* Otherwise, keep this operation, but maybe change its operands.
6333 This also converts (ne (compare FOO BAR) 0) to (ne FOO BAR). */
6334 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), op0
);
6335 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), op1
);
6340 return simplify_if_then_else (x
);
6346 /* If we are processing SET_DEST, we are done. */
6350 return expand_compound_operation (x
);
6353 return simplify_set (x
);
6357 return simplify_logical (x
);
6364 /* If this is a shift by a constant amount, simplify it. */
6365 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
6366 return simplify_shift_const (x
, code
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
6367 INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)));
6369 else if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
&& !REG_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
6371 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1)),
6373 << exact_log2 (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE
6374 (GET_MODE (x
)))) - 1, false));
6378 rtx trueop0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
6379 mode
= GET_MODE (trueop0
);
6380 rtx trueop1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6381 /* If we select a low-part subreg, return that. */
6382 if (vec_series_lowpart_p (GET_MODE (x
), mode
, trueop1
))
6384 rtx new_rtx
= lowpart_subreg (GET_MODE (x
), trueop0
, mode
);
6385 if (new_rtx
!= NULL_RTX
)
6397 /* Simplify X, an IF_THEN_ELSE expression. Return the new expression. */
6400 simplify_if_then_else (rtx x
)
6402 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
6403 rtx cond
= XEXP (x
, 0);
6404 rtx true_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6405 rtx false_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 2);
6406 enum rtx_code true_code
= GET_CODE (cond
);
6407 bool comparison_p
= COMPARISON_P (cond
);
6410 enum rtx_code false_code
;
6412 scalar_int_mode int_mode
, inner_mode
;
6414 /* Simplify storing of the truth value. */
6415 if (comparison_p
&& true_rtx
== const_true_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const0_rtx
)
6416 return simplify_gen_relational (true_code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
6417 XEXP (cond
, 0), XEXP (cond
, 1));
6419 /* Also when the truth value has to be reversed. */
6421 && true_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& false_rtx
== const_true_rtx
6422 && (reversed
= reversed_comparison (cond
, mode
)))
6425 /* Sometimes we can simplify the arm of an IF_THEN_ELSE if a register used
6426 in it is being compared against certain values. Get the true and false
6427 comparisons and see if that says anything about the value of each arm. */
6430 && ((false_code
= reversed_comparison_code (cond
, NULL
))
6432 && REG_P (XEXP (cond
, 0)))
6435 rtx from
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
6436 rtx true_val
= XEXP (cond
, 1);
6437 rtx false_val
= true_val
;
6438 bool swapped
= false;
6440 /* If FALSE_CODE is EQ, swap the codes and arms. */
6442 if (false_code
== EQ
)
6444 swapped
= true, true_code
= EQ
, false_code
= NE
;
6445 std::swap (true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6448 scalar_int_mode from_mode
;
6449 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (from
), &from_mode
))
6451 /* If we are comparing against zero and the expression being
6452 tested has only a single bit that might be nonzero, that is
6453 its value when it is not equal to zero. Similarly if it is
6454 known to be -1 or 0. */
6456 && true_val
== const0_rtx
6457 && pow2p_hwi (nzb
= nonzero_bits (from
, from_mode
)))
6460 false_val
= gen_int_mode (nzb
, from_mode
);
6462 else if (true_code
== EQ
6463 && true_val
== const0_rtx
6464 && (num_sign_bit_copies (from
, from_mode
)
6465 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
)))
6468 false_val
= constm1_rtx
;
6472 /* Now simplify an arm if we know the value of the register in the
6473 branch and it is used in the arm. Be careful due to the potential
6474 of locally-shared RTL. */
6476 if (reg_mentioned_p (from
, true_rtx
))
6477 true_rtx
= subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (true_rtx
), true_code
,
6479 pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, false, false, false);
6480 if (reg_mentioned_p (from
, false_rtx
))
6481 false_rtx
= subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (false_rtx
), false_code
,
6483 pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, false, false, false);
6485 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), swapped
? false_rtx
: true_rtx
);
6486 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 2), swapped
? true_rtx
: false_rtx
);
6488 true_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 1);
6489 false_rtx
= XEXP (x
, 2);
6490 true_code
= GET_CODE (cond
);
6493 /* If we have (if_then_else FOO (pc) (label_ref BAR)) and FOO can be
6494 reversed, do so to avoid needing two sets of patterns for
6495 subtract-and-branch insns. Similarly if we have a constant in the true
6496 arm, the false arm is the same as the first operand of the comparison, or
6497 the false arm is more complicated than the true arm. */
6500 && reversed_comparison_code (cond
, NULL
) != UNKNOWN
6501 && (true_rtx
== pc_rtx
6502 || (CONSTANT_P (true_rtx
)
6503 && !CONST_INT_P (false_rtx
) && false_rtx
!= pc_rtx
)
6504 || true_rtx
== const0_rtx
6505 || (OBJECT_P (true_rtx
) && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx
))
6506 || (GET_CODE (true_rtx
) == SUBREG
&& OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (true_rtx
))
6507 && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx
))
6508 || reg_mentioned_p (true_rtx
, false_rtx
)
6509 || rtx_equal_p (false_rtx
, XEXP (cond
, 0))))
6511 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), reversed_comparison (cond
, GET_MODE (cond
)));
6512 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), false_rtx
);
6513 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 2), true_rtx
);
6515 std::swap (true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6518 /* It is possible that the conditional has been simplified out. */
6519 true_code
= GET_CODE (cond
);
6520 comparison_p
= COMPARISON_P (cond
);
6523 /* If the two arms are identical, we don't need the comparison. */
6525 if (rtx_equal_p (true_rtx
, false_rtx
) && ! side_effects_p (cond
))
6528 /* Convert a == b ? b : a to "a". */
6529 if (true_code
== EQ
&& ! side_effects_p (cond
)
6530 && !HONOR_NANS (mode
)
6531 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 0), false_rtx
)
6532 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 1), true_rtx
))
6534 else if (true_code
== NE
&& ! side_effects_p (cond
)
6535 && !HONOR_NANS (mode
)
6536 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 0), true_rtx
)
6537 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 1), false_rtx
))
6540 /* Look for cases where we have (abs x) or (neg (abs X)). */
6542 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
6544 && XEXP (cond
, 1) == const0_rtx
6545 && GET_CODE (false_rtx
) == NEG
6546 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx
, XEXP (false_rtx
, 0))
6547 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx
, XEXP (cond
, 0))
6548 && ! side_effects_p (true_rtx
))
6553 return simplify_gen_unary (ABS
, mode
, true_rtx
, mode
);
6557 simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
6558 simplify_gen_unary (ABS
, mode
, true_rtx
, mode
),
6564 /* Look for MIN or MAX. */
6566 if ((! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
)
6567 || (flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
6568 && !HONOR_NANS (mode
)
6569 && !HONOR_SIGNED_ZEROS (mode
)))
6571 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 0), true_rtx
)
6572 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond
, 1), false_rtx
)
6573 && ! side_effects_p (cond
))
6578 return simplify_gen_binary (SMAX
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6581 return simplify_gen_binary (SMIN
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6584 return simplify_gen_binary (UMAX
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6587 return simplify_gen_binary (UMIN
, mode
, true_rtx
, false_rtx
);
6592 /* If we have (if_then_else COND (OP Z C1) Z) and OP is an identity when its
6593 second operand is zero, this can be done as (OP Z (mult COND C2)) where
6594 C2 = C1 * STORE_FLAG_VALUE. Similarly if OP has an outer ZERO_EXTEND or
6595 SIGN_EXTEND as long as Z is already extended (so we don't destroy it).
6596 We can do this kind of thing in some cases when STORE_FLAG_VALUE is
6597 neither 1 or -1, but it isn't worth checking for. */
6599 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
6601 && is_int_mode (mode
, &int_mode
)
6602 && ! side_effects_p (x
))
6604 rtx t
= make_compound_operation (true_rtx
, SET
);
6605 rtx f
= make_compound_operation (false_rtx
, SET
);
6606 rtx cond_op0
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
6607 rtx cond_op1
= XEXP (cond
, 1);
6608 enum rtx_code op
= UNKNOWN
, extend_op
= UNKNOWN
;
6609 scalar_int_mode m
= int_mode
;
6610 rtx z
= 0, c1
= NULL_RTX
;
6612 if ((GET_CODE (t
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (t
) == MINUS
6613 || GET_CODE (t
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (t
) == XOR
6614 || GET_CODE (t
) == ASHIFT
6615 || GET_CODE (t
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (t
) == ASHIFTRT
)
6616 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t
, 0), f
))
6617 c1
= XEXP (t
, 1), op
= GET_CODE (t
), z
= f
;
6619 /* If an identity-zero op is commutative, check whether there
6620 would be a match if we swapped the operands. */
6621 else if ((GET_CODE (t
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (t
) == IOR
6622 || GET_CODE (t
) == XOR
)
6623 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t
, 1), f
))
6624 c1
= XEXP (t
, 0), op
= GET_CODE (t
), z
= f
;
6625 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == SIGN_EXTEND
6626 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0)), &inner_mode
)
6627 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6628 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == MINUS
6629 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6630 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
6631 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFT
6632 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6633 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
)
6634 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6635 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0))
6636 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)), f
)
6637 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6639 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)
6640 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
))))
6642 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6643 extend_op
= SIGN_EXTEND
;
6646 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == SIGN_EXTEND
6647 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0)), &inner_mode
)
6648 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6649 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6650 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
)
6651 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6652 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1))
6653 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)), f
)
6654 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6656 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)
6657 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
))))
6659 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6660 extend_op
= SIGN_EXTEND
;
6663 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == ZERO_EXTEND
6664 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0)), &inner_mode
)
6665 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6666 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == MINUS
6667 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6668 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
6669 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFT
6670 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6671 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
)
6672 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6673 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6674 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0))
6675 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0)), f
)
6676 && ((nonzero_bits (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6677 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
))
6680 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6681 extend_op
= ZERO_EXTEND
;
6684 else if (GET_CODE (t
) == ZERO_EXTEND
6685 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (t
, 0)), &inner_mode
)
6686 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == PLUS
6687 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == IOR
6688 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0)) == XOR
)
6689 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6690 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
6691 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1))
6692 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 1)), f
)
6693 && ((nonzero_bits (f
, GET_MODE (f
))
6694 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
))
6697 c1
= XEXP (XEXP (t
, 0), 0); z
= f
; op
= GET_CODE (XEXP (t
, 0));
6698 extend_op
= ZERO_EXTEND
;
6704 machine_mode cm
= m
;
6705 if ((op
== ASHIFT
|| op
== LSHIFTRT
|| op
== ASHIFTRT
)
6706 && GET_MODE (c1
) != VOIDmode
)
6708 temp
= subst (simplify_gen_relational (true_code
, cm
, VOIDmode
,
6709 cond_op0
, cond_op1
),
6710 pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, false, false, false);
6711 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, cm
, temp
,
6712 simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, cm
, c1
,
6714 temp
= subst (temp
, pc_rtx
, pc_rtx
, false, false, false);
6715 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (op
, m
, gen_lowpart (m
, z
), temp
);
6717 if (extend_op
!= UNKNOWN
)
6718 temp
= simplify_gen_unary (extend_op
, int_mode
, temp
, m
);
6724 /* If we have (if_then_else (ne A 0) C1 0) and either A is known to be 0 or
6725 1 and C1 is a single bit or A is known to be 0 or -1 and C1 is the
6726 negation of a single bit, we can convert this operation to a shift. We
6727 can actually do this more generally, but it doesn't seem worth it. */
6730 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
6731 && XEXP (cond
, 1) == const0_rtx
6732 && false_rtx
== const0_rtx
6733 && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx
)
6734 && ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond
, 0), int_mode
) == 1
6735 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx
))) >= 0)
6736 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (cond
, 0), int_mode
)
6737 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
))
6738 && (i
= exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (true_rtx
))) >= 0)))
6740 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, int_mode
,
6741 gen_lowpart (int_mode
, XEXP (cond
, 0)), i
);
6743 /* (IF_THEN_ELSE (NE A 0) C1 0) is A or a zero-extend of A if the only
6744 non-zero bit in A is C1. */
6745 if (true_code
== NE
&& XEXP (cond
, 1) == const0_rtx
6746 && false_rtx
== const0_rtx
&& CONST_INT_P (true_rtx
)
6747 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
6748 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (cond
, 0)), &inner_mode
)
6749 && (UINTVAL (true_rtx
) & GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))
6750 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond
, 0), inner_mode
)
6751 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx
) & GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))) >= 0)
6753 rtx val
= XEXP (cond
, 0);
6754 if (inner_mode
== int_mode
)
6756 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
))
6757 return simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, int_mode
, val
, inner_mode
);
6763 /* Simplify X, a SET expression. Return the new expression. */
6766 simplify_set (rtx x
)
6768 rtx src
= SET_SRC (x
);
6769 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
6771 = GET_MODE (src
) != VOIDmode
? GET_MODE (src
) : GET_MODE (dest
);
6772 rtx_insn
*other_insn
;
6774 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
6776 /* (set (pc) (return)) gets written as (return). */
6777 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == PC
&& ANY_RETURN_P (src
))
6780 /* Now that we know for sure which bits of SRC we are using, see if we can
6781 simplify the expression for the object knowing that we only need the
6784 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
&& HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
6786 src
= force_to_mode (src
, mode
, HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
, false);
6787 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), src
);
6790 /* If the source is a COMPARE, look for the use of the comparison result
6791 and try to simplify it unless we already have used undobuf.other_insn. */
6792 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_CC
|| GET_CODE (src
) == COMPARE
)
6793 && (cc_use
= find_single_use (dest
, subst_insn
, &other_insn
)) != 0
6794 && (undobuf
.other_insn
== 0 || other_insn
== undobuf
.other_insn
)
6795 && COMPARISON_P (*cc_use
)
6796 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (*cc_use
, 0), dest
))
6798 enum rtx_code old_code
= GET_CODE (*cc_use
);
6799 enum rtx_code new_code
;
6801 bool other_changed
= false;
6802 rtx inner_compare
= NULL_RTX
;
6803 machine_mode compare_mode
= GET_MODE (dest
);
6805 if (GET_CODE (src
) == COMPARE
)
6807 op0
= XEXP (src
, 0), op1
= XEXP (src
, 1);
6808 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == COMPARE
&& op1
== const0_rtx
)
6810 inner_compare
= op0
;
6811 op0
= XEXP (inner_compare
, 0), op1
= XEXP (inner_compare
, 1);
6815 op0
= src
, op1
= CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (src
));
6817 tmp
= simplify_relational_operation (old_code
, compare_mode
, VOIDmode
,
6820 new_code
= old_code
;
6821 else if (!CONSTANT_P (tmp
))
6823 new_code
= GET_CODE (tmp
);
6824 op0
= XEXP (tmp
, 0);
6825 op1
= XEXP (tmp
, 1);
6829 rtx pat
= PATTERN (other_insn
);
6830 undobuf
.other_insn
= other_insn
;
6831 SUBST (*cc_use
, tmp
);
6833 /* Attempt to simplify CC user. */
6834 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
6836 rtx new_rtx
= simplify_rtx (SET_SRC (pat
));
6837 if (new_rtx
!= NULL_RTX
)
6838 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat
), new_rtx
);
6841 /* Convert X into a no-op move. */
6842 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
), pc_rtx
);
6843 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), pc_rtx
);
6847 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6848 new_code
= simplify_comparison (new_code
, &op0
, &op1
);
6850 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
6851 /* If this machine has CC modes other than CCmode, check to see if we
6852 need to use a different CC mode here. */
6853 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_CC
)
6854 compare_mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
6855 else if (inner_compare
6856 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner_compare
)) == MODE_CC
6857 && new_code
== old_code
6858 && op0
== XEXP (inner_compare
, 0)
6859 && op1
== XEXP (inner_compare
, 1))
6860 compare_mode
= GET_MODE (inner_compare
);
6862 compare_mode
= SELECT_CC_MODE (new_code
, op0
, op1
);
6864 /* If the mode changed, we have to change SET_DEST, the mode in the
6865 compare, and the mode in the place SET_DEST is used. If SET_DEST is
6866 a hard register, just build new versions with the proper mode. If it
6867 is a pseudo, we lose unless it is only time we set the pseudo, in
6868 which case we can safely change its mode. */
6869 if (compare_mode
!= GET_MODE (dest
))
6871 if (can_change_dest_mode (dest
, 0, compare_mode
))
6873 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (dest
);
6876 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
6877 new_dest
= gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode
, regno
);
6880 subst_mode (regno
, compare_mode
);
6881 new_dest
= regno_reg_rtx
[regno
];
6884 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
), new_dest
);
6885 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use
, 0), new_dest
);
6886 other_changed
= true;
6891 #endif /* SELECT_CC_MODE */
6893 /* If the code changed, we have to build a new comparison in
6894 undobuf.other_insn. */
6895 if (new_code
!= old_code
)
6897 bool other_changed_previously
= other_changed
;
6898 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
6899 rtx old_cc_use
= *cc_use
;
6901 SUBST (*cc_use
, gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code
, GET_MODE (*cc_use
),
6903 other_changed
= true;
6905 /* If the only change we made was to change an EQ into an NE or
6906 vice versa, OP0 has only one bit that might be nonzero, and OP1
6907 is zero, check if changing the user of the condition code will
6908 produce a valid insn. If it won't, we can keep the original code
6909 in that insn by surrounding our operation with an XOR. */
6911 if (((old_code
== NE
&& new_code
== EQ
)
6912 || (old_code
== EQ
&& new_code
== NE
))
6913 && ! other_changed_previously
&& op1
== const0_rtx
6914 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
))
6915 && pow2p_hwi (mask
= nonzero_bits (op0
, GET_MODE (op0
))))
6917 rtx pat
= PATTERN (other_insn
), note
= 0;
6919 if ((recog_for_combine (&pat
, other_insn
, ¬e
) < 0
6920 && ! check_asm_operands (pat
)))
6922 *cc_use
= old_cc_use
;
6923 other_changed
= false;
6925 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (XOR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
6933 undobuf
.other_insn
= other_insn
;
6935 /* Don't generate a compare of a CC with 0, just use that CC. */
6936 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == compare_mode
&& op1
== const0_rtx
)
6938 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), op0
);
6941 /* Otherwise, if we didn't previously have the same COMPARE we
6942 want, create it from scratch. */
6943 else if (GET_CODE (src
) != COMPARE
|| GET_MODE (src
) != compare_mode
6944 || XEXP (src
, 0) != op0
|| XEXP (src
, 1) != op1
)
6946 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode
, op0
, op1
));
6952 /* Get SET_SRC in a form where we have placed back any
6953 compound expressions. Then do the checks below. */
6954 src
= make_compound_operation (src
, SET
);
6955 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), src
);
6958 /* If we have (set x (subreg:m1 (op:m2 ...) 0)) with OP being some operation,
6959 and X being a REG or (subreg (reg)), we may be able to convert this to
6960 (set (subreg:m2 x) (op)).
6962 We can always do this if M1 is narrower than M2 because that means that
6963 we only care about the low bits of the result.
6965 However, on machines without WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS defined, we cannot
6966 perform a narrower operation than requested since the high-order bits will
6967 be undefined. On machine where it is defined, this transformation is safe
6968 as long as M1 and M2 have the same number of words. */
6970 if (GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (src
)
6971 && !OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (src
))
6972 && (known_equal_after_align_up
6973 (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
)),
6974 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
))),
6976 && (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
|| !paradoxical_subreg_p (src
))
6977 && ! (REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6978 && !REG_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (dest
),
6979 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)),
6982 || (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
6983 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (dest
)))))
6985 SUBST (SET_DEST (x
),
6986 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)),
6988 SUBST (SET_SRC (x
), SUBREG_REG (src
));
6990 src
= SET_SRC (x
), dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
6993 /* If we have (set FOO (subreg:M (mem:N BAR) 0)) with M wider than N, this
6994 would require a paradoxical subreg. Replace the subreg with a
6995 zero_extend to avoid the reload that would otherwise be required.
6996 Don't do this unless we have a scalar integer mode, otherwise the
6997 transformation is incorrect. */
6999 enum rtx_code extend_op
;
7000 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (src
)
7001 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (src
))
7002 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (src
))
7003 && (extend_op
= load_extend_op (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)))) != UNKNOWN
)
7006 gen_rtx_fmt_e (extend_op
, GET_MODE (src
), SUBREG_REG (src
)));
7011 /* If we don't have a conditional move, SET_SRC is an IF_THEN_ELSE, and we
7012 are comparing an item known to be 0 or -1 against 0, use a logical
7013 operation instead. Check for one of the arms being an IOR of the other
7014 arm with some value. We compute three terms to be IOR'ed together. In
7015 practice, at most two will be nonzero. Then we do the IOR's. */
7017 if (GET_CODE (dest
) != PC
7018 && GET_CODE (src
) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7019 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (src
), &int_mode
)
7020 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == EQ
|| GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == NE
)
7021 && XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 1) == const0_rtx
7022 && int_mode
== GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0))
7023 && (!HAVE_conditional_move
7024 || ! can_conditionally_move_p (int_mode
))
7025 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0), int_mode
)
7026 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
))
7027 && ! side_effects_p (src
))
7029 rtx true_rtx
= (GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == NE
7030 ? XEXP (src
, 1) : XEXP (src
, 2));
7031 rtx false_rtx
= (GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == NE
7032 ? XEXP (src
, 2) : XEXP (src
, 1));
7033 rtx term1
= const0_rtx
, term2
, term3
;
7035 if (GET_CODE (true_rtx
) == IOR
7036 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx
, 0), false_rtx
))
7037 term1
= false_rtx
, true_rtx
= XEXP (true_rtx
, 1), false_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
7038 else if (GET_CODE (true_rtx
) == IOR
7039 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx
, 1), false_rtx
))
7040 term1
= false_rtx
, true_rtx
= XEXP (true_rtx
, 0), false_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
7041 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx
) == IOR
7042 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx
, 0), true_rtx
))
7043 term1
= true_rtx
, false_rtx
= XEXP (false_rtx
, 1), true_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
7044 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx
) == IOR
7045 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx
, 1), true_rtx
))
7046 term1
= true_rtx
, false_rtx
= XEXP (false_rtx
, 0), true_rtx
= const0_rtx
;
7048 term2
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, int_mode
,
7049 XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0), true_rtx
);
7050 term3
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, int_mode
,
7051 simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, int_mode
,
7052 XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0),
7057 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, int_mode
,
7058 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, int_mode
,
7065 /* If either SRC or DEST is a CLOBBER of (const_int 0), make this
7066 whole thing fail. */
7067 if (GET_CODE (src
) == CLOBBER
&& XEXP (src
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
7069 else if (GET_CODE (dest
) == CLOBBER
&& XEXP (dest
, 0) == const0_rtx
)
7072 /* Convert this into a field assignment operation, if possible. */
7073 return make_field_assignment (x
);
7076 /* Simplify, X, and AND, IOR, or XOR operation, and return the simplified
7080 simplify_logical (rtx x
)
7082 rtx op0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
7083 rtx op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
7084 scalar_int_mode mode
;
7086 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
7089 /* We can call simplify_and_const_int only if we don't lose
7090 any (sign) bits when converting INTVAL (op1) to
7091 "unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT". */
7092 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (x
), &mode
)
7093 && CONST_INT_P (op1
)
7094 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
7095 || INTVAL (op1
) > 0))
7097 x
= simplify_and_const_int (x
, mode
, op0
, INTVAL (op1
));
7098 if (GET_CODE (x
) != AND
)
7105 /* If we have any of (and (ior A B) C) or (and (xor A B) C),
7106 apply the distributive law and then the inverse distributive
7107 law to see if things simplify. */
7108 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == XOR
)
7110 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 0);
7114 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (op1
) == XOR
)
7116 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 1);
7123 /* If we have (ior (and A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
7124 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */
7126 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
)
7128 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 0);
7133 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == AND
)
7135 rtx result
= distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x
, 1);
7148 /* We consider ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, and SIGN_EXTEND as "compound
7149 operations" because they can be replaced with two more basic operations.
7150 ZERO_EXTEND is also considered "compound" because it can be replaced with
7151 an AND operation, which is simpler, though only one operation.
7153 The function expand_compound_operation is called with an rtx expression
7154 and will convert it to the appropriate shifts and AND operations,
7155 simplifying at each stage.
7157 The function make_compound_operation is called to convert an expression
7158 consisting of shifts and ANDs into the equivalent compound expression.
7159 It is the inverse of this function, loosely speaking. */
7162 expand_compound_operation (rtx x
)
7164 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT pos
= 0, len
;
7165 bool unsignedp
= false;
7166 unsigned int modewidth
;
7168 scalar_int_mode inner_mode
;
7170 switch (GET_CODE (x
))
7176 /* We can't necessarily use a const_int for a multiword mode;
7177 it depends on implicitly extending the value.
7178 Since we don't know the right way to extend it,
7179 we can't tell whether the implicit way is right.
7181 Even for a mode that is no wider than a const_int,
7182 we can't win, because we need to sign extend one of its bits through
7183 the rest of it, and we don't know which bit. */
7184 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7187 /* Reject modes that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7188 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7189 if (!is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), &inner_mode
))
7192 /* Return if (subreg:MODE FROM 0) is not a safe replacement for
7193 (zero_extend:MODE FROM) or (sign_extend:MODE FROM). It is for any MEM
7194 because (SUBREG (MEM...)) is guaranteed to cause the MEM to be
7195 reloaded. If not for that, MEM's would very rarely be safe.
7197 Reject modes bigger than a word, because we might not be able
7198 to reference a two-register group starting with an arbitrary register
7199 (and currently gen_lowpart might crash for a SUBREG). */
7201 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) > UNITS_PER_WORD
)
7204 len
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
);
7205 /* If the inner object has VOIDmode (the only way this can happen
7206 is if it is an ASM_OPERANDS), we can't do anything since we don't
7207 know how much masking to do. */
7219 /* If the operand is a CLOBBER, just return it. */
7220 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == CLOBBER
)
7223 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7224 || !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 2)))
7227 /* Reject modes that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7228 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7229 if (!is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), &inner_mode
))
7232 len
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
7233 pos
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 2));
7235 /* This should stay within the object being extracted, fail otherwise. */
7236 if (len
+ pos
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
))
7239 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7240 pos
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) - len
- pos
;
7248 /* We've rejected non-scalar operations by now. */
7249 scalar_int_mode mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (x
));
7251 /* Convert sign extension to zero extension, if we know that the high
7252 bit is not set, as this is easier to optimize. It will be converted
7253 back to cheaper alternative in make_extraction. */
7254 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SIGN_EXTEND
7255 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
7256 && ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), inner_mode
)
7257 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
)) >> 1))
7260 rtx temp
= gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
7261 rtx temp2
= expand_compound_operation (temp
);
7263 /* Make sure this is a profitable operation. */
7264 if (set_src_cost (x
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7265 > set_src_cost (temp2
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7267 else if (set_src_cost (x
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7268 > set_src_cost (temp
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7274 /* We can optimize some special cases of ZERO_EXTEND. */
7275 if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
)
7277 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI if we
7278 know that the last value didn't have any inappropriate bits
7280 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7281 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == mode
7282 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
7283 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), mode
)
7284 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
)) == 0)
7285 return XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
7287 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7288 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
7289 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))) == mode
7290 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
7291 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
7292 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)), mode
)
7293 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
)) == 0)
7294 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
7296 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI when foo
7297 is a comparison and STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. This is like
7298 the first case, but it works even when MODE is larger
7299 than HOST_WIDE_INT. */
7300 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7301 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == mode
7302 && COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
7303 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7304 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
)) == 0)
7305 return XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
7307 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7308 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
7309 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))) == mode
7310 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
7311 && COMPARISON_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0)))
7312 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7313 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode
)) == 0)
7314 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
7318 /* If we reach here, we want to return a pair of shifts. The inner
7319 shift is a left shift of BITSIZE - POS - LEN bits. The outer
7320 shift is a right shift of BITSIZE - LEN bits. It is arithmetic or
7321 logical depending on the value of UNSIGNEDP.
7323 If this was a ZERO_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTRACT, this pair of shifts will be
7324 converted into an AND of a shift.
7326 We must check for the case where the left shift would have a negative
7327 count. This can happen in a case like (x >> 31) & 255 on machines
7328 that can't shift by a constant. On those machines, we would first
7329 combine the shift with the AND to produce a variable-position
7330 extraction. Then the constant of 31 would be substituted in
7331 to produce such a position. */
7333 modewidth
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
7334 if (modewidth
>= pos
+ len
)
7336 tem
= gen_lowpart (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
7337 if (!tem
|| GET_CODE (tem
) == CLOBBER
)
7339 tem
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
,
7340 tem
, modewidth
- pos
- len
);
7341 tem
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, unsignedp
? LSHIFTRT
: ASHIFTRT
,
7342 mode
, tem
, modewidth
- len
);
7344 else if (unsignedp
&& len
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7346 tem
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, inner_mode
,
7348 tem
= gen_lowpart (mode
, tem
);
7349 if (!tem
|| GET_CODE (tem
) == CLOBBER
)
7351 tem
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, tem
,
7352 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1);
7355 /* Any other cases we can't handle. */
7358 /* If we couldn't do this for some reason, return the original
7360 if (GET_CODE (tem
) == CLOBBER
)
7366 /* X is a SET which contains an assignment of one object into
7367 a part of another (such as a bit-field assignment, STRICT_LOW_PART,
7368 or certain SUBREGS). If possible, convert it into a series of
7371 We half-heartedly support variable positions, but do not at all
7372 support variable lengths. */
7375 expand_field_assignment (const_rtx x
)
7378 rtx pos
; /* Always counts from low bit. */
7380 rtx mask
, cleared
, masked
;
7381 scalar_int_mode compute_mode
;
7383 /* Loop until we find something we can't simplify. */
7386 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7387 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)) == SUBREG
)
7389 rtx x0
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0);
7390 if (!GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x0
)).is_constant (&len
))
7392 inner
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0));
7393 pos
= gen_int_mode (subreg_lsb (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0)),
7396 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
7397 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1)))
7399 inner
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 0);
7400 if (!GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner
)).is_constant (&inner_len
))
7403 len
= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 1));
7404 pos
= XEXP (SET_DEST (x
), 2);
7406 /* A constant position should stay within the width of INNER. */
7407 if (CONST_INT_P (pos
) && INTVAL (pos
) + len
> inner_len
)
7410 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7412 if (CONST_INT_P (pos
))
7413 pos
= GEN_INT (inner_len
- len
- INTVAL (pos
));
7414 else if (GET_CODE (pos
) == MINUS
7415 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (pos
, 1))
7416 && INTVAL (XEXP (pos
, 1)) == inner_len
- len
)
7417 /* If position is ADJUST - X, new position is X. */
7418 pos
= XEXP (pos
, 0);
7420 pos
= simplify_gen_binary (MINUS
, GET_MODE (pos
),
7421 gen_int_mode (inner_len
- len
,
7427 /* If the destination is a subreg that overwrites the whole of the inner
7428 register, we can move the subreg to the source. */
7429 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x
)) == SUBREG
7430 /* We need SUBREGs to compute nonzero_bits properly. */
7431 && nonzero_sign_valid
7432 && !read_modify_subreg_p (SET_DEST (x
)))
7434 x
= gen_rtx_SET (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
)),
7436 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x
))),
7443 while (GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (inner
))
7444 inner
= SUBREG_REG (inner
);
7446 /* Don't attempt bitwise arithmetic on non scalar integer modes. */
7447 if (!is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (inner
), &compute_mode
))
7449 /* Don't do anything for vector or complex integral types. */
7450 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (inner
)))
7453 /* Try to find an integral mode to pun with. */
7454 if (!int_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (inner
)), 0)
7455 .exists (&compute_mode
))
7458 inner
= gen_lowpart (compute_mode
, inner
);
7461 /* Compute a mask of LEN bits, if we can do this on the host machine. */
7462 if (len
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7465 /* Don't try to compute in too wide unsupported modes. */
7466 if (!targetm
.scalar_mode_supported_p (compute_mode
))
7469 /* Now compute the equivalent expression. Make a copy of INNER
7470 for the SET_DEST in case it is a MEM into which we will substitute;
7471 we don't want shared RTL in that case. */
7472 mask
= gen_int_mode ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1,
7474 cleared
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, compute_mode
,
7475 simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, compute_mode
,
7476 simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
,
7481 masked
= simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
, compute_mode
,
7482 simplify_gen_binary (
7484 gen_lowpart (compute_mode
, SET_SRC (x
)),
7488 x
= gen_rtx_SET (copy_rtx (inner
),
7489 simplify_gen_binary (IOR
, compute_mode
,
7496 /* Return an RTX for a reference to LEN bits of INNER. If POS_RTX is nonzero,
7497 it is an RTX that represents the (variable) starting position; otherwise,
7498 POS is the (constant) starting bit position. Both are counted from the LSB.
7500 UNSIGNEDP is true for an unsigned reference and zero for a signed one.
7502 IN_DEST is true if this is a reference in the destination of a SET.
7503 This is used when a ZERO_ or SIGN_EXTRACT isn't needed. If nonzero,
7504 a STRICT_LOW_PART will be used, if zero, ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND will
7507 IN_COMPARE is true if we are in a COMPARE. This means that a
7508 ZERO_EXTRACT should be built even for bits starting at bit 0.
7510 MODE is the desired mode of the result (if IN_DEST == 0).
7512 The result is an RTX for the extraction or NULL_RTX if the target
7516 make_extraction (machine_mode mode
, rtx inner
, HOST_WIDE_INT pos
,
7517 rtx pos_rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
, bool unsignedp
,
7518 bool in_dest
, bool in_compare
)
7520 /* This mode describes the size of the storage area
7521 to fetch the overall value from. Within that, we
7522 ignore the POS lowest bits, etc. */
7523 machine_mode is_mode
= GET_MODE (inner
);
7524 machine_mode inner_mode
;
7525 scalar_int_mode wanted_inner_mode
;
7526 scalar_int_mode wanted_inner_reg_mode
= word_mode
;
7527 scalar_int_mode pos_mode
= word_mode
;
7528 machine_mode extraction_mode
= word_mode
;
7530 rtx orig_pos_rtx
= pos_rtx
;
7531 HOST_WIDE_INT orig_pos
;
7533 if (pos_rtx
&& CONST_INT_P (pos_rtx
))
7534 pos
= INTVAL (pos_rtx
), pos_rtx
= 0;
7536 if (GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
7537 && subreg_lowpart_p (inner
)
7538 && (paradoxical_subreg_p (inner
)
7539 /* If trying or potentionally trying to extract
7540 bits outside of is_mode, don't look through
7541 non-paradoxical SUBREGs. See PR82192. */
7542 || (pos_rtx
== NULL_RTX
7543 && known_le (pos
+ len
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
)))))
7545 /* If going from (subreg:SI (mem:QI ...)) to (mem:QI ...),
7546 consider just the QI as the memory to extract from.
7547 The subreg adds or removes high bits; its mode is
7548 irrelevant to the meaning of this extraction,
7549 since POS and LEN count from the lsb. */
7550 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (inner
)))
7551 is_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner
));
7552 inner
= SUBREG_REG (inner
);
7554 else if (GET_CODE (inner
) == ASHIFT
7555 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
7556 && pos_rtx
== 0 && pos
== 0
7557 && len
> UINTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)))
7559 /* We're extracting the least significant bits of an rtx
7560 (ashift X (const_int C)), where LEN > C. Extract the
7561 least significant (LEN - C) bits of X, giving an rtx
7562 whose mode is MODE, then shift it left C times. */
7563 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, XEXP (inner
, 0),
7564 0, 0, len
- INTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)),
7565 unsignedp
, in_dest
, in_compare
);
7567 return gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode
, new_rtx
, XEXP (inner
, 1));
7569 else if (GET_CODE (inner
) == MULT
7570 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
7571 && pos_rtx
== 0 && pos
== 0)
7573 /* We're extracting the least significant bits of an rtx
7574 (mult X (const_int 2^C)), where LEN > C. Extract the
7575 least significant (LEN - C) bits of X, giving an rtx
7576 whose mode is MODE, then multiply it by 2^C. */
7577 const HOST_WIDE_INT shift_amt
= exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)));
7578 if (IN_RANGE (shift_amt
, 1, len
- 1))
7580 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, XEXP (inner
, 0),
7581 0, 0, len
- shift_amt
,
7582 unsignedp
, in_dest
, in_compare
);
7584 return gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, new_rtx
, XEXP (inner
, 1));
7587 else if (GET_CODE (inner
) == TRUNCATE
7588 /* If trying or potentionally trying to extract
7589 bits outside of is_mode, don't look through
7590 TRUNCATE. See PR82192. */
7591 && pos_rtx
== NULL_RTX
7592 && known_le (pos
+ len
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
)))
7593 inner
= XEXP (inner
, 0);
7595 inner_mode
= GET_MODE (inner
);
7597 /* See if this can be done without an extraction. We never can if the
7598 width of the field is not the same as that of some integer mode. For
7599 registers, we can only avoid the extraction if the position is at the
7600 low-order bit and this is either not in the destination or we have the
7601 appropriate STRICT_LOW_PART operation available.
7603 For MEM, we can avoid an extract if the field starts on an appropriate
7604 boundary and we can change the mode of the memory reference. */
7606 scalar_int_mode tmode
;
7607 if (int_mode_for_size (len
, 1).exists (&tmode
)
7608 && ((pos_rtx
== 0 && (pos
% BITS_PER_WORD
) == 0
7610 && (pos
== 0 || REG_P (inner
))
7611 && (inner_mode
== tmode
7613 || TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (tmode
, inner_mode
)
7614 || reg_truncated_to_mode (tmode
, inner
))
7617 && have_insn_for (STRICT_LOW_PART
, tmode
))))
7618 || (MEM_P (inner
) && pos_rtx
== 0
7620 % (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
? GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
)
7621 : BITS_PER_UNIT
)) == 0
7622 /* We can't do this if we are widening INNER_MODE (it
7623 may not be aligned, for one thing). */
7624 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (tmode
, inner_mode
)
7625 && known_le (pos
+ len
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
))
7626 && (inner_mode
== tmode
7627 || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner
, 0),
7628 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner
))
7629 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner
))))))
7631 /* If INNER is a MEM, make a new MEM that encompasses just the desired
7632 field. If the original and current mode are the same, we need not
7633 adjust the offset. Otherwise, we do if bytes big endian.
7635 If INNER is not a MEM, get a piece consisting of just the field
7636 of interest (in this case POS % BITS_PER_WORD must be 0). */
7642 /* POS counts from lsb, but make OFFSET count in memory order. */
7643 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7644 offset
= bits_to_bytes_round_down (GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
)
7647 offset
= pos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
;
7649 new_rtx
= adjust_address_nv (inner
, tmode
, offset
);
7651 else if (REG_P (inner
))
7653 if (tmode
!= inner_mode
)
7655 /* We can't call gen_lowpart in a DEST since we
7656 always want a SUBREG (see below) and it would sometimes
7657 return a new hard register. */
7661 = subreg_offset_from_lsb (tmode
, inner_mode
, pos
);
7663 /* Avoid creating invalid subregs, for example when
7664 simplifying (x>>32)&255. */
7665 if (!validate_subreg (tmode
, inner_mode
, inner
, offset
))
7668 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (tmode
, inner
, offset
);
7671 new_rtx
= gen_lowpart (tmode
, inner
);
7677 new_rtx
= force_to_mode (inner
, tmode
,
7678 len
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7680 : (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1, false);
7682 /* If this extraction is going into the destination of a SET,
7683 make a STRICT_LOW_PART unless we made a MEM. */
7686 return (MEM_P (new_rtx
) ? new_rtx
7687 : (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) != SUBREG
7688 ? gen_rtx_CLOBBER (tmode
, const0_rtx
)
7689 : gen_rtx_STRICT_LOW_PART (VOIDmode
, new_rtx
)));
7694 if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx
))
7695 return simplify_unary_operation (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
,
7696 mode
, new_rtx
, tmode
);
7698 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7699 bit is not set, convert the extraction to the cheaper of
7700 sign and zero extension, that are equivalent in these cases. */
7701 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7702 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode
)
7703 && ((nonzero_bits (new_rtx
, tmode
)
7704 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)) >> 1))
7707 rtx temp
= gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode
, new_rtx
);
7708 rtx temp1
= gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (mode
, new_rtx
);
7710 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7712 if (set_src_cost (temp
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7713 <= set_src_cost (temp1
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7718 /* Otherwise, sign- or zero-extend unless we already are in the
7721 return (gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
,
7725 /* Unless this is a COMPARE or we have a funny memory reference,
7726 don't do anything with zero-extending field extracts starting at
7727 the low-order bit since they are simple AND operations. */
7728 if (pos_rtx
== 0 && pos
== 0 && ! in_dest
7729 && ! in_compare
&& unsignedp
)
7732 /* Unless INNER is not MEM, reject this if we would be spanning bytes or
7733 if the position is not a constant and the length is not 1. In all
7734 other cases, we would only be going outside our object in cases when
7735 an original shift would have been undefined. */
7737 && ((pos_rtx
== 0 && maybe_gt (pos
+ len
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode
)))
7738 || (pos_rtx
!= 0 && len
!= 1)))
7741 enum extraction_pattern pattern
= (in_dest
? EP_insv
7742 : unsignedp
? EP_extzv
: EP_extv
);
7744 /* If INNER is not from memory, we want it to have the mode of a register
7745 extraction pattern's structure operand, or word_mode if there is no
7746 such pattern. The same applies to extraction_mode and pos_mode
7747 and their respective operands.
7749 For memory, assume that the desired extraction_mode and pos_mode
7750 are the same as for a register operation, since at present we don't
7751 have named patterns for aligned memory structures. */
7752 class extraction_insn insn
;
7753 unsigned int inner_size
;
7754 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode
).is_constant (&inner_size
)
7755 && get_best_reg_extraction_insn (&insn
, pattern
, inner_size
, mode
))
7757 wanted_inner_reg_mode
= insn
.struct_mode
.require ();
7758 pos_mode
= insn
.pos_mode
;
7759 extraction_mode
= insn
.field_mode
;
7762 /* Never narrow an object, since that might not be safe. */
7764 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
7765 && partial_subreg_p (extraction_mode
, mode
))
7766 extraction_mode
= mode
;
7768 /* Punt if len is too large for extraction_mode. */
7769 if (maybe_gt (len
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (extraction_mode
)))
7773 wanted_inner_mode
= wanted_inner_reg_mode
;
7776 /* Be careful not to go beyond the extracted object and maintain the
7777 natural alignment of the memory. */
7778 wanted_inner_mode
= smallest_int_mode_for_size (len
);
7779 while (pos
% GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
) + len
7780 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
))
7781 wanted_inner_mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wanted_inner_mode
).require ();
7786 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
7788 /* POS is passed as if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0, so we need to convert it to
7789 BITS_BIG_ENDIAN style. If position is constant, compute new
7790 position. Otherwise, build subtraction.
7791 Note that POS is relative to the mode of the original argument.
7792 If it's a MEM we need to recompute POS relative to that.
7793 However, if we're extracting from (or inserting into) a register,
7794 we want to recompute POS relative to wanted_inner_mode. */
7797 width
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
);
7798 else if (!GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode
).is_constant (&width
))
7802 pos
= width
- len
- pos
;
7805 = gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
),
7806 gen_int_mode (width
- len
, GET_MODE (pos_rtx
)),
7808 /* POS may be less than 0 now, but we check for that below.
7809 Note that it can only be less than 0 if !MEM_P (inner). */
7812 /* If INNER has a wider mode, and this is a constant extraction, try to
7813 make it smaller and adjust the byte to point to the byte containing
7815 if (wanted_inner_mode
!= VOIDmode
7816 && inner_mode
!= wanted_inner_mode
7818 && partial_subreg_p (wanted_inner_mode
, is_mode
)
7820 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner
, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner
))
7821 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner
))
7823 poly_int64 offset
= 0;
7825 /* The computations below will be correct if the machine is big
7826 endian in both bits and bytes or little endian in bits and bytes.
7827 If it is mixed, we must adjust. */
7829 /* If bytes are big endian and we had a paradoxical SUBREG, we must
7830 adjust OFFSET to compensate. */
7831 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7832 && paradoxical_subreg_p (is_mode
, inner_mode
))
7833 offset
-= GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode
) - GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
);
7835 /* We can now move to the desired byte. */
7836 offset
+= (pos
/ GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
))
7837 * GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode
);
7838 pos
%= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
);
7840 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
!= BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
7841 && is_mode
!= wanted_inner_mode
)
7842 offset
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode
)
7843 - GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode
) - offset
);
7845 inner
= adjust_address_nv (inner
, wanted_inner_mode
, offset
);
7848 /* If INNER is not memory, get it into the proper mode. If we are changing
7849 its mode, POS must be a constant and smaller than the size of the new
7851 else if (!MEM_P (inner
))
7853 /* On the LHS, don't create paradoxical subregs implicitely truncating
7854 the register unless TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION. */
7856 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (GET_MODE (inner
),
7860 if (GET_MODE (inner
) != wanted_inner_mode
7862 || orig_pos
+ len
> GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode
)))
7868 inner
= force_to_mode (inner
, wanted_inner_mode
,
7870 || len
+ orig_pos
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7872 : (((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1)
7873 << orig_pos
), false);
7876 /* Adjust mode of POS_RTX, if needed. If we want a wider mode, we
7877 have to zero extend. Otherwise, we can just use a SUBREG.
7879 We dealt with constant rtxes earlier, so pos_rtx cannot
7880 have VOIDmode at this point. */
7882 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode
)
7883 > GET_MODE_SIZE (as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
)))))
7885 rtx temp
= simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, pos_mode
, pos_rtx
,
7886 GET_MODE (pos_rtx
));
7888 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7889 bit is not set, convert extraction to cheaper one - either
7890 SIGN_EXTENSION or ZERO_EXTENSION, that are equivalent in these
7892 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7893 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
))
7894 && ((nonzero_bits (pos_rtx
, GET_MODE (pos_rtx
))
7895 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)
7896 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (pos_rtx
)))
7900 rtx temp1
= simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND
, pos_mode
, pos_rtx
,
7901 GET_MODE (pos_rtx
));
7903 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7905 if (set_src_cost (temp1
, pos_mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
7906 < set_src_cost (temp
, pos_mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
7912 /* Make POS_RTX unless we already have it and it is correct. If we don't
7913 have a POS_RTX but we do have an ORIG_POS_RTX, the latter must
7915 if (pos_rtx
== 0 && orig_pos_rtx
!= 0 && INTVAL (orig_pos_rtx
) == pos
)
7916 pos_rtx
= orig_pos_rtx
;
7918 else if (pos_rtx
== 0)
7919 pos_rtx
= GEN_INT (pos
);
7921 /* Make the required operation. See if we can use existing rtx. */
7922 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_fmt_eee (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTRACT
: SIGN_EXTRACT
,
7923 extraction_mode
, inner
, GEN_INT (len
), pos_rtx
);
7925 new_rtx
= gen_lowpart (mode
, new_rtx
);
7930 /* See if X (of mode MODE) contains an ASHIFT of COUNT or more bits that
7931 can be commuted with any other operations in X. Return X without
7932 that shift if so. */
7935 extract_left_shift (scalar_int_mode mode
, rtx x
, int count
)
7937 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
7943 /* This is the shift itself. If it is wide enough, we will return
7944 either the value being shifted if the shift count is equal to
7945 COUNT or a shift for the difference. */
7946 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7947 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= count
)
7948 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
7949 INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) - count
);
7953 if ((tem
= extract_left_shift (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), count
)) != 0)
7954 return simplify_gen_unary (code
, mode
, tem
, mode
);
7958 case PLUS
: case IOR
: case XOR
: case AND
:
7959 /* If we can safely shift this constant and we find the inner shift,
7960 make a new operation. */
7961 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
7962 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
7963 & (((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< count
)) - 1)) == 0
7964 && (tem
= extract_left_shift (mode
, XEXP (x
, 0), count
)) != 0)
7966 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >> count
;
7967 return simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, tem
,
7968 gen_int_mode (val
, mode
));
7979 /* Subroutine of make_compound_operation. *X_PTR is the rtx at the current
7980 level of the expression and MODE is its mode. IN_CODE is as for
7981 make_compound_operation. *NEXT_CODE_PTR is the value of IN_CODE
7982 that should be used when recursing on operands of *X_PTR.
7984 There are two possible actions:
7986 - Return null. This tells the caller to recurse on *X_PTR with IN_CODE
7987 equal to *NEXT_CODE_PTR, after which *X_PTR holds the final value.
7989 - Return a new rtx, which the caller returns directly. */
7992 make_compound_operation_int (scalar_int_mode mode
, rtx
*x_ptr
,
7993 enum rtx_code in_code
,
7994 enum rtx_code
*next_code_ptr
)
7997 enum rtx_code next_code
= *next_code_ptr
;
7998 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
7999 int mode_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
8004 scalar_int_mode inner_mode
;
8005 bool equality_comparison
= false;
8009 equality_comparison
= true;
8013 /* Process depending on the code of this operation. If NEW is set
8014 nonzero, it will be returned. */
8019 /* Convert shifts by constants into multiplications if inside
8021 if (in_code
== MEM
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8022 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8023 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0)
8025 HOST_WIDE_INT count
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
8026 HOST_WIDE_INT multval
= HOST_WIDE_INT_1
<< count
;
8028 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), next_code
);
8029 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx
) == NEG
)
8031 new_rtx
= XEXP (new_rtx
, 0);
8034 multval
= trunc_int_for_mode (multval
, mode
);
8035 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, new_rtx
, gen_int_mode (multval
, mode
));
8042 lhs
= make_compound_operation (lhs
, next_code
);
8043 rhs
= make_compound_operation (rhs
, next_code
);
8044 if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs
, 0)) == NEG
)
8046 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (XEXP (lhs
, 0), 0),
8048 new_rtx
= simplify_gen_binary (MINUS
, mode
, rhs
, tem
);
8050 else if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == MULT
8051 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)) < 0))
8053 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (lhs
, 0),
8054 simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
8057 new_rtx
= simplify_gen_binary (MINUS
, mode
, rhs
, tem
);
8061 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), lhs
);
8062 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), rhs
);
8064 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x
);
8070 lhs
= make_compound_operation (lhs
, next_code
);
8071 rhs
= make_compound_operation (rhs
, next_code
);
8072 if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs
, 0)) == NEG
)
8074 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (XEXP (rhs
, 0), 0),
8076 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, tem
, lhs
);
8078 else if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == MULT
8079 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs
, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs
, 1)) < 0))
8081 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, XEXP (rhs
, 0),
8082 simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
8085 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, tem
, lhs
);
8089 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), lhs
);
8090 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 1), rhs
);
8095 /* If the second operand is not a constant, we can't do anything
8097 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
8100 /* If the constant is a power of two minus one and the first operand
8101 is a logical right shift, make an extraction. */
8102 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8103 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
8105 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), next_code
);
8106 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1),
8107 i
, true, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8110 /* Same as previous, but for (subreg (lshiftrt ...)) in first op. */
8111 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
8112 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
8113 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))),
8115 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))) == LSHIFTRT
8116 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
8118 rtx inner_x0
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
8119 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (inner_x0
, 0), next_code
);
8120 new_rtx
= make_extraction (inner_mode
, new_rtx
, 0,
8122 i
, true, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8124 /* If we narrowed the mode when dropping the subreg, then we lose. */
8125 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
8128 /* If that didn't give anything, see if the AND simplifies on
8130 if (!new_rtx
&& i
>= 0)
8132 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), next_code
);
8133 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, NULL_RTX
, i
,
8134 true, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8137 /* Same as previous, but for (xor/ior (lshiftrt...) (lshiftrt...)). */
8138 else if ((GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == XOR
8139 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == IOR
)
8140 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8141 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) == LSHIFTRT
8142 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
8144 /* Apply the distributive law, and then try to make extractions. */
8145 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), mode
,
8146 gen_rtx_AND (mode
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0),
8148 gen_rtx_AND (mode
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1),
8150 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (new_rtx
, in_code
);
8153 /* If we are have (and (rotate X C) M) and C is larger than the number
8154 of bits in M, this is an extraction. */
8156 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ROTATE
8157 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8158 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0
8159 && i
<= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)))
8161 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), next_code
);
8162 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
,
8163 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
8164 - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))),
8165 NULL_RTX
, i
, true, false,
8166 in_code
== COMPARE
);
8169 /* On machines without logical shifts, if the operand of the AND is
8170 a logical shift and our mask turns off all the propagated sign
8171 bits, we can replace the logical shift with an arithmetic shift. */
8172 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8173 && !have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT
, mode
)
8174 && have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT
, mode
)
8175 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8176 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) >= 0
8177 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8178 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
8180 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
8182 mask
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
8183 if ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & ~mask
) == 0)
8185 gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode
,
8186 make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x
,
8190 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)));
8193 /* If the constant is one less than a power of two, this might be
8194 representable by an extraction even if no shift is present.
8195 If it doesn't end up being a ZERO_EXTEND, we will ignore it unless
8196 we are in a COMPARE. */
8197 else if ((i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
8198 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
,
8199 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0),
8202 true, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8204 /* If we are in a comparison and this is an AND with a power of two,
8205 convert this into the appropriate bit extract. */
8206 else if (in_code
== COMPARE
8207 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)))) >= 0
8208 && (equality_comparison
|| i
< GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) - 1))
8209 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
,
8210 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0),
8212 i
, NULL_RTX
, 1, true, false, true);
8214 /* If the one operand is a paradoxical subreg of a register or memory and
8215 the constant (limited to the smaller mode) has only zero bits where
8216 the sub expression has known zero bits, this can be expressed as
8218 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
)
8222 sub
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
8223 machine_mode sub_mode
= GET_MODE (sub
);
8225 if ((REG_P (sub
) || MEM_P (sub
))
8226 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (sub_mode
).is_constant (&sub_width
)
8227 && sub_width
< mode_width
)
8229 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mode_mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (sub_mode
);
8230 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
8232 /* original AND constant with all the known zero bits set */
8233 mask
= UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) | (~nonzero_bits (sub
, sub_mode
));
8234 if ((mask
& mode_mask
) == mode_mask
)
8236 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (sub
, next_code
);
8237 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, 0, sub_width
,
8238 true, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8246 /* If the sign bit is known to be zero, replace this with an
8247 arithmetic shift. */
8248 if (have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT
, mode
)
8249 && ! have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT
, mode
)
8250 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8251 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
) & (1 << (mode_width
- 1))) == 0)
8253 new_rtx
= gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode
,
8254 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0),
8266 /* If we have (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) with C2 >= C1,
8267 this is a SIGN_EXTRACT. */
8268 if (CONST_INT_P (rhs
)
8269 && GET_CODE (lhs
) == ASHIFT
8270 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
8271 && INTVAL (rhs
) >= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
8272 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)) >= 0
8273 && INTVAL (rhs
) < mode_width
)
8275 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (lhs
, 0), next_code
);
8276 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
,
8277 INTVAL (rhs
) - INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)),
8278 NULL_RTX
, mode_width
- INTVAL (rhs
),
8279 code
== LSHIFTRT
, false,
8280 in_code
== COMPARE
);
8284 /* See if we have operations between an ASHIFTRT and an ASHIFT.
8285 If so, try to merge the shifts into a SIGN_EXTEND. We could
8286 also do this for some cases of SIGN_EXTRACT, but it doesn't
8287 seem worth the effort; the case checked for occurs on Alpha. */
8290 && ! (GET_CODE (lhs
) == SUBREG
8291 && (OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (lhs
))))
8292 && CONST_INT_P (rhs
)
8293 && INTVAL (rhs
) >= 0
8294 && INTVAL (rhs
) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8295 && INTVAL (rhs
) < mode_width
8296 && (new_rtx
= extract_left_shift (mode
, lhs
, INTVAL (rhs
))) != 0)
8297 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, make_compound_operation (new_rtx
,
8299 0, NULL_RTX
, mode_width
- INTVAL (rhs
),
8300 code
== LSHIFTRT
, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8305 /* Call ourselves recursively on the inner expression. If we are
8306 narrowing the object and it has a different RTL code from
8307 what it originally did, do this SUBREG as a force_to_mode. */
8309 rtx inner
= SUBREG_REG (x
), simplified
;
8310 enum rtx_code subreg_code
= in_code
;
8312 /* If the SUBREG is masking of a logical right shift,
8313 make an extraction. */
8314 if (GET_CODE (inner
) == LSHIFTRT
8315 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (inner
), &inner_mode
)
8316 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
)
8317 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
8318 && UINTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
)
8319 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
))
8321 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (inner
, 0), next_code
);
8322 int width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
)
8323 - INTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1));
8324 if (width
> mode_width
)
8326 new_rtx
= make_extraction (mode
, new_rtx
, 0, XEXP (inner
, 1),
8327 width
, true, false, in_code
== COMPARE
);
8331 /* If in_code is COMPARE, it isn't always safe to pass it through
8332 to the recursive make_compound_operation call. */
8333 if (subreg_code
== COMPARE
8334 && (!subreg_lowpart_p (x
)
8335 || GET_CODE (inner
) == SUBREG
8336 /* (subreg:SI (and:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 0x800000000)) 0)
8337 is (const_int 0), rather than
8338 (subreg:SI (lshiftrt:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 35)) 0).
8339 Similarly (subreg:QI (and:SI (reg:SI) (const_int 0x80)) 0)
8340 for non-equality comparisons against 0 is not equivalent
8341 to (subreg:QI (lshiftrt:SI (reg:SI) (const_int 7)) 0). */
8342 || (GET_CODE (inner
) == AND
8343 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner
, 1))
8344 && partial_subreg_p (x
)
8345 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner
, 1)))
8346 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) - 1)))
8349 tem
= make_compound_operation (inner
, subreg_code
);
8352 = simplify_subreg (mode
, tem
, GET_MODE (inner
), SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
8356 if (GET_CODE (tem
) != GET_CODE (inner
)
8357 && partial_subreg_p (x
)
8358 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
))
8361 = force_to_mode (tem
, mode
, HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
, false);
8363 /* If we have something other than a SUBREG, we might have
8364 done an expansion, so rerun ourselves. */
8365 if (GET_CODE (newer
) != SUBREG
)
8366 newer
= make_compound_operation (newer
, in_code
);
8368 /* force_to_mode can expand compounds. If it just re-expanded
8369 the compound, use gen_lowpart to convert to the desired
8371 if (rtx_equal_p (newer
, x
)
8372 /* Likewise if it re-expanded the compound only partially.
8373 This happens for SUBREG of ZERO_EXTRACT if they extract
8374 the same number of bits. */
8375 || (GET_CODE (newer
) == SUBREG
8376 && (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer
)) == LSHIFTRT
8377 || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer
)) == ASHIFTRT
)
8378 && GET_CODE (inner
) == AND
8379 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (newer
), XEXP (inner
, 0))))
8380 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x
), tem
);
8395 *x_ptr
= gen_lowpart (mode
, new_rtx
);
8396 *next_code_ptr
= next_code
;
8400 /* Look at the expression rooted at X. Look for expressions
8401 equivalent to ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, ZERO_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTEND.
8402 Form these expressions.
8404 Return the new rtx, usually just X.
8406 Also, for machines like the VAX that don't have logical shift insns,
8407 try to convert logical to arithmetic shift operations in cases where
8408 they are equivalent. This undoes the canonicalizations to logical
8409 shifts done elsewhere.
8411 We try, as much as possible, to re-use rtl expressions to save memory.
8413 IN_CODE says what kind of expression we are processing. Normally, it is
8414 SET. In a memory address it is MEM. When processing the arguments of
8415 a comparison or a COMPARE against zero, it is COMPARE, or EQ if more
8416 precisely it is an equality comparison against zero. */
8419 make_compound_operation (rtx x
, enum rtx_code in_code
)
8421 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8424 enum rtx_code next_code
;
8427 /* Select the code to be used in recursive calls. Once we are inside an
8428 address, we stay there. If we have a comparison, set to COMPARE,
8429 but once inside, go back to our default of SET. */
8431 next_code
= (code
== MEM
? MEM
8432 : ((code
== COMPARE
|| COMPARISON_P (x
))
8433 && XEXP (x
, 1) == const0_rtx
) ? COMPARE
8434 : in_code
== COMPARE
|| in_code
== EQ
? SET
: in_code
);
8436 scalar_int_mode mode
;
8437 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (x
), &mode
))
8439 rtx new_rtx
= make_compound_operation_int (mode
, &x
, in_code
,
8443 code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8446 /* Now recursively process each operand of this operation. We need to
8447 handle ZERO_EXTEND specially so that we don't lose track of the
8449 if (code
== ZERO_EXTEND
)
8451 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, 0), next_code
);
8452 tem
= simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND
, GET_MODE (x
),
8453 new_rtx
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
8456 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), new_rtx
);
8460 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
8461 for (i
= 0; i
< GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
); i
++)
8464 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XEXP (x
, i
), next_code
);
8465 SUBST (XEXP (x
, i
), new_rtx
);
8467 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
8468 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
8470 new_rtx
= make_compound_operation (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), next_code
);
8471 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), new_rtx
);
8474 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (x
);
8478 /* Given M see if it is a value that would select a field of bits
8479 within an item, but not the entire word. Return -1 if not.
8480 Otherwise, return the starting position of the field, where 0 is the
8483 *PLEN is set to the length of the field. */
8486 get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*plen
)
8488 /* Get the bit number of the first 1 bit from the right, -1 if none. */
8489 int pos
= m
? ctz_hwi (m
) : -1;
8493 /* Now shift off the low-order zero bits and see if we have a
8494 power of two minus 1. */
8495 len
= exact_log2 ((m
>> pos
) + 1);
8504 /* If X refers to a register that equals REG in value, replace these
8505 references with REG. */
8507 canon_reg_for_combine (rtx x
, rtx reg
)
8514 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8515 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
))
8518 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8519 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8520 return simplify_gen_unary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
), op0
,
8525 case RTX_COMM_ARITH
:
8526 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8527 op1
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 1), reg
);
8528 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
8529 return simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
), op0
, op1
);
8533 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE
:
8534 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8535 op1
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 1), reg
);
8536 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
8537 return simplify_gen_relational (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
),
8538 GET_MODE (op0
), op0
, op1
);
8542 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS
:
8543 op0
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
);
8544 op1
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 1), reg
);
8545 op2
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, 2), reg
);
8546 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1) || op2
!= XEXP (x
, 2))
8547 return simplify_gen_ternary (GET_CODE (x
), GET_MODE (x
),
8548 GET_MODE (op0
), op0
, op1
, op2
);
8554 if (rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (reg
), x
)
8555 || rtx_equal_p (reg
, get_last_value (x
)))
8564 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
8566 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
8569 rtx op
= canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x
, i
), reg
);
8570 if (op
!= XEXP (x
, i
))
8580 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
8583 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
8585 rtx op
= canon_reg_for_combine (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), reg
);
8586 if (op
!= XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
))
8593 XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
) = op
;
8604 /* Return X converted to MODE. If the value is already truncated to
8605 MODE we can just return a subreg even though in the general case we
8606 would need an explicit truncation. */
8609 gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode mode
, rtx x
)
8611 if (!CONST_INT_P (x
)
8612 && partial_subreg_p (mode
, GET_MODE (x
))
8613 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
, GET_MODE (x
))
8614 && !(REG_P (x
) && reg_truncated_to_mode (mode
, x
)))
8616 /* Bit-cast X into an integer mode. */
8617 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)))
8618 x
= gen_lowpart (int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (x
)).require (), x
);
8619 x
= simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE
, int_mode_for_mode (mode
).require (),
8623 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
8626 /* See if X can be simplified knowing that we will only refer to it in
8627 MODE and will only refer to those bits that are nonzero in MASK.
8628 If other bits are being computed or if masking operations are done
8629 that select a superset of the bits in MASK, they can sometimes be
8632 Return a possibly simplified expression, but always convert X to
8633 MODE. If X is a CONST_INT, AND the CONST_INT with MASK.
8635 If JUST_SELECT is true, don't optimize by noticing that bits in MASK
8636 are all off in X. This is used when X will be complemented, by either
8637 NOT, NEG, or XOR. */
8640 force_to_mode (rtx x
, machine_mode mode
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
,
8643 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8644 bool next_select
= just_select
|| code
== XOR
|| code
== NOT
|| code
== NEG
;
8645 machine_mode op_mode
;
8646 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero
;
8648 /* If this is a CALL or ASM_OPERANDS, don't do anything. Some of the
8649 code below will do the wrong thing since the mode of such an
8650 expression is VOIDmode.
8652 Also do nothing if X is a CLOBBER; this can happen if X was
8653 the return value from a call to gen_lowpart. */
8654 if (code
== CALL
|| code
== ASM_OPERANDS
|| code
== CLOBBER
)
8657 /* We want to perform the operation in its present mode unless we know
8658 that the operation is valid in MODE, in which case we do the operation
8660 op_mode
= ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
))
8661 && have_insn_for (code
, mode
))
8662 ? mode
: GET_MODE (x
));
8664 /* It is not valid to do a right-shift in a narrower mode
8665 than the one it came in with. */
8666 if ((code
== LSHIFTRT
|| code
== ASHIFTRT
)
8667 && partial_subreg_p (mode
, GET_MODE (x
)))
8668 op_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
8670 /* Truncate MASK to fit OP_MODE. */
8672 mask
&= GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode
);
8674 /* Determine what bits of X are guaranteed to be (non)zero. */
8675 nonzero
= nonzero_bits (x
, mode
);
8677 /* If none of the bits in X are needed, return a zero. */
8678 if (!just_select
&& (nonzero
& mask
) == 0 && !side_effects_p (x
))
8681 /* If X is a CONST_INT, return a new one. Do this here since the
8682 test below will fail. */
8683 if (CONST_INT_P (x
))
8685 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
))
8686 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (x
) & mask
, mode
);
8689 x
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (x
) & mask
);
8690 return gen_lowpart_common (mode
, x
);
8694 /* If X is narrower than MODE and we want all the bits in X's mode, just
8695 get X in the proper mode. */
8696 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (mode
, GET_MODE (x
))
8697 && (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
)) & ~mask
) == 0)
8698 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
8700 /* We can ignore the effect of a SUBREG if it narrows the mode or
8701 if the constant masks to zero all the bits the mode doesn't have. */
8702 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
8703 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
)
8704 && (partial_subreg_p (x
)
8706 & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x
))
8707 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)))) == 0))
8708 return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x
), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8710 scalar_int_mode int_mode
, xmode
;
8711 if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
8712 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (x
), &xmode
))
8713 /* OP_MODE is either MODE or XMODE, so it must be a scalar
8715 return force_int_to_mode (x
, int_mode
, xmode
,
8716 as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (op_mode
),
8719 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode
, x
);
8722 /* Subroutine of force_to_mode that handles cases in which both X and
8723 the result are scalar integers. MODE is the mode of the result,
8724 XMODE is the mode of X, and OP_MODE says which of MODE or XMODE
8725 is preferred for simplified versions of X. The other arguments
8726 are as for force_to_mode. */
8729 force_int_to_mode (rtx x
, scalar_int_mode mode
, scalar_int_mode xmode
,
8730 scalar_int_mode op_mode
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
,
8733 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
8734 bool next_select
= just_select
|| code
== XOR
|| code
== NOT
|| code
== NEG
;
8735 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT fuller_mask
;
8737 poly_int64 const_op0
;
8739 /* When we have an arithmetic operation, or a shift whose count we
8740 do not know, we need to assume that all bits up to the highest-order
8741 bit in MASK will be needed. This is how we form such a mask. */
8742 if (mask
& (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
- 1)))
8743 fuller_mask
= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
;
8745 fuller_mask
= ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (floor_log2 (mask
) + 1)) - 1);
8750 /* If X is a (clobber (const_int)), return it since we know we are
8751 generating something that won't match. */
8758 x
= expand_compound_operation (x
);
8759 if (GET_CODE (x
) != code
)
8760 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8764 /* Similarly for a truncate. */
8765 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8768 /* If this is an AND with a constant, convert it into an AND
8769 whose constant is the AND of that constant with MASK. If it
8770 remains an AND of MASK, delete it since it is redundant. */
8772 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)))
8774 x
= simplify_and_const_int (x
, op_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
8775 mask
& INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)));
8778 /* If X is still an AND, see if it is an AND with a mask that
8779 is just some low-order bits. If so, and it is MASK, we don't
8782 if (GET_CODE (x
) == AND
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8783 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (xmode
)) == mask
)
8786 /* If it remains an AND, try making another AND with the bits
8787 in the mode mask that aren't in MASK turned on. If the
8788 constant in the AND is wide enough, this might make a
8789 cheaper constant. */
8791 if (GET_CODE (x
) == AND
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8792 && GET_MODE_MASK (xmode
) != mask
8793 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (xmode
))
8795 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT cval
8796 = UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) | (GET_MODE_MASK (xmode
) & ~mask
);
8799 y
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, xmode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
8800 gen_int_mode (cval
, xmode
));
8801 if (set_src_cost (y
, xmode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
8802 < set_src_cost (x
, xmode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
))
8812 /* In (and (plus FOO C1) M), if M is a mask that just turns off
8813 low-order bits (as in an alignment operation) and FOO is already
8814 aligned to that boundary, mask C1 to that boundary as well.
8815 This may eliminate that PLUS and, later, the AND. */
8818 unsigned int width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
8819 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT smask
= mask
;
8821 /* If MODE is narrower than HOST_WIDE_INT and mask is a negative
8822 number, sign extend it. */
8824 if (width
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8825 && (smask
& (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (width
- 1))) != 0)
8826 smask
|= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
<< width
;
8828 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8829 && pow2p_hwi (- smask
)
8830 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
) & ~smask
) == 0
8831 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & ~smask
) != 0)
8832 return force_to_mode (plus_constant (xmode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
8833 (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & smask
)),
8834 mode
, smask
, next_select
);
8840 /* Substituting into the operands of a widening MULT is not likely to
8841 create RTL matching a machine insn. */
8843 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8844 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
8845 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8846 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND
)
8847 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0))
8848 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0)))
8849 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode
, x
);
8851 /* For PLUS, MINUS and MULT, we need any bits less significant than the
8852 most significant bit in MASK since carries from those bits will
8853 affect the bits we are interested in. */
8858 /* If X is (minus C Y) where C's least set bit is larger than any bit
8859 in the mask, then we may replace with (neg Y). */
8860 if (poly_int_rtx_p (XEXP (x
, 0), &const_op0
)
8861 && known_alignment (poly_uint64 (const_op0
)) > mask
)
8863 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, xmode
, XEXP (x
, 1), xmode
);
8864 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8867 /* Similarly, if C contains every bit in the fuller_mask, then we may
8868 replace with (not Y). */
8869 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
8870 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 0)) | fuller_mask
) == UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 0))))
8872 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, xmode
, XEXP (x
, 1), xmode
);
8873 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8881 /* If X is (ior (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2), try to commute the IOR and
8882 LSHIFTRT so we end up with an (and (lshiftrt (ior ...) ...) ...)
8883 operation which may be a bitfield extraction. Ensure that the
8884 constant we form is not wider than the mode of X. */
8886 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8887 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8888 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) >= 0
8889 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8890 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8891 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
8892 + floor_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))))
8893 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
))
8894 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
8895 & ~nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), xmode
)) == 0)
8897 temp
= gen_int_mode ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) & mask
)
8898 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)),
8900 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x
), xmode
,
8901 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), temp
);
8902 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, xmode
, temp
,
8903 XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
8904 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8908 /* For most binary operations, just propagate into the operation and
8909 change the mode if we have an operation of that mode. */
8911 op0
= force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8912 op1
= force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 1), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
8914 /* If we ended up truncating both operands, truncate the result of the
8915 operation instead. */
8916 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == TRUNCATE
8917 && GET_CODE (op1
) == TRUNCATE
)
8919 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
8920 op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0);
8923 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
, op0
);
8924 op1
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
, op1
);
8926 if (op_mode
!= xmode
|| op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
8928 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, op_mode
, op0
, op1
);
8934 /* For left shifts, do the same, but just for the first operand.
8935 However, we cannot do anything with shifts where we cannot
8936 guarantee that the counts are smaller than the size of the mode
8937 because such a count will have a different meaning in a
8940 if (! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8941 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8942 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
8943 && ! (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) != VOIDmode
8944 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 1)))
8945 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))))
8948 /* If the shift count is a constant and we can do arithmetic in
8949 the mode of the shift, refine which bits we need. Otherwise, use the
8950 conservative form of the mask. */
8951 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8952 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8953 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op_mode
)
8954 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode
))
8955 mask
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
8959 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
,
8960 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
,
8961 mask
, next_select
));
8963 if (op_mode
!= xmode
|| op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8965 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, op_mode
, op0
, XEXP (x
, 1));
8971 /* Here we can only do something if the shift count is a constant,
8972 this shift constant is valid for the host, and we can do arithmetic
8975 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
8976 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
8977 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8978 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode
))
8980 rtx inner
= XEXP (x
, 0);
8981 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_mask
;
8983 /* Select the mask of the bits we need for the shift operand. */
8984 inner_mask
= mask
<< INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
8986 /* We can only change the mode of the shift if we can do arithmetic
8987 in the mode of the shift and INNER_MASK is no wider than the
8988 width of X's mode. */
8989 if ((inner_mask
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (xmode
)) != 0)
8992 inner
= force_to_mode (inner
, op_mode
, inner_mask
, next_select
);
8994 if (xmode
!= op_mode
|| inner
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
8996 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, op_mode
, inner
, XEXP (x
, 1));
9001 /* If we have (and (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2) where the combination of the
9002 shift and AND produces only copies of the sign bit (C2 is one less
9003 than a power of two), we can do this with just a shift. */
9005 if (GET_CODE (x
) == LSHIFTRT
9006 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
9007 /* The shift puts one of the sign bit copies in the least significant
9009 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
9010 + num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0))))
9011 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
))
9012 && pow2p_hwi (mask
+ 1)
9013 /* Number of bits left after the shift must be more than the mask
9015 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) + exact_log2 (mask
+ 1))
9016 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
))
9017 /* Must be more sign bit copies than the mask needs. */
9018 && ((int) num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x
, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
9019 >= exact_log2 (mask
+ 1)))
9021 int nbits
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) - exact_log2 (mask
+ 1);
9022 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, xmode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
9023 gen_int_shift_amount (xmode
, nbits
));
9028 /* If we are just looking for the sign bit, we don't need this shift at
9029 all, even if it has a variable count. */
9030 if (val_signbit_p (xmode
, mask
))
9031 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
9033 /* If this is a shift by a constant, get a mask that contains those bits
9034 that are not copies of the sign bit. We then have two cases: If
9035 MASK only includes those bits, this can be a logical shift, which may
9036 allow simplifications. If MASK is a single-bit field not within
9037 those bits, we are requesting a copy of the sign bit and hence can
9038 shift the sign bit to the appropriate location. */
9040 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
9041 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9043 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero
;
9046 /* If the considered data is wider than HOST_WIDE_INT, we can't
9047 represent a mask for all its bits in a single scalar.
9048 But we only care about the lower bits, so calculate these. */
9050 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9052 nonzero
= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
;
9054 /* GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
9055 is the number of bits a full-width mask would have set.
9056 We need only shift if these are fewer than nonzero can
9057 hold. If not, we must keep all bits set in nonzero. */
9059 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) - INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
9060 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9061 nonzero
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
9062 + HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9063 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
);
9067 nonzero
= GET_MODE_MASK (xmode
);
9068 nonzero
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
9071 if ((mask
& ~nonzero
) == 0)
9073 x
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, xmode
,
9074 XEXP (x
, 0), INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)));
9075 if (GET_CODE (x
) != ASHIFTRT
)
9076 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
9079 else if ((i
= exact_log2 (mask
)) >= 0)
9081 x
= simplify_shift_const
9082 (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, xmode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
9083 GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) - 1 - i
);
9085 if (GET_CODE (x
) != ASHIFTRT
)
9086 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
9090 /* If MASK is 1, convert this to an LSHIFTRT. This can be done
9091 even if the shift count isn't a constant. */
9093 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, xmode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
9097 /* If this is a zero- or sign-extension operation that just affects bits
9098 we don't care about, remove it. Be sure the call above returned
9099 something that is still a shift. */
9101 if ((GET_CODE (x
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (x
) == ASHIFTRT
)
9102 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
9103 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0
9104 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1))
9105 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) - (floor_log2 (mask
) + 1))
9106 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == ASHIFT
9107 && XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1) == XEXP (x
, 1))
9108 return force_to_mode (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
9114 /* If the shift count is constant and we can do computations
9115 in the mode of X, compute where the bits we care about are.
9116 Otherwise, we can't do anything. Don't change the mode of
9117 the shift or propagate MODE into the shift, though. */
9118 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
9119 && INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) >= 0)
9121 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (code
== ROTATE
? ROTATERT
: ROTATE
,
9122 xmode
, gen_int_mode (mask
, xmode
),
9124 if (temp
&& CONST_INT_P (temp
))
9125 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, xmode
,
9126 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), xmode
,
9127 INTVAL (temp
), next_select
),
9133 /* If we just want the low-order bit, the NEG isn't needed since it
9134 won't change the low-order bit. */
9136 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, just_select
);
9138 /* We need any bits less significant than the most significant bit in
9139 MASK since carries from those bits will affect the bits we are
9145 /* (not FOO) is (xor FOO CONST), so if FOO is an LSHIFTRT, we can do the
9146 same as the XOR case above. Ensure that the constant we form is not
9147 wider than the mode of X. */
9149 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
9150 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1))
9151 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) >= 0
9152 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) + floor_log2 (mask
)
9153 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
))
9154 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9156 temp
= gen_int_mode (mask
<< INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1)), xmode
);
9157 temp
= simplify_gen_binary (XOR
, xmode
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0), temp
);
9158 x
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, xmode
,
9159 temp
, XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1));
9161 return force_to_mode (x
, mode
, mask
, next_select
);
9164 /* (and (not FOO) CONST) is (not (or FOO (not CONST))), so we must
9165 use the full mask inside the NOT. */
9169 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode
,
9170 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
,
9172 if (op_mode
!= xmode
|| op0
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
9174 x
= simplify_gen_unary (code
, op_mode
, op0
, op_mode
);
9180 /* (and (ne FOO 0) CONST) can be (and FOO CONST) if CONST is included
9181 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE and FOO has a single bit that might be nonzero,
9182 which is equal to STORE_FLAG_VALUE. */
9183 if ((mask
& ~STORE_FLAG_VALUE
) == 0
9184 && XEXP (x
, 1) == const0_rtx
9185 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == mode
9186 && pow2p_hwi (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
))
9187 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
)
9188 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) STORE_FLAG_VALUE
))
9189 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), mode
, mask
, next_select
);
9194 /* We have no way of knowing if the IF_THEN_ELSE can itself be
9195 written in a narrower mode. We play it safe and do not do so. */
9197 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (xmode
,
9198 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 1), mode
,
9199 mask
, next_select
));
9200 op1
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (xmode
,
9201 force_to_mode (XEXP (x
, 2), mode
,
9202 mask
, next_select
));
9203 if (op0
!= XEXP (x
, 1) || op1
!= XEXP (x
, 2))
9204 x
= simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE
, xmode
,
9205 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), XEXP (x
, 0),
9213 /* Ensure we return a value of the proper mode. */
9214 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode
, x
);
9217 /* Return nonzero if X is an expression that has one of two values depending on
9218 whether some other value is zero or nonzero. In that case, we return the
9219 value that is being tested, *PTRUE is set to the value if the rtx being
9220 returned has a nonzero value, and *PFALSE is set to the other alternative.
9222 If we return zero, we set *PTRUE and *PFALSE to X. */
9225 if_then_else_cond (rtx x
, rtx
*ptrue
, rtx
*pfalse
)
9227 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
9228 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9229 rtx cond0
, cond1
, true0
, true1
, false0
, false1
;
9230 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz
;
9231 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
9233 /* If we are comparing a value against zero, we are done. */
9234 if ((code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
9235 && XEXP (x
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
9237 *ptrue
= (code
== NE
) ? const_true_rtx
: const0_rtx
;
9238 *pfalse
= (code
== NE
) ? const0_rtx
: const_true_rtx
;
9242 /* If this is a unary operation whose operand has one of two values, apply
9243 our opcode to compute those values. */
9244 else if (UNARY_P (x
)
9245 && (cond0
= if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x
, 0), &true0
, &false0
)) != 0)
9247 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_unary (code
, mode
, true0
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
9248 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_unary (code
, mode
, false0
,
9249 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
9253 /* If this is a COMPARE, do nothing, since the IF_THEN_ELSE we would
9254 make can't possibly match and would suppress other optimizations. */
9255 else if (code
== COMPARE
)
9258 /* If this is a binary operation, see if either side has only one of two
9259 values. If either one does or if both do and they are conditional on
9260 the same value, compute the new true and false values. */
9261 else if (BINARY_P (x
))
9263 rtx op0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
9264 rtx op1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
9265 cond0
= if_then_else_cond (op0
, &true0
, &false0
);
9266 cond1
= if_then_else_cond (op1
, &true1
, &false1
);
9268 if ((cond0
!= 0 && cond1
!= 0 && !rtx_equal_p (cond0
, cond1
))
9269 && (REG_P (op0
) || REG_P (op1
)))
9271 /* Try to enable a simplification by undoing work done by
9272 if_then_else_cond if it converted a REG into something more
9277 true0
= false0
= op0
;
9282 true1
= false1
= op1
;
9286 if ((cond0
!= 0 || cond1
!= 0)
9287 && ! (cond0
!= 0 && cond1
!= 0 && !rtx_equal_p (cond0
, cond1
)))
9289 /* If if_then_else_cond returned zero, then true/false are the
9290 same rtl. We must copy one of them to prevent invalid rtl
9293 true0
= copy_rtx (true0
);
9294 else if (cond1
== 0)
9295 true1
= copy_rtx (true1
);
9297 if (COMPARISON_P (x
))
9299 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_relational (code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
9301 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_relational (code
, mode
, VOIDmode
,
9306 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, true0
, true1
);
9307 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, mode
, false0
, false1
);
9310 return cond0
? cond0
: cond1
;
9313 /* See if we have PLUS, IOR, XOR, MINUS or UMAX, where one of the
9314 operands is zero when the other is nonzero, and vice-versa,
9315 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or -1. */
9317 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
9318 && (code
== PLUS
|| code
== IOR
|| code
== XOR
|| code
== MINUS
9320 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == MULT
)
9322 rtx op0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
9323 rtx op1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 1);
9325 cond0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
9326 cond1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0);
9328 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0
)
9329 && COMPARISON_P (cond1
)
9330 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode
)
9331 && ((GET_CODE (cond0
) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
)
9332 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 0))
9333 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 1)))
9334 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0
))
9335 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
))
9336 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 1))
9337 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 0))))
9338 && ! side_effects_p (x
))
9340 *ptrue
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
, op0
, const_true_rtx
);
9341 *pfalse
= simplify_gen_binary (MULT
, mode
,
9343 ? simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, mode
,
9351 /* Similarly for MULT, AND and UMIN, except that for these the result
9353 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
9354 && (code
== MULT
|| code
== AND
|| code
== UMIN
)
9355 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == MULT
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 1)) == MULT
)
9357 cond0
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
9358 cond1
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 1), 0);
9360 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0
)
9361 && COMPARISON_P (cond1
)
9362 && ((GET_CODE (cond0
) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
)
9363 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 0))
9364 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 1)))
9365 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0
))
9366 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1
, NULL
))
9367 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 0), XEXP (cond1
, 1))
9368 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0
, 1), XEXP (cond1
, 0))))
9369 && ! side_effects_p (x
))
9371 *ptrue
= *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9377 else if (code
== IF_THEN_ELSE
)
9379 /* If we have IF_THEN_ELSE already, extract the condition and
9380 canonicalize it if it is NE or EQ. */
9381 cond0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
9382 *ptrue
= XEXP (x
, 1), *pfalse
= XEXP (x
, 2);
9383 if (GET_CODE (cond0
) == NE
&& XEXP (cond0
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
9384 return XEXP (cond0
, 0);
9385 else if (GET_CODE (cond0
) == EQ
&& XEXP (cond0
, 1) == const0_rtx
)
9387 *ptrue
= XEXP (x
, 2), *pfalse
= XEXP (x
, 1);
9388 return XEXP (cond0
, 0);
9394 /* If X is a SUBREG, we can narrow both the true and false values
9395 if the inner expression, if there is a condition. */
9396 else if (code
== SUBREG
9397 && (cond0
= if_then_else_cond (SUBREG_REG (x
), &true0
,
9400 true0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, true0
,
9401 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)), SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
9402 false0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, false0
,
9403 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)), SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
9404 if (true0
&& false0
)
9412 /* If X is a constant, this isn't special and will cause confusions
9413 if we treat it as such. Likewise if it is equivalent to a constant. */
9414 else if (CONSTANT_P (x
)
9415 || ((cond0
= get_last_value (x
)) != 0 && CONSTANT_P (cond0
)))
9418 /* If we're in BImode, canonicalize on 0 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE, as that
9419 will be least confusing to the rest of the compiler. */
9420 else if (mode
== BImode
)
9422 *ptrue
= GEN_INT (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
), *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9426 /* If X is known to be either 0 or -1, those are the true and
9427 false values when testing X. */
9428 else if (x
== constm1_rtx
|| x
== const0_rtx
9429 || (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
9430 && (num_sign_bit_copies (x
, int_mode
)
9431 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
))))
9433 *ptrue
= constm1_rtx
, *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9437 /* Likewise for 0 or a single bit. */
9438 else if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
9439 && pow2p_hwi (nz
= nonzero_bits (x
, mode
)))
9441 *ptrue
= gen_int_mode (nz
, mode
), *pfalse
= const0_rtx
;
9445 /* Otherwise fail; show no condition with true and false values the same. */
9446 *ptrue
= *pfalse
= x
;
9450 /* Return the value of expression X given the fact that condition COND
9451 is known to be true when applied to REG as its first operand and VAL
9452 as its second. X is known to not be shared and so can be modified in
9455 We only handle the simplest cases, and specifically those cases that
9456 arise with IF_THEN_ELSE expressions. */
9459 known_cond (rtx x
, enum rtx_code cond
, rtx reg
, rtx val
)
9461 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9465 if (side_effects_p (x
))
9468 /* If either operand of the condition is a floating point value,
9469 then we have to avoid collapsing an EQ comparison. */
9471 && rtx_equal_p (x
, reg
)
9472 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
9473 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (val
)))
9476 if (cond
== UNEQ
&& rtx_equal_p (x
, reg
))
9479 /* If X is (abs REG) and we know something about REG's relationship
9480 with zero, we may be able to simplify this. */
9482 if (code
== ABS
&& rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
) && val
== const0_rtx
)
9485 case GE
: case GT
: case EQ
:
9488 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG
, GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)),
9490 GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
9495 /* The only other cases we handle are MIN, MAX, and comparisons if the
9496 operands are the same as REG and VAL. */
9498 else if (COMPARISON_P (x
) || COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x
))
9500 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), val
))
9502 std::swap (val
, reg
);
9503 cond
= swap_condition (cond
);
9506 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 0), reg
) && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x
, 1), val
))
9508 if (COMPARISON_P (x
))
9510 if (comparison_dominates_p (cond
, code
))
9511 return VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
)) ? x
: const_true_rtx
;
9513 code
= reversed_comparison_code (x
, NULL
);
9515 && comparison_dominates_p (cond
, code
))
9516 return CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x
));
9520 else if (code
== SMAX
|| code
== SMIN
9521 || code
== UMIN
|| code
== UMAX
)
9523 int unsignedp
= (code
== UMIN
|| code
== UMAX
);
9525 /* Do not reverse the condition when it is NE or EQ.
9526 This is because we cannot conclude anything about
9527 the value of 'SMAX (x, y)' when x is not equal to y,
9528 but we can when x equals y. */
9529 if ((code
== SMAX
|| code
== UMAX
)
9530 && ! (cond
== EQ
|| cond
== NE
))
9531 cond
= reverse_condition (cond
);
9536 return unsignedp
? x
: XEXP (x
, 1);
9538 return unsignedp
? x
: XEXP (x
, 0);
9540 return unsignedp
? XEXP (x
, 1) : x
;
9542 return unsignedp
? XEXP (x
, 0) : x
;
9549 else if (code
== SUBREG
)
9551 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
));
9552 rtx new_rtx
, r
= known_cond (SUBREG_REG (x
), cond
, reg
, val
);
9554 if (SUBREG_REG (x
) != r
)
9556 /* We must simplify subreg here, before we lose track of the
9557 original inner_mode. */
9558 new_rtx
= simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x
), r
,
9559 inner_mode
, SUBREG_BYTE (x
));
9563 SUBST (SUBREG_REG (x
), r
);
9568 /* We don't have to handle SIGN_EXTEND here, because even in the
9569 case of replacing something with a modeless CONST_INT, a
9570 CONST_INT is already (supposed to be) a valid sign extension for
9571 its narrower mode, which implies it's already properly
9572 sign-extended for the wider mode. Now, for ZERO_EXTEND, the
9573 story is different. */
9574 else if (code
== ZERO_EXTEND
)
9576 machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
9577 rtx new_rtx
, r
= known_cond (XEXP (x
, 0), cond
, reg
, val
);
9579 if (XEXP (x
, 0) != r
)
9581 /* We must simplify the zero_extend here, before we lose
9582 track of the original inner_mode. */
9583 new_rtx
= simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND
, GET_MODE (x
),
9588 SUBST (XEXP (x
, 0), r
);
9594 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
9595 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
9598 SUBST (XEXP (x
, i
), known_cond (XEXP (x
, i
), cond
, reg
, val
));
9599 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
9600 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
9601 SUBST (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), known_cond (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
),
9608 /* See if X and Y are equal for the purposes of seeing if we can rewrite an
9609 assignment as a field assignment. */
9612 rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx x
, rtx y
, bool widen_x
)
9614 if (widen_x
&& GET_MODE (x
) != GET_MODE (y
))
9616 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (GET_MODE (x
), GET_MODE (y
)))
9618 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
!= WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
9620 x
= adjust_address_nv (x
, GET_MODE (y
),
9621 byte_lowpart_offset (GET_MODE (y
),
9625 if (x
== y
|| rtx_equal_p (x
, y
))
9628 if (x
== 0 || y
== 0 || GET_MODE (x
) != GET_MODE (y
))
9631 /* Check for a paradoxical SUBREG of a MEM compared with the MEM.
9632 Note that all SUBREGs of MEM are paradoxical; otherwise they
9633 would have been rewritten. */
9634 if (MEM_P (x
) && GET_CODE (y
) == SUBREG
9635 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (y
))
9636 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (y
),
9637 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y
)), x
)))
9640 if (MEM_P (y
) && GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
9641 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
))
9642 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (x
),
9643 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
)), y
)))
9646 /* We used to see if get_last_value of X and Y were the same but that's
9647 not correct. In one direction, we'll cause the assignment to have
9648 the wrong destination and in the case, we'll import a register into this
9649 insn that might have already have been dead. So fail if none of the
9650 above cases are true. */
9654 /* See if X, a SET operation, can be rewritten as a bit-field assignment.
9655 Return that assignment if so.
9657 We only handle the most common cases. */
9660 make_field_assignment (rtx x
)
9662 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
9663 rtx src
= SET_SRC (x
);
9668 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
9671 /* All the rules in this function are specific to scalar integers. */
9672 scalar_int_mode mode
;
9673 if (!is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (dest
), &mode
))
9676 /* If SRC was (and (not (ashift (const_int 1) POS)) DEST), this is
9677 a clear of a one-bit field. We will have changed it to
9678 (and (rotate (const_int -2) POS) DEST), so check for that. Also check
9681 if (GET_CODE (src
) == AND
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == ROTATE
9682 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0))
9683 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0)) == -2
9684 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest
, XEXP (src
, 1)))
9686 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 1),
9687 1, true, true, false);
9689 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, const0_rtx
);
9693 if (GET_CODE (src
) == AND
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == SUBREG
9694 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (src
, 0))
9695 && partial_subreg_p (XEXP (src
, 0))
9696 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0))) == ROTATE
9697 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)), 0))
9698 && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)), 0)) == -2
9699 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest
, XEXP (src
, 1)))
9701 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, 0,
9702 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src
, 0)), 1),
9703 1, true, true, false);
9705 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, const0_rtx
);
9709 /* If SRC is (ior (ashift (const_int 1) POS) DEST), this is a set of a
9711 if (GET_CODE (src
) == IOR
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src
, 0)) == ASHIFT
9712 && XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
9713 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest
, XEXP (src
, 1)))
9715 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src
, 0), 1),
9716 1, true, true, false);
9718 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, const1_rtx
);
9722 /* If DEST is already a field assignment, i.e. ZERO_EXTRACT, and the
9723 SRC is an AND with all bits of that field set, then we can discard
9725 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9726 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest
, 1))
9727 && GET_CODE (src
) == AND
9728 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src
, 1)))
9730 HOST_WIDE_INT width
= INTVAL (XEXP (dest
, 1));
9731 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT and_mask
= INTVAL (XEXP (src
, 1));
9732 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ze_mask
;
9734 if (width
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9737 ze_mask
= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)1 << width
) - 1;
9739 /* Complete overlap. We can remove the source AND. */
9740 if ((and_mask
& ze_mask
) == ze_mask
)
9741 return gen_rtx_SET (dest
, XEXP (src
, 0));
9743 /* Partial overlap. We can reduce the source AND. */
9744 if ((and_mask
& ze_mask
) != and_mask
)
9746 src
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, XEXP (src
, 0),
9747 gen_int_mode (and_mask
& ze_mask
, mode
));
9748 return gen_rtx_SET (dest
, src
);
9752 /* The other case we handle is assignments into a constant-position
9753 field. They look like (ior/xor (and DEST C1) OTHER). If C1 represents
9754 a mask that has all one bits except for a group of zero bits and
9755 OTHER is known to have zeros where C1 has ones, this is such an
9756 assignment. Compute the position and length from C1. Shift OTHER
9757 to the appropriate position, force it to the required mode, and
9758 make the extraction. Check for the AND in both operands. */
9760 /* One or more SUBREGs might obscure the constant-position field
9761 assignment. The first one we are likely to encounter is an outer
9762 narrowing SUBREG, which we can just strip for the purposes of
9763 identifying the constant-field assignment. */
9764 scalar_int_mode src_mode
= mode
;
9765 if (GET_CODE (src
) == SUBREG
9766 && subreg_lowpart_p (src
)
9767 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src
)), &src_mode
))
9768 src
= SUBREG_REG (src
);
9770 if (GET_CODE (src
) != IOR
&& GET_CODE (src
) != XOR
)
9773 rhs
= expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src
, 0));
9774 lhs
= expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src
, 1));
9776 if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == AND
9777 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs
, 1))
9778 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (rhs
, 0), dest
))
9779 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (rhs
, 1)), other
= lhs
;
9780 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9781 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9782 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9783 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9784 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9785 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9786 else if (GET_CODE (rhs
) == AND
9787 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (rhs
, 0))
9788 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs
, 0)))
9789 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs
, 1))
9790 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs
, 0)),
9792 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (rhs
, 1)), other
= lhs
;
9793 else if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == AND
9794 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
9795 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0), dest
))
9796 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)), other
= rhs
;
9797 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9798 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9799 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9800 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9801 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9802 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9803 else if (GET_CODE (lhs
) == AND
9804 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0))
9805 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs
, 0)))
9806 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs
, 1))
9807 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs
, 0)),
9809 c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs
, 1)), other
= rhs
;
9813 pos
= get_pos_from_mask ((~c1
) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
), &len
);
9815 || pos
+ len
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
9816 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9817 || (c1
& nonzero_bits (other
, mode
)) != 0)
9820 assign
= make_extraction (VOIDmode
, dest
, pos
, NULL_RTX
, len
,
9825 /* The mode to use for the source is the mode of the assignment, or of
9826 what is inside a possible STRICT_LOW_PART. */
9827 machine_mode new_mode
= (GET_CODE (assign
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
9828 ? GET_MODE (XEXP (assign
, 0)) : GET_MODE (assign
));
9830 /* Shift OTHER right POS places and make it the source, restricting it
9831 to the proper length and mode. */
9833 src
= canon_reg_for_combine (simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
,
9834 src_mode
, other
, pos
),
9836 src
= force_to_mode (src
, new_mode
,
9837 len
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9839 : (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< len
) - 1, false);
9841 /* If SRC is masked by an AND that does not make a difference in
9842 the value being stored, strip it. */
9843 if (GET_CODE (assign
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9844 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (assign
, 1))
9845 && INTVAL (XEXP (assign
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9846 && GET_CODE (src
) == AND
9847 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src
, 1))
9848 && UINTVAL (XEXP (src
, 1))
9849 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< INTVAL (XEXP (assign
, 1))) - 1)
9850 src
= XEXP (src
, 0);
9852 return gen_rtx_SET (assign
, src
);
9855 /* See if X is of the form (+ (* a c) (* b c)) and convert to (* (+ a b) c)
9859 apply_distributive_law (rtx x
)
9861 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
9862 enum rtx_code inner_code
;
9863 rtx lhs
, rhs
, other
;
9866 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9867 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9868 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
9869 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)
9872 /* The outer operation can only be one of the following: */
9873 if (code
!= IOR
&& code
!= AND
&& code
!= XOR
9874 && code
!= PLUS
&& code
!= MINUS
)
9880 /* If either operand is a primitive we can't do anything, so get out
9882 if (OBJECT_P (lhs
) || OBJECT_P (rhs
))
9885 lhs
= expand_compound_operation (lhs
);
9886 rhs
= expand_compound_operation (rhs
);
9887 inner_code
= GET_CODE (lhs
);
9888 if (inner_code
!= GET_CODE (rhs
))
9891 /* See if the inner and outer operations distribute. */
9898 /* These all distribute except over PLUS. */
9899 if (code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
)
9904 if (code
!= PLUS
&& code
!= MINUS
)
9909 /* This is also a multiply, so it distributes over everything. */
9912 /* This used to handle SUBREG, but this turned out to be counter-
9913 productive, since (subreg (op ...)) usually is not handled by
9914 insn patterns, and this "optimization" therefore transformed
9915 recognizable patterns into unrecognizable ones. Therefore the
9916 SUBREG case was removed from here.
9918 It is possible that distributing SUBREG over arithmetic operations
9919 leads to an intermediate result than can then be optimized further,
9920 e.g. by moving the outer SUBREG to the other side of a SET as done
9921 in simplify_set. This seems to have been the original intent of
9922 handling SUBREGs here.
9924 However, with current GCC this does not appear to actually happen,
9925 at least on major platforms. If some case is found where removing
9926 the SUBREG case here prevents follow-on optimizations, distributing
9927 SUBREGs ought to be re-added at that place, e.g. in simplify_set. */
9933 /* Set LHS and RHS to the inner operands (A and B in the example
9934 above) and set OTHER to the common operand (C in the example).
9935 There is only one way to do this unless the inner operation is
9937 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs
)
9938 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0), XEXP (rhs
, 0)))
9939 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 1);
9940 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs
)
9941 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 0), XEXP (rhs
, 1)))
9942 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 0);
9943 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs
)
9944 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 1), XEXP (rhs
, 0)))
9945 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 1);
9946 else if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs
, 1), XEXP (rhs
, 1)))
9947 other
= XEXP (lhs
, 1), lhs
= XEXP (lhs
, 0), rhs
= XEXP (rhs
, 0);
9951 /* Form the new inner operation, seeing if it simplifies first. */
9952 tem
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, GET_MODE (x
), lhs
, rhs
);
9954 /* There is one exception to the general way of distributing:
9955 (a | c) ^ (b | c) -> (a ^ b) & ~c */
9956 if (code
== XOR
&& inner_code
== IOR
)
9959 other
= simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, GET_MODE (x
), other
, GET_MODE (x
));
9962 /* We may be able to continuing distributing the result, so call
9963 ourselves recursively on the inner operation before forming the
9964 outer operation, which we return. */
9965 return simplify_gen_binary (inner_code
, GET_MODE (x
),
9966 apply_distributive_law (tem
), other
);
9969 /* See if X is of the form (* (+ A B) C), and if so convert to
9970 (+ (* A C) (* B C)) and try to simplify.
9972 Most of the time, this results in no change. However, if some of
9973 the operands are the same or inverses of each other, simplifications
9976 For example, (and (ior A B) (not B)) can occur as the result of
9977 expanding a bit field assignment. When we apply the distributive
9978 law to this, we get (ior (and (A (not B))) (and (B (not B)))),
9979 which then simplifies to (and (A (not B))).
9981 Note that no checks happen on the validity of applying the inverse
9982 distributive law. This is pointless since we can do it in the
9983 few places where this routine is called.
9985 N is the index of the term that is decomposed (the arithmetic operation,
9986 i.e. (+ A B) in the first example above). !N is the index of the term that
9987 is distributed, i.e. of C in the first example above. */
9989 distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx x
, int n
)
9992 enum rtx_code outer_code
, inner_code
;
9993 rtx decomposed
, distributed
, inner_op0
, inner_op1
, new_op0
, new_op1
, tmp
;
9995 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9996 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9997 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
9998 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations
)
10001 decomposed
= XEXP (x
, n
);
10002 if (!ARITHMETIC_P (decomposed
))
10005 mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
10006 outer_code
= GET_CODE (x
);
10007 distributed
= XEXP (x
, !n
);
10009 inner_code
= GET_CODE (decomposed
);
10010 inner_op0
= XEXP (decomposed
, 0);
10011 inner_op1
= XEXP (decomposed
, 1);
10013 /* Special case (and (xor B C) (not A)), which is equivalent to
10014 (xor (ior A B) (ior A C)) */
10015 if (outer_code
== AND
&& inner_code
== XOR
&& GET_CODE (distributed
) == NOT
)
10017 distributed
= XEXP (distributed
, 0);
10023 /* Distribute the second term. */
10024 new_op0
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, inner_op0
, distributed
);
10025 new_op1
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, inner_op1
, distributed
);
10029 /* Distribute the first term. */
10030 new_op0
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, distributed
, inner_op0
);
10031 new_op1
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_code
, mode
, distributed
, inner_op1
);
10034 tmp
= apply_distributive_law (simplify_gen_binary (inner_code
, mode
,
10035 new_op0
, new_op1
));
10036 if (GET_CODE (tmp
) != outer_code
10037 && (set_src_cost (tmp
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)
10038 < set_src_cost (x
, mode
, optimize_this_for_speed_p
)))
10044 /* Simplify a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
10045 in MODE. Return an equivalent form, if different from (and VAROP
10046 (const_int CONSTOP)). Otherwise, return NULL_RTX. */
10049 simplify_and_const_int_1 (scalar_int_mode mode
, rtx varop
,
10050 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop
)
10052 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero
;
10053 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT orig_constop
;
10057 orig_varop
= varop
;
10058 orig_constop
= constop
;
10059 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
10062 /* Simplify VAROP knowing that we will be only looking at some of the
10065 Note by passing in CONSTOP, we guarantee that the bits not set in
10066 CONSTOP are not significant and will never be examined. We must
10067 ensure that is the case by explicitly masking out those bits
10068 before returning. */
10069 varop
= force_to_mode (varop
, mode
, constop
, false);
10071 /* If VAROP is a CLOBBER, we will fail so return it. */
10072 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
10075 /* If VAROP is a CONST_INT, then we need to apply the mask in CONSTOP
10076 to VAROP and return the new constant. */
10077 if (CONST_INT_P (varop
))
10078 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (varop
) & constop
, mode
);
10080 /* See what bits may be nonzero in VAROP. Unlike the general case of
10081 a call to nonzero_bits, here we don't care about bits outside
10082 MODE unless WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS is true. */
10084 scalar_int_mode tmode
= mode
;
10085 if (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
&& GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
10087 nonzero
= nonzero_bits (varop
, tmode
) & GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
);
10089 /* Turn off all bits in the constant that are known to already be zero.
10090 Thus, if the AND isn't needed at all, we will have CONSTOP == NONZERO_BITS
10091 which is tested below. */
10093 constop
&= nonzero
;
10095 /* If we don't have any bits left, return zero. */
10096 if (constop
== 0 && !side_effects_p (varop
))
10099 /* If VAROP is a NEG of something known to be zero or 1 and CONSTOP is
10100 a power of two, we can replace this with an ASHIFT. */
10101 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == NEG
&& nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), tmode
) == 1
10102 && (i
= exact_log2 (constop
)) >= 0)
10103 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
, mode
, XEXP (varop
, 0), i
);
10105 /* If VAROP is an IOR or XOR, apply the AND to both branches of the IOR
10106 or XOR, then try to apply the distributive law. This may eliminate
10107 operations if either branch can be simplified because of the AND.
10108 It may also make some cases more complex, but those cases probably
10109 won't match a pattern either with or without this. */
10111 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == IOR
|| GET_CODE (varop
) == XOR
)
10113 scalar_int_mode varop_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (varop
));
10117 apply_distributive_law
10118 (simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop
), varop_mode
,
10119 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, varop_mode
,
10122 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, varop_mode
,
10127 /* If VAROP is PLUS, and the constant is a mask of low bits, distribute
10128 the AND and see if one of the operands simplifies to zero. If so, we
10129 may eliminate it. */
10131 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == PLUS
10132 && pow2p_hwi (constop
+ 1))
10136 o0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (varop
, 0), constop
);
10137 o1
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (varop
, 1), constop
);
10138 if (o0
== const0_rtx
)
10140 if (o1
== const0_rtx
)
10144 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
10145 varop
= gen_lowpart (mode
, varop
);
10146 if (varop
== NULL_RTX
|| GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
10149 /* If we are only masking insignificant bits, return VAROP. */
10150 if (constop
== nonzero
)
10153 if (varop
== orig_varop
&& constop
== orig_constop
)
10156 /* Otherwise, return an AND. */
10157 return simplify_gen_binary (AND
, mode
, varop
, gen_int_mode (constop
, mode
));
10161 /* We have X, a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
10164 Return an equivalent form, if different from X. Otherwise, return X. If
10165 X is zero, we are to always construct the equivalent form. */
10168 simplify_and_const_int (rtx x
, scalar_int_mode mode
, rtx varop
,
10169 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop
)
10171 rtx tem
= simplify_and_const_int_1 (mode
, varop
, constop
);
10176 x
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, GET_MODE (varop
), varop
,
10177 gen_int_mode (constop
, mode
));
10178 if (GET_MODE (x
) != mode
)
10179 x
= gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
10183 /* Given a REG X of mode XMODE, compute which bits in X can be nonzero.
10184 We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE.
10185 We DO care about all the bits in MODE, even if XMODE is smaller than MODE.
10187 For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is
10188 a shift, AND, or zero_extract, we can do better. */
10191 reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx x
, scalar_int_mode xmode
,
10192 scalar_int_mode mode
,
10193 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*nonzero
)
10196 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
10198 /* If X is a register whose nonzero bits value is current, use it.
10199 Otherwise, if X is a register whose value we can find, use that
10200 value. Otherwise, use the previously-computed global nonzero bits
10201 for this register. */
10203 rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
10204 if (rsp
->last_set_value
!= 0
10205 && (rsp
->last_set_mode
== mode
10206 || (REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
10207 && GET_MODE_CLASS (rsp
->last_set_mode
) == MODE_INT
10208 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
))
10209 && ((rsp
->last_set_label
>= label_tick_ebb_start
10210 && rsp
->last_set_label
< label_tick
)
10211 || (rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
10212 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) < subst_low_luid
)
10213 || (REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
10214 && REGNO (x
) < reg_n_sets_max
10215 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x
)) == 1
10216 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
10217 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
),
10220 /* Note that, even if the precision of last_set_mode is lower than that
10221 of mode, record_value_for_reg invoked nonzero_bits on the register
10222 with nonzero_bits_mode (because last_set_mode is necessarily integral
10223 and HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P in this case) so bits in nonzero_bits_mode
10224 are all valid, hence in mode too since nonzero_bits_mode is defined
10225 to the largest HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P mode. */
10226 *nonzero
&= rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
;
10230 tem
= get_last_value (x
);
10233 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
)
10234 tem
= sign_extend_short_imm (tem
, xmode
, GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
));
10239 if (nonzero_sign_valid
&& rsp
->nonzero_bits
)
10241 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= rsp
->nonzero_bits
;
10243 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
10244 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
10245 mask
|= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (xmode
);
10253 /* Given a reg X of mode XMODE, return the number of bits at the high-order
10254 end of X that are known to be equal to the sign bit. X will be used
10255 in mode MODE; the returned value will always be between 1 and the
10256 number of bits in MODE. */
10259 reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx x
, scalar_int_mode xmode
,
10260 scalar_int_mode mode
,
10261 unsigned int *result
)
10264 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
10266 rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
10267 if (rsp
->last_set_value
!= 0
10268 && rsp
->last_set_mode
== mode
10269 && ((rsp
->last_set_label
>= label_tick_ebb_start
10270 && rsp
->last_set_label
< label_tick
)
10271 || (rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
10272 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) < subst_low_luid
)
10273 || (REGNO (x
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
10274 && REGNO (x
) < reg_n_sets_max
10275 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x
)) == 1
10276 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
10277 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
),
10280 *result
= rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
;
10284 tem
= get_last_value (x
);
10288 if (nonzero_sign_valid
&& rsp
->sign_bit_copies
!= 0
10289 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode
) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
10290 *result
= rsp
->sign_bit_copies
;
10295 /* Return the number of "extended" bits there are in X, when interpreted
10296 as a quantity in MODE whose signedness is indicated by UNSIGNEDP. For
10297 unsigned quantities, this is the number of high-order zero bits.
10298 For signed quantities, this is the number of copies of the sign bit
10299 minus 1. In both case, this function returns the number of "spare"
10300 bits. For example, if two quantities for which this function returns
10301 at least 1 are added, the addition is known not to overflow.
10303 This function will always return 0 unless called during combine, which
10304 implies that it must be called from a define_split. */
10307 extended_count (const_rtx x
, machine_mode mode
, bool unsignedp
)
10309 if (nonzero_sign_valid
== 0)
10312 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
10314 ? (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
10315 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
10316 ? (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1
10317 - floor_log2 (nonzero_bits (x
, int_mode
)))
10319 : num_sign_bit_copies (x
, mode
) - 1);
10322 /* This function is called from `simplify_shift_const' to merge two
10323 outer operations. Specifically, we have already found that we need
10324 to perform operation *POP0 with constant *PCONST0 at the outermost
10325 position. We would now like to also perform OP1 with constant CONST1
10326 (with *POP0 being done last).
10328 Return true if we can do the operation and update *POP0 and *PCONST0 with
10329 the resulting operation. *PCOMP_P is set to true if we would need to
10330 complement the innermost operand, otherwise it is unchanged.
10332 MODE is the mode in which the operation will be done. No bits outside
10333 the width of this mode matter. It is assumed that the width of this mode
10334 is smaller than or equal to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT.
10336 If *POP0 or OP1 are UNKNOWN, it means no operation is required. Only NEG, PLUS,
10337 IOR, XOR, and AND are supported. We may set *POP0 to SET if the proper
10338 result is simply *PCONST0.
10340 If the resulting operation cannot be expressed as one operation, we
10341 return false and do not change *POP0, *PCONST0, and *PCOMP_P. */
10344 merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code
*pop0
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*pconst0
,
10345 enum rtx_code op1
, HOST_WIDE_INT const1
,
10346 machine_mode mode
, bool *pcomp_p
)
10348 enum rtx_code op0
= *pop0
;
10349 HOST_WIDE_INT const0
= *pconst0
;
10351 const0
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
10352 const1
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
10354 /* If OP0 is an AND, clear unimportant bits in CONST1. */
10358 /* If OP0 or OP1 is UNKNOWN, this is easy. Similarly if they are the same or
10361 if (op1
== UNKNOWN
|| op0
== SET
)
10364 else if (op0
== UNKNOWN
)
10365 op0
= op1
, const0
= const1
;
10367 else if (op0
== op1
)
10391 /* Otherwise, if either is a PLUS or NEG, we can't do anything. */
10392 else if (op0
== PLUS
|| op1
== PLUS
|| op0
== NEG
|| op1
== NEG
)
10395 /* If the two constants aren't the same, we can't do anything. The
10396 remaining six cases can all be done. */
10397 else if (const0
!= const1
)
10405 /* (a & b) | b == b */
10407 else /* op1 == XOR */
10408 /* (a ^ b) | b == a | b */
10414 /* (a & b) ^ b == (~a) & b */
10415 op0
= AND
, *pcomp_p
= true;
10416 else /* op1 == IOR */
10417 /* (a | b) ^ b == a & ~b */
10418 op0
= AND
, const0
= ~const0
;
10423 /* (a | b) & b == b */
10425 else /* op1 == XOR */
10426 /* (a ^ b) & b) == (~a) & b */
10433 /* Check for NO-OP cases. */
10434 const0
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
10436 && (op0
== IOR
|| op0
== XOR
|| op0
== PLUS
))
10438 else if (const0
== 0 && op0
== AND
)
10440 else if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const0
== GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)
10446 /* ??? Slightly redundant with the above mask, but not entirely.
10447 Moving this above means we'd have to sign-extend the mode mask
10448 for the final test. */
10449 if (op0
!= UNKNOWN
&& op0
!= NEG
)
10450 *pconst0
= trunc_int_for_mode (const0
, mode
);
10455 /* A helper to simplify_shift_const_1 to determine the mode we can perform
10456 the shift in. The original shift operation CODE is performed on OP in
10457 ORIG_MODE. Return the wider mode MODE if we can perform the operation
10458 in that mode. Return ORIG_MODE otherwise. We can also assume that the
10459 result of the shift is subject to operation OUTER_CODE with operand
10462 static scalar_int_mode
10463 try_widen_shift_mode (enum rtx_code code
, rtx op
, int count
,
10464 scalar_int_mode orig_mode
, scalar_int_mode mode
,
10465 enum rtx_code outer_code
, HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const
)
10467 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode
));
10469 /* In general we can't perform in wider mode for right shift and rotate. */
10473 /* We can still widen if the bits brought in from the left are identical
10474 to the sign bit of ORIG_MODE. */
10475 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op
, mode
)
10476 > (unsigned) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
10477 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode
)))
10482 /* Similarly here but with zero bits. */
10483 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
10484 && (nonzero_bits (op
, mode
) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (orig_mode
)) == 0)
10487 /* We can also widen if the bits brought in will be masked off. This
10488 operation is performed in ORIG_MODE. */
10489 if (outer_code
== AND
)
10491 int care_bits
= low_bitmask_len (orig_mode
, outer_const
);
10494 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode
) - care_bits
>= count
)
10503 gcc_unreachable ();
10510 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by ORIG_COUNT bits. CODE says what kind
10511 of shift. The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. Return NULL_RTX
10512 if we cannot simplify it. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10514 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10515 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10516 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10519 simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code code
, machine_mode result_mode
,
10520 rtx varop
, int orig_count
)
10522 enum rtx_code orig_code
= code
;
10523 rtx orig_varop
= varop
;
10525 machine_mode mode
= result_mode
;
10526 machine_mode shift_mode
;
10527 scalar_int_mode tmode
, inner_mode
, int_mode
, int_varop_mode
, int_result_mode
;
10528 /* We form (outer_op (code varop count) (outer_const)). */
10529 enum rtx_code outer_op
= UNKNOWN
;
10530 HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const
= 0;
10531 bool complement_p
= false;
10534 /* Make sure and truncate the "natural" shift on the way in. We don't
10535 want to do this inside the loop as it makes it more difficult to
10537 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
)
10538 orig_count
&= GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode
) - 1;
10540 /* If we were given an invalid count, don't do anything except exactly
10541 what was requested. */
10543 if (orig_count
< 0 || orig_count
>= (int) GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode
))
10546 count
= orig_count
;
10548 /* Unless one of the branches of the `if' in this loop does a `continue',
10549 we will `break' the loop after the `if'. */
10553 /* If we have an operand of (clobber (const_int 0)), fail. */
10554 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
10557 /* Convert ROTATERT to ROTATE. */
10558 if (code
== ROTATERT
)
10560 unsigned int bitsize
= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (result_mode
);
10562 count
= bitsize
- count
;
10565 shift_mode
= result_mode
;
10566 if (shift_mode
!= mode
)
10568 /* We only change the modes of scalar shifts. */
10569 int_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
);
10570 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
10571 shift_mode
= try_widen_shift_mode (code
, varop
, count
,
10572 int_result_mode
, int_mode
,
10573 outer_op
, outer_const
);
10576 scalar_int_mode shift_unit_mode
10577 = as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE_INNER (shift_mode
));
10579 /* Handle cases where the count is greater than the size of the mode
10580 minus 1. For ASHIFT, use the size minus one as the count (this can
10581 occur when simplifying (lshiftrt (ashiftrt ..))). For rotates,
10582 take the count modulo the size. For other shifts, the result is
10585 Since these shifts are being produced by the compiler by combining
10586 multiple operations, each of which are defined, we know what the
10587 result is supposed to be. */
10589 if (count
> (GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
) - 1))
10591 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10592 count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
) - 1;
10593 else if (code
== ROTATE
|| code
== ROTATERT
)
10594 count
%= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
);
10597 /* We can't simply return zero because there may be an
10599 varop
= const0_rtx
;
10605 /* If we discovered we had to complement VAROP, leave. Making a NOT
10606 here would cause an infinite loop. */
10610 if (shift_mode
== shift_unit_mode
)
10612 /* An arithmetic right shift of a quantity known to be -1 or 0
10614 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10615 && (num_sign_bit_copies (varop
, shift_unit_mode
)
10616 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
)))
10622 /* If we are doing an arithmetic right shift and discarding all but
10623 the sign bit copies, this is equivalent to doing a shift by the
10624 bitsize minus one. Convert it into that shift because it will
10625 often allow other simplifications. */
10627 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10628 && (count
+ num_sign_bit_copies (varop
, shift_unit_mode
)
10629 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
)))
10630 count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_unit_mode
) - 1;
10632 /* We simplify the tests below and elsewhere by converting
10633 ASHIFTRT to LSHIFTRT if we know the sign bit is clear.
10634 `make_compound_operation' will convert it to an ASHIFTRT for
10635 those machines (such as VAX) that don't have an LSHIFTRT. */
10636 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10637 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode
)
10638 && val_signbit_known_clear_p (shift_unit_mode
,
10639 nonzero_bits (varop
,
10643 if (((code
== LSHIFTRT
10644 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode
)
10645 && !(nonzero_bits (varop
, shift_unit_mode
) >> count
))
10647 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_unit_mode
)
10648 && !((nonzero_bits (varop
, shift_unit_mode
) << count
)
10649 & GET_MODE_MASK (shift_unit_mode
))))
10650 && !side_effects_p (varop
))
10651 varop
= const0_rtx
;
10654 switch (GET_CODE (varop
))
10660 new_rtx
= expand_compound_operation (varop
);
10661 if (new_rtx
!= varop
)
10669 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10670 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10672 int_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
);
10674 /* If we have (xshiftrt (mem ...) C) and C is MODE_WIDTH
10675 minus the width of a smaller mode, we can do this with a
10676 SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND from the narrower memory location. */
10677 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10678 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (varop
, 0),
10679 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (varop
))
10680 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop
)
10681 && (int_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode
) - count
, 1)
10684 new_rtx
= adjust_address_nv (varop
, tmode
,
10685 BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? 0
10686 : count
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10688 varop
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (code
== ASHIFTRT
? SIGN_EXTEND
10689 : ZERO_EXTEND
, int_mode
, new_rtx
);
10696 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10697 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10699 int_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
);
10700 int_varop_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (varop
));
10702 /* If VAROP is a SUBREG, strip it as long as the inner operand has
10703 the same number of words as what we've seen so far. Then store
10704 the widest mode in MODE. */
10705 if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop
)
10706 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop
)), &inner_mode
)
10707 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) > GET_MODE_SIZE (int_varop_mode
)
10708 && (CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
)
10709 == CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
))
10710 && GET_MODE_CLASS (int_varop_mode
) == MODE_INT
)
10712 varop
= SUBREG_REG (varop
);
10713 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode
) > GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode
))
10720 /* Some machines use MULT instead of ASHIFT because MULT
10721 is cheaper. But it is still better on those machines to
10722 merge two shifts into one. */
10723 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10724 && (log2
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)))) >= 0)
10726 rtx log2_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (GET_MODE (varop
), log2
);
10727 varop
= simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT
, GET_MODE (varop
),
10728 XEXP (varop
, 0), log2_rtx
);
10734 /* Similar, for when divides are cheaper. */
10735 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10736 && (log2
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)))) >= 0)
10738 rtx log2_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (GET_MODE (varop
), log2
);
10739 varop
= simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT
, GET_MODE (varop
),
10740 XEXP (varop
, 0), log2_rtx
);
10746 /* If we are extracting just the sign bit of an arithmetic
10747 right shift, that shift is not needed. However, the sign
10748 bit of a wider mode may be different from what would be
10749 interpreted as the sign bit in a narrower mode, so, if
10750 the result is narrower, don't discard the shift. */
10751 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10752 && count
== (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (result_mode
) - 1)
10753 && (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (result_mode
)
10754 >= GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop
))))
10756 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10765 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10766 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10768 int_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
);
10769 int_varop_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (varop
));
10770 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
10772 /* Here we have two nested shifts. The result is usually the
10773 AND of a new shift with a mask. We compute the result below. */
10774 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10775 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)) >= 0
10776 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_varop_mode
)
10777 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_result_mode
)
10778 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
))
10780 enum rtx_code first_code
= GET_CODE (varop
);
10781 unsigned int first_count
= INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1));
10782 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
10785 /* We have one common special case. We can't do any merging if
10786 the inner code is an ASHIFTRT of a smaller mode. However, if
10787 we have (ashift:M1 (subreg:M1 (ashiftrt:M2 FOO C1) 0) C2)
10788 with C2 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M1) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M2),
10789 we can convert it to
10790 (ashiftrt:M1 (ashift:M1 (and:M1 (subreg:M1 FOO 0) C3) C2) C1).
10791 This simplifies certain SIGN_EXTEND operations. */
10792 if (code
== ASHIFT
&& first_code
== ASHIFTRT
10793 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_result_mode
)
10794 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_varop_mode
)))
10796 /* C3 has the low-order C1 bits zero. */
10798 mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
)
10799 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< first_count
) - 1);
10801 varop
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, int_result_mode
,
10802 XEXP (varop
, 0), mask
);
10803 varop
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, ASHIFT
,
10804 int_result_mode
, varop
, count
);
10805 count
= first_count
;
10810 /* If this was (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) and FOO has more
10811 than C1 high-order bits equal to the sign bit, we can convert
10812 this to either an ASHIFT or an ASHIFTRT depending on the
10815 We cannot do this if VAROP's mode is not SHIFT_UNIT_MODE. */
10817 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
&& first_code
== ASHIFT
10818 && int_varop_mode
== shift_unit_mode
10819 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (varop
, 0), shift_unit_mode
)
10822 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10823 count
-= first_count
;
10833 /* There are some cases we can't do. If CODE is ASHIFTRT,
10834 we can only do this if FIRST_CODE is also ASHIFTRT.
10836 We can't do the case when CODE is ROTATE and FIRST_CODE is
10839 If the mode of this shift is not the mode of the outer shift,
10840 we can't do this if either shift is a right shift or ROTATE.
10842 Finally, we can't do any of these if the mode is too wide
10843 unless the codes are the same.
10845 Handle the case where the shift codes are the same
10848 if (code
== first_code
)
10850 if (int_varop_mode
!= int_result_mode
10851 && (code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
10852 || code
== ROTATE
))
10855 count
+= first_count
;
10856 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10860 if (code
== ASHIFTRT
10861 || (code
== ROTATE
&& first_code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10862 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10863 || (int_varop_mode
!= int_result_mode
10864 && (first_code
== ASHIFTRT
|| first_code
== LSHIFTRT
10865 || first_code
== ROTATE
10866 || code
== ROTATE
)))
10869 /* To compute the mask to apply after the shift, shift the
10870 nonzero bits of the inner shift the same way the
10871 outer shift will. */
10873 mask_rtx
= gen_int_mode (nonzero_bits (varop
, int_varop_mode
),
10875 rtx count_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (int_result_mode
, count
);
10877 = simplify_const_binary_operation (code
, int_result_mode
,
10878 mask_rtx
, count_rtx
);
10880 /* Give up if we can't compute an outer operation to use. */
10882 || !CONST_INT_P (mask_rtx
)
10883 || ! merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, AND
,
10885 int_result_mode
, &complement_p
))
10888 /* If the shifts are in the same direction, we add the
10889 counts. Otherwise, we subtract them. */
10890 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10891 == (first_code
== ASHIFTRT
|| first_code
== LSHIFTRT
))
10892 count
+= first_count
;
10894 count
-= first_count
;
10896 /* If COUNT is positive, the new shift is usually CODE,
10897 except for the two exceptions below, in which case it is
10898 FIRST_CODE. If the count is negative, FIRST_CODE should
10901 && ((first_code
== ROTATE
&& code
== ASHIFT
)
10902 || (first_code
== ASHIFTRT
&& code
== LSHIFTRT
)))
10904 else if (count
< 0)
10905 code
= first_code
, count
= -count
;
10907 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
10911 /* If we have (A << B << C) for any shift, we can convert this to
10912 (A << C << B). This wins if A is a constant. Only try this if
10913 B is not a constant. */
10915 else if (GET_CODE (varop
) == code
10916 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 0))
10917 && !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1)))
10919 /* For ((unsigned) (cstULL >> count)) >> cst2 we have to make
10920 sure the result will be masked. See PR70222. */
10921 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
10922 && int_mode
!= int_result_mode
10923 && !merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, AND
,
10924 GET_MODE_MASK (int_result_mode
)
10925 >> orig_count
, int_result_mode
,
10928 /* For ((int) (cstLL >> count)) >> cst2 just give up. Queuing
10929 up outer sign extension (often left and right shift) is
10930 hardly more efficient than the original. See PR70429.
10931 Similarly punt for rotates with different modes.
10933 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== ROTATE
)
10934 && int_mode
!= int_result_mode
)
10937 rtx count_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (int_result_mode
, count
);
10938 rtx new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation (code
, int_mode
,
10941 varop
= gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, int_mode
, new_rtx
, XEXP (varop
, 1));
10948 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10949 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10952 /* Make this fit the case below. */
10953 varop
= gen_rtx_XOR (mode
, XEXP (varop
, 0), constm1_rtx
);
10959 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
10960 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
10962 int_varop_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (varop
));
10963 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
10965 /* If we have (xshiftrt (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) C)
10966 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10967 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10968 we have an (le X 0) operation. If we have an arithmetic shift
10969 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or we have a logical shift with
10970 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of -1, we have a (neg (le X 0)) operation. */
10972 if (GET_CODE (varop
) == IOR
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == PLUS
10973 && XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
10974 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
10975 && (code
== LSHIFTRT
|| code
== ASHIFTRT
)
10976 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_varop_mode
) - 1)
10977 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 0), XEXP (varop
, 1)))
10980 varop
= gen_rtx_LE (int_varop_mode
, XEXP (varop
, 1),
10983 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 ? code
== ASHIFTRT
: code
== LSHIFTRT
)
10984 varop
= gen_rtx_NEG (int_varop_mode
, varop
);
10989 /* If we have (shift (logical)), move the logical to the outside
10990 to allow it to possibly combine with another logical and the
10991 shift to combine with another shift. This also canonicalizes to
10992 what a ZERO_EXTRACT looks like. Also, some machines have
10993 (and (shift)) insns. */
10995 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
10996 /* We can't do this if we have (ashiftrt (xor)) and the
10997 constant has its sign bit set in shift_unit_mode with
10998 shift_unit_mode wider than result_mode. */
10999 && !(code
== ASHIFTRT
&& GET_CODE (varop
) == XOR
11000 && int_result_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
11001 && trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)),
11002 shift_unit_mode
) < 0)
11003 && (new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation
11004 (code
, int_result_mode
,
11005 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)), int_result_mode
),
11006 gen_int_shift_amount (int_result_mode
, count
))) != 0
11007 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx
)
11008 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, GET_CODE (varop
),
11009 INTVAL (new_rtx
), int_result_mode
,
11012 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11016 /* If we can't do that, try to simplify the shift in each arm of the
11017 logical expression, make a new logical expression, and apply
11018 the inverse distributive law. This also can't be done for
11019 (ashiftrt (xor)) where we've widened the shift and the constant
11020 changes the sign bit. */
11021 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
11022 && !(code
== ASHIFTRT
&& GET_CODE (varop
) == XOR
11023 && int_result_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
11024 && trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)),
11025 shift_unit_mode
) < 0))
11027 rtx lhs
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, code
, shift_unit_mode
,
11028 XEXP (varop
, 0), count
);
11029 rtx rhs
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, code
, shift_unit_mode
,
11030 XEXP (varop
, 1), count
);
11032 varop
= simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop
), shift_unit_mode
,
11034 varop
= apply_distributive_law (varop
);
11042 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
11043 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
11045 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
11047 /* Convert (lshiftrt (eq FOO 0) C) to (xor FOO 1) if STORE_FLAG_VALUE
11048 says that the sign bit can be tested, FOO has mode MODE, C is
11049 GET_MODE_PRECISION (MODE) - 1, and FOO has only its low-order bit
11050 that may be nonzero. */
11051 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
11052 && XEXP (varop
, 1) == const0_rtx
11053 && GET_MODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == int_result_mode
11054 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_result_mode
) - 1)
11055 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_result_mode
)
11056 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1
11057 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), int_result_mode
) == 1
11058 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, XOR
, 1,
11059 int_result_mode
, &complement_p
))
11061 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11068 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
11069 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
11071 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
11073 /* (lshiftrt (neg A) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C is one less
11074 than the number of bits in the mode is equivalent to A. */
11075 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
11076 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_result_mode
) - 1)
11077 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), int_result_mode
) == 1)
11079 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11084 /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Move the
11085 NEG outside to allow shifts to combine. */
11087 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, NEG
, 0,
11088 int_result_mode
, &complement_p
))
11090 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11096 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
11097 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
11099 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
11101 /* (lshiftrt (plus A -1) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C
11102 is one less than the number of bits in the mode is
11103 equivalent to (xor A 1). */
11104 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
11105 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_result_mode
) - 1)
11106 && XEXP (varop
, 1) == constm1_rtx
11107 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), int_result_mode
) == 1
11108 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, XOR
, 1,
11109 int_result_mode
, &complement_p
))
11112 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11116 /* If we have (xshiftrt (plus FOO BAR) C), and the only bits
11117 that might be nonzero in BAR are those being shifted out and those
11118 bits are known zero in FOO, we can replace the PLUS with FOO.
11119 Similarly in the other operand order. This code occurs when
11120 we are computing the size of a variable-size array. */
11122 if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
11123 && count
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11124 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 1), int_result_mode
) >> count
== 0
11125 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 1), int_result_mode
)
11126 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), int_result_mode
)) == 0)
11128 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11131 else if ((code
== ASHIFTRT
|| code
== LSHIFTRT
)
11132 && count
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11133 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_result_mode
)
11134 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), int_result_mode
)
11136 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 0), int_result_mode
)
11137 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop
, 1), int_result_mode
)) == 0)
11139 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 1);
11143 /* (ashift (plus foo C) N) is (plus (ashift foo N) C'). */
11145 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
11146 && (new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation
11147 (ASHIFT
, int_result_mode
,
11148 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)), int_result_mode
),
11149 gen_int_shift_amount (int_result_mode
, count
))) != 0
11150 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx
)
11151 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, PLUS
,
11152 INTVAL (new_rtx
), int_result_mode
,
11155 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11159 /* Check for 'PLUS signbit', which is the canonical form of 'XOR
11160 signbit', and attempt to change the PLUS to an XOR and move it to
11161 the outer operation as is done above in the AND/IOR/XOR case
11162 leg for shift(logical). See details in logical handling above
11163 for reasoning in doing so. */
11164 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
11165 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop
, 1))
11166 && mode_signbit_p (int_result_mode
, XEXP (varop
, 1))
11167 && (new_rtx
= simplify_const_binary_operation
11168 (code
, int_result_mode
,
11169 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop
, 1)), int_result_mode
),
11170 gen_int_shift_amount (int_result_mode
, count
))) != 0
11171 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx
)
11172 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op
, &outer_const
, XOR
,
11173 INTVAL (new_rtx
), int_result_mode
,
11176 varop
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11183 /* The following rules apply only to scalars. */
11184 if (shift_mode
!= shift_unit_mode
)
11186 int_varop_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (varop
));
11188 /* If we have (xshiftrt (minus (ashiftrt X C)) X) C)
11189 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
11190 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
11191 we have a (gt X 0) operation. If the shift is arithmetic with
11192 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of 1 or logical with STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1,
11193 we have a (neg (gt X 0)) operation. */
11195 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
11196 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
11197 && count
== (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_varop_mode
) - 1)
11198 && (code
== LSHIFTRT
|| code
== ASHIFTRT
)
11199 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1))
11200 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1)) == count
11201 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 0), XEXP (varop
, 1)))
11204 varop
= gen_rtx_GT (int_varop_mode
, XEXP (varop
, 1),
11207 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== 1 ? code
== ASHIFTRT
: code
== LSHIFTRT
)
11208 varop
= gen_rtx_NEG (int_varop_mode
, varop
);
11215 /* Change (lshiftrt (truncate (lshiftrt))) to (truncate (lshiftrt))
11216 if the truncate does not affect the value. */
11217 if (code
== LSHIFTRT
11218 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
11219 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1))
11220 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop
, 0), 1))
11221 >= (GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (varop
, 0)))
11222 - GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop
)))))
11224 rtx varop_inner
= XEXP (varop
, 0);
11225 int new_count
= count
+ INTVAL (XEXP (varop_inner
, 1));
11226 rtx new_count_rtx
= gen_int_shift_amount (GET_MODE (varop_inner
),
11228 varop_inner
= gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (GET_MODE (varop_inner
),
11229 XEXP (varop_inner
, 0),
11231 varop
= gen_rtx_TRUNCATE (GET_MODE (varop
), varop_inner
);
11244 shift_mode
= result_mode
;
11245 if (shift_mode
!= mode
)
11247 /* We only change the modes of scalar shifts. */
11248 int_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
);
11249 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
11250 shift_mode
= try_widen_shift_mode (code
, varop
, count
, int_result_mode
,
11251 int_mode
, outer_op
, outer_const
);
11254 /* We have now finished analyzing the shift. The result should be
11255 a shift of type CODE with SHIFT_MODE shifting VAROP COUNT places. If
11256 OUTER_OP is non-UNKNOWN, it is an operation that needs to be applied
11257 to the result of the shift. OUTER_CONST is the relevant constant,
11258 but we must turn off all bits turned off in the shift. */
11260 if (outer_op
== UNKNOWN
11261 && orig_code
== code
&& orig_count
== count
11262 && varop
== orig_varop
11263 && shift_mode
== GET_MODE (varop
))
11266 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
11267 varop
= gen_lowpart (shift_mode
, varop
);
11268 if (varop
== NULL_RTX
|| GET_CODE (varop
) == CLOBBER
)
11271 /* If we have an outer operation and we just made a shift, it is
11272 possible that we could have simplified the shift were it not
11273 for the outer operation. So try to do the simplification
11276 if (outer_op
!= UNKNOWN
)
11277 x
= simplify_shift_const_1 (code
, shift_mode
, varop
, count
);
11282 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, shift_mode
, varop
,
11283 gen_int_shift_amount (shift_mode
, count
));
11285 /* If we were doing an LSHIFTRT in a wider mode than it was originally,
11286 turn off all the bits that the shift would have turned off. */
11287 if (orig_code
== LSHIFTRT
&& result_mode
!= shift_mode
)
11288 /* We only change the modes of scalar shifts. */
11289 x
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (shift_mode
),
11290 x
, GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode
) >> orig_count
);
11292 /* Do the remainder of the processing in RESULT_MODE. */
11293 x
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (result_mode
, x
);
11295 /* If COMPLEMENT_P is set, we have to complement X before doing the outer
11298 x
= simplify_gen_unary (NOT
, result_mode
, x
, result_mode
);
11300 if (outer_op
!= UNKNOWN
)
11302 int_result_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (result_mode
);
11304 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op
) != RTX_UNARY
11305 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_result_mode
) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
11306 outer_const
= trunc_int_for_mode (outer_const
, int_result_mode
);
11308 if (outer_op
== AND
)
11309 x
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, int_result_mode
, x
, outer_const
);
11310 else if (outer_op
== SET
)
11312 /* This means that we have determined that the result is
11313 equivalent to a constant. This should be rare. */
11314 if (!side_effects_p (x
))
11315 x
= GEN_INT (outer_const
);
11317 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op
) == RTX_UNARY
)
11318 x
= simplify_gen_unary (outer_op
, int_result_mode
, x
, int_result_mode
);
11320 x
= simplify_gen_binary (outer_op
, int_result_mode
, x
,
11321 GEN_INT (outer_const
));
11327 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by COUNT bits. CODE says what kind of shift.
11328 The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. If we cannot simplify it,
11329 return X or, if it is NULL, synthesize the expression with
11330 simplify_gen_binary. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
11332 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
11333 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
11334 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
11337 simplify_shift_const (rtx x
, enum rtx_code code
, machine_mode result_mode
,
11338 rtx varop
, int count
)
11340 rtx tem
= simplify_shift_const_1 (code
, result_mode
, varop
, count
);
11345 x
= simplify_gen_binary (code
, GET_MODE (varop
), varop
,
11346 gen_int_shift_amount (GET_MODE (varop
), count
));
11347 if (GET_MODE (x
) != result_mode
)
11348 x
= gen_lowpart (result_mode
, x
);
11353 /* A subroutine of recog_for_combine. See there for arguments and
11357 recog_for_combine_1 (rtx
*pnewpat
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx
*pnotes
)
11359 rtx pat
= *pnewpat
;
11360 rtx pat_without_clobbers
;
11361 int insn_code_number
;
11362 int num_clobbers_to_add
= 0;
11364 rtx notes
= NULL_RTX
;
11365 rtx old_notes
, old_pat
;
11368 /* If PAT is a PARALLEL, check to see if it contains the CLOBBER
11369 we use to indicate that something didn't match. If we find such a
11370 thing, force rejection. */
11371 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11372 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
11373 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) == CLOBBER
11374 && XEXP (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
), 0) == const0_rtx
)
11377 old_pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
11378 old_notes
= REG_NOTES (insn
);
11379 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
11380 REG_NOTES (insn
) = NULL_RTX
;
11382 insn_code_number
= recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers_to_add
);
11383 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
11385 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
11386 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11388 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11389 print_rtl_single (dump_file
, pat
);
11392 /* If it isn't, there is the possibility that we previously had an insn
11393 that clobbered some register as a side effect, but the combined
11394 insn doesn't need to do that. So try once more without the clobbers
11395 unless this represents an ASM insn. */
11397 if (insn_code_number
< 0 && ! check_asm_operands (pat
)
11398 && GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11402 for (pos
= 0, i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
11403 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
)) != CLOBBER
)
11406 SUBST (XVECEXP (pat
, 0, pos
), XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
));
11410 SUBST_INT (XVECLEN (pat
, 0), pos
);
11413 pat
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, 0);
11415 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
11416 insn_code_number
= recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers_to_add
);
11417 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
11419 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
11420 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11422 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file
);
11423 print_rtl_single (dump_file
, pat
);
11427 pat_without_clobbers
= pat
;
11429 PATTERN (insn
) = old_pat
;
11430 REG_NOTES (insn
) = old_notes
;
11432 /* Recognize all noop sets, these will be killed by followup pass. */
11433 if (insn_code_number
< 0 && GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
&& set_noop_p (pat
))
11434 insn_code_number
= NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE
, num_clobbers_to_add
= 0;
11436 /* If we had any clobbers to add, make a new pattern than contains
11437 them. Then check to make sure that all of them are dead. */
11438 if (num_clobbers_to_add
)
11440 rtx newpat
= gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode
,
11441 rtvec_alloc (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
11442 ? (XVECLEN (pat
, 0)
11443 + num_clobbers_to_add
)
11444 : num_clobbers_to_add
+ 1));
11446 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11447 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
11448 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
) = XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
11450 XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, 0) = pat
;
11452 add_clobbers (newpat
, insn_code_number
);
11454 for (i
= XVECLEN (newpat
, 0) - num_clobbers_to_add
;
11455 i
< XVECLEN (newpat
, 0); i
++)
11457 if (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0))
11458 && ! reg_dead_at_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0), insn
))
11460 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0)) != SCRATCH
)
11462 gcc_assert (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0)));
11463 notes
= alloc_reg_note (REG_UNUSED
,
11464 XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat
, 0, i
), 0), notes
);
11470 if (insn_code_number
>= 0
11471 && insn_code_number
!= NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE
)
11473 old_pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
11474 old_notes
= REG_NOTES (insn
);
11475 old_icode
= INSN_CODE (insn
);
11476 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
11477 REG_NOTES (insn
) = notes
;
11478 INSN_CODE (insn
) = insn_code_number
;
11480 /* Allow targets to reject combined insn. */
11481 if (!targetm
.legitimate_combined_insn (insn
))
11483 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
11484 fputs ("Instruction not appropriate for target.",
11487 /* Callers expect recog_for_combine to strip
11488 clobbers from the pattern on failure. */
11489 pat
= pat_without_clobbers
;
11492 insn_code_number
= -1;
11495 PATTERN (insn
) = old_pat
;
11496 REG_NOTES (insn
) = old_notes
;
11497 INSN_CODE (insn
) = old_icode
;
11503 return insn_code_number
;
11506 /* Change every ZERO_EXTRACT and ZERO_EXTEND of a SUBREG that can be
11507 expressed as an AND and maybe an LSHIFTRT, to that formulation.
11508 Return whether anything was so changed. */
11511 change_zero_ext (rtx pat
)
11513 bool changed
= false;
11514 rtx
*src
= &SET_SRC (pat
);
11516 subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array
;
11517 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter
, array
, src
, NONCONST
)
11520 scalar_int_mode mode
, inner_mode
;
11521 if (!is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (x
), &mode
))
11525 if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11526 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
11527 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 2))
11528 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)), &inner_mode
)
11529 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
))
11531 size
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1));
11533 int start
= INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 2));
11534 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11535 start
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) - size
- start
;
11538 x
= gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (inner_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0),
11539 gen_int_shift_amount (inner_mode
, start
));
11543 if (mode
!= inner_mode
)
11545 if (REG_P (x
) && HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
11546 && !can_change_dest_mode (x
, 0, mode
))
11549 x
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, x
);
11552 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
11553 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == SUBREG
11554 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0))))
11555 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
11556 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x
, 0)))
11558 inner_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
11559 size
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
);
11560 x
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x
, 0));
11561 if (GET_MODE (x
) != mode
)
11563 if (REG_P (x
) && HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
11564 && !can_change_dest_mode (x
, 0, mode
))
11567 x
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, x
);
11570 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == ZERO_EXTEND
11571 && REG_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
11572 && HARD_REGISTER_P (XEXP (x
, 0))
11573 && can_change_dest_mode (XEXP (x
, 0), 0, mode
))
11575 inner_mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (x
, 0)));
11576 size
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
);
11577 x
= gen_rtx_REG (mode
, REGNO (XEXP (x
, 0)));
11582 if (!(GET_CODE (x
) == LSHIFTRT
11583 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x
, 1))
11584 && size
+ INTVAL (XEXP (x
, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))
11586 wide_int mask
= wi::mask (size
, false, GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
));
11587 x
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, x
, immed_wide_int_const (mask
, mode
));
11595 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter
, array
, src
, NONCONST
)
11596 maybe_swap_commutative_operands (**iter
);
11598 rtx
*dst
= &SET_DEST (pat
);
11599 scalar_int_mode mode
;
11600 if (GET_CODE (*dst
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11601 && REG_P (XEXP (*dst
, 0))
11602 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (XEXP (*dst
, 0)), &mode
)
11603 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*dst
, 1))
11604 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*dst
, 2)))
11606 rtx reg
= XEXP (*dst
, 0);
11607 int width
= INTVAL (XEXP (*dst
, 1));
11608 int offset
= INTVAL (XEXP (*dst
, 2));
11609 int reg_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
11610 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
11611 offset
= reg_width
- width
- offset
;
11614 wide_int mask
= wi::shifted_mask (offset
, width
, true, reg_width
);
11615 wide_int mask2
= wi::shifted_mask (offset
, width
, false, reg_width
);
11616 x
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, reg
, immed_wide_int_const (mask
, mode
));
11618 y
= gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode
, SET_SRC (pat
), GEN_INT (offset
));
11621 z
= gen_rtx_AND (mode
, y
, immed_wide_int_const (mask2
, mode
));
11622 w
= gen_rtx_IOR (mode
, x
, z
);
11623 SUBST (SET_DEST (pat
), reg
);
11624 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat
), w
);
11632 /* Like recog, but we receive the address of a pointer to a new pattern.
11633 We try to match the rtx that the pointer points to.
11634 If that fails, we may try to modify or replace the pattern,
11635 storing the replacement into the same pointer object.
11637 Modifications include deletion or addition of CLOBBERs. If the
11638 instruction will still not match, we change ZERO_EXTEND and ZERO_EXTRACT
11639 to the equivalent AND and perhaps LSHIFTRT patterns, and try with that
11640 (and undo if that fails).
11642 PNOTES is a pointer to a location where any REG_UNUSED notes added for
11643 the CLOBBERs are placed.
11645 The value is the final insn code from the pattern ultimately matched,
11649 recog_for_combine (rtx
*pnewpat
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx
*pnotes
)
11651 rtx pat
= *pnewpat
;
11652 int insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat
, insn
, pnotes
);
11653 if (insn_code_number
>= 0 || check_asm_operands (pat
))
11654 return insn_code_number
;
11656 void *marker
= get_undo_marker ();
11657 bool changed
= false;
11659 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
11661 /* For an unrecognized single set of a constant, try placing it in
11662 the constant pool, if this function already uses one. */
11663 rtx src
= SET_SRC (pat
);
11664 if (CONSTANT_P (src
)
11665 && !CONST_INT_P (src
)
11666 && crtl
->uses_const_pool
)
11668 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (src
);
11669 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
11670 mode
= GET_MODE (SET_DEST (pat
));
11671 src
= force_const_mem (mode
, src
);
11674 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat
), src
);
11679 changed
= change_zero_ext (pat
);
11681 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
11684 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
11686 rtx set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
11687 if (GET_CODE (set
) == SET
)
11688 changed
|= change_zero_ext (set
);
11694 insn_code_number
= recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat
, insn
, pnotes
);
11696 if (insn_code_number
< 0)
11697 undo_to_marker (marker
);
11700 return insn_code_number
;
11703 /* Like gen_lowpart_general but for use by combine. In combine it
11704 is not possible to create any new pseudoregs. However, it is
11705 safe to create invalid memory addresses, because combine will
11706 try to recognize them and all they will do is make the combine
11709 If for some reason this cannot do its job, an rtx
11710 (clobber (const_int 0)) is returned.
11711 An insn containing that will not be recognized. */
11714 gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode omode
, rtx x
)
11716 machine_mode imode
= GET_MODE (x
);
11719 if (omode
== imode
)
11722 /* We can only support MODE being wider than a word if X is a
11723 constant integer or has a mode the same size. */
11724 if (maybe_gt (GET_MODE_SIZE (omode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
)
11725 && ! (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (x
)
11726 || known_eq (GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
), GET_MODE_SIZE (omode
))))
11729 /* X might be a paradoxical (subreg (mem)). In that case, gen_lowpart
11730 won't know what to do. So we will strip off the SUBREG here and
11731 process normally. */
11732 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
11734 x
= SUBREG_REG (x
);
11736 /* For use in case we fall down into the address adjustments
11737 further below, we need to adjust the known mode and size of
11738 x; imode and isize, since we just adjusted x. */
11739 imode
= GET_MODE (x
);
11741 if (imode
== omode
)
11745 result
= gen_lowpart_common (omode
, x
);
11752 /* Refuse to work on a volatile memory ref or one with a mode-dependent
11754 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x
)
11755 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (x
, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
)))
11758 /* If we want to refer to something bigger than the original memref,
11759 generate a paradoxical subreg instead. That will force a reload
11760 of the original memref X. */
11761 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (omode
, imode
))
11762 return gen_rtx_SUBREG (omode
, x
, 0);
11764 poly_int64 offset
= byte_lowpart_offset (omode
, imode
);
11765 return adjust_address_nv (x
, omode
, offset
);
11768 /* If X is a comparison operator, rewrite it in a new mode. This
11769 probably won't match, but may allow further simplifications. */
11770 else if (COMPARISON_P (x
)
11771 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (imode
)
11772 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (omode
))
11773 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (x
), omode
, XEXP (x
, 0), XEXP (x
, 1));
11775 /* If we couldn't simplify X any other way, just enclose it in a
11776 SUBREG. Normally, this SUBREG won't match, but some patterns may
11777 include an explicit SUBREG or we may simplify it further in combine. */
11782 if (imode
== VOIDmode
)
11784 imode
= int_mode_for_mode (omode
).require ();
11785 x
= gen_lowpart_common (imode
, x
);
11789 res
= lowpart_subreg (omode
, x
, imode
);
11795 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (omode
, const0_rtx
);
11798 /* Try to simplify a comparison between OP0 and a constant OP1,
11799 where CODE is the comparison code that will be tested, into a
11800 (CODE OP0 const0_rtx) form.
11802 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use.
11803 *POP0 and *POP1 may be updated. */
11805 static enum rtx_code
11806 simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code code
, machine_mode mode
,
11807 rtx
*pop0
, rtx
*pop1
)
11809 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
11811 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op
= INTVAL (*pop1
);
11813 /* Get the constant we are comparing against and turn off all bits
11814 not on in our mode. */
11815 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
)
11816 const_op
= trunc_int_for_mode (const_op
, mode
);
11818 /* If we are comparing against a constant power of two and the value
11819 being compared can only have that single bit nonzero (e.g., it was
11820 `and'ed with that bit), we can replace this with a comparison
11823 && (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
|| code
== GE
|| code
== GEU
11824 || code
== LT
|| code
== LTU
)
11825 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11826 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11827 && pow2p_hwi (const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))
11828 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
)
11829 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) (const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))))
11831 code
= (code
== EQ
|| code
== GE
|| code
== GEU
? NE
: EQ
);
11835 /* Similarly, if we are comparing a value known to be either -1 or
11836 0 with -1, change it to the opposite comparison against zero. */
11838 && (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
|| code
== GT
|| code
== LE
11839 || code
== GEU
|| code
== LTU
)
11840 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11841 && num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, int_mode
) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
))
11843 code
= (code
== EQ
|| code
== LE
|| code
== GEU
? NE
: EQ
);
11847 /* Do some canonicalizations based on the comparison code. We prefer
11848 comparisons against zero and then prefer equality comparisons.
11849 If we can reduce the size of a constant, we will do that too. */
11853 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1) */
11858 /* ... fall through to LE case below. */
11859 gcc_fallthrough ();
11865 /* <= C is equivalent to < (C + 1); we do this for C < 0 */
11872 /* If we are doing a <= 0 comparison on a value known to have
11873 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with == 0. */
11874 else if (const_op
== 0
11875 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11876 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11877 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
)
11878 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1)))
11884 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11889 /* ... fall through to GT below. */
11890 gcc_fallthrough ();
11896 /* > C is equivalent to >= (C + 1); we do this for C < 0. */
11903 /* If we are doing a > 0 comparison on a value known to have
11904 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with != 0. */
11905 else if (const_op
== 0
11906 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11907 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11908 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, int_mode
)
11909 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1)))
11915 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1). */
11920 /* ... fall through ... */
11921 gcc_fallthrough ();
11923 /* (unsigned) < 0x80000000 is equivalent to >= 0. */
11924 else if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11925 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11926 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))
11927 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1)))
11937 /* unsigned <= 0 is equivalent to == 0 */
11940 /* (unsigned) <= 0x7fffffff is equivalent to >= 0. */
11941 else if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11942 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11943 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
11944 == ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
11945 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1)) - 1)))
11953 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11958 /* ... fall through ... */
11959 gcc_fallthrough ();
11962 /* (unsigned) >= 0x80000000 is equivalent to < 0. */
11963 else if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11964 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11965 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))
11966 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1)))
11976 /* unsigned > 0 is equivalent to != 0 */
11979 /* (unsigned) > 0x7fffffff is equivalent to < 0. */
11980 else if (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (mode
, &int_mode
)
11981 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11982 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
11983 == (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
11984 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1)) - 1))
11995 /* Narrow non-symmetric comparison of memory and constant as e.g.
11996 x0...x7 <= 0x3fffffffffffffff into x0 <= 0x3f where x0 is the most
11997 significant byte. Likewise, transform x0...x7 >= 0x4000000000000000 into
11999 if ((code
== LEU
|| code
== LTU
|| code
== GEU
|| code
== GTU
)
12000 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (op0
), &int_mode
)
12001 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
)
12003 && !MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
)
12004 /* The optimization makes only sense for constants which are big enough
12005 so that we have a chance to chop off something at all. */
12006 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
)) > 0xff
12007 /* Ensure that we do not overflow during normalization. */
12009 || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
))
12010 < HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U
)
12011 && trunc_int_for_mode (const_op
, int_mode
) == const_op
)
12013 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
12014 = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
);
12015 enum rtx_code adjusted_code
;
12017 /* Normalize code to either LEU or GEU. */
12021 adjusted_code
= LEU
;
12023 else if (code
== GTU
)
12026 adjusted_code
= GEU
;
12029 adjusted_code
= code
;
12031 scalar_int_mode narrow_mode_iter
;
12032 FOR_EACH_MODE_UNTIL (narrow_mode_iter
, int_mode
)
12034 unsigned nbits
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
)
12035 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (narrow_mode_iter
);
12036 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< nbits
) - 1;
12037 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT lower_bits
= n
& mask
;
12038 if ((adjusted_code
== LEU
&& lower_bits
== mask
)
12039 || (adjusted_code
== GEU
&& lower_bits
== 0))
12046 if (narrow_mode_iter
< int_mode
)
12048 if (dump_file
&& (dump_flags
& TDF_DETAILS
))
12051 dump_file
, "narrow comparison from mode %s to %s: (MEM %s "
12052 HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_HEX
") to (MEM %s "
12053 HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_HEX
").\n", GET_MODE_NAME (int_mode
),
12054 GET_MODE_NAME (narrow_mode_iter
), GET_RTX_NAME (code
),
12055 (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (int_mode
),
12056 GET_RTX_NAME (adjusted_code
), n
);
12058 poly_int64 offset
= (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
12060 : (GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode
)
12061 - GET_MODE_SIZE (narrow_mode_iter
)));
12062 *pop0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, narrow_mode_iter
, offset
);
12063 *pop1
= gen_int_mode (n
, narrow_mode_iter
);
12064 return adjusted_code
;
12068 *pop1
= GEN_INT (const_op
);
12072 /* Simplify a comparison between *POP0 and *POP1 where CODE is the
12073 comparison code that will be tested.
12075 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use. *POP0 and
12076 *POP1 may be updated.
12078 It is possible that we might detect that a comparison is either always
12079 true or always false. However, we do not perform general constant
12080 folding in combine, so this knowledge isn't useful. Such tautologies
12081 should have been detected earlier. Hence we ignore all such cases. */
12083 static enum rtx_code
12084 simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code code
, rtx
*pop0
, rtx
*pop1
)
12090 scalar_int_mode mode
, inner_mode
, tmode
;
12091 opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter
;
12093 /* Try a few ways of applying the same transformation to both operands. */
12096 /* The test below this one won't handle SIGN_EXTENDs on these machines,
12097 so check specially. */
12098 if (!WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
12099 && code
!= GTU
&& code
!= GEU
&& code
!= LTU
&& code
!= LEU
12100 && GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFTRT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == ASHIFTRT
12101 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFT
12102 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1
, 0)) == ASHIFT
12103 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
12104 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
12105 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (op0
), &mode
)
12106 && (is_a
<scalar_int_mode
>
12107 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0))), &inner_mode
))
12108 && inner_mode
== GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 0)))
12109 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12110 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (op1
, 1)
12111 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)
12112 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 1)
12113 && (INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12114 == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
12115 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
))))
12117 op0
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0));
12118 op1
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1
, 0), 0));
12121 /* If both operands are the same constant shift, see if we can ignore the
12122 shift. We can if the shift is a rotate or if the bits shifted out of
12123 this shift are known to be zero for both inputs and if the type of
12124 comparison is compatible with the shift. */
12125 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == GET_CODE (op1
)
12126 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
))
12127 && ((GET_CODE (op0
) == ROTATE
&& (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
))
12128 || ((GET_CODE (op0
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFT
)
12129 && (code
!= GT
&& code
!= LT
&& code
!= GE
&& code
!= LE
))
12130 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFTRT
12131 && (code
!= GTU
&& code
!= LTU
12132 && code
!= GEU
&& code
!= LEU
)))
12133 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12134 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) >= 0
12135 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12136 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (op1
, 1))
12138 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
12139 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
12140 int shift_count
= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12142 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == LSHIFTRT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFTRT
)
12143 mask
&= (mask
>> shift_count
) << shift_count
;
12144 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == ASHIFT
)
12145 mask
= (mask
& (mask
<< shift_count
)) >> shift_count
;
12147 if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
) & ~mask
) == 0
12148 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op1
, 0), mode
) & ~mask
) == 0)
12149 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0), op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0);
12154 /* If both operands are AND's of a paradoxical SUBREG by constant, the
12155 SUBREGs are of the same mode, and, in both cases, the AND would
12156 be redundant if the comparison was done in the narrower mode,
12157 do the comparison in the narrower mode (e.g., we are AND'ing with 1
12158 and the operand's possibly nonzero bits are 0xffffff01; in that case
12159 if we only care about QImode, we don't need the AND). This case
12160 occurs if the output mode of an scc insn is not SImode and
12161 STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 (e.g., the 386).
12163 Similarly, check for a case where the AND's are ZERO_EXTEND
12164 operations from some narrower mode even though a SUBREG is not
12167 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == AND
12168 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12169 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op1
, 1)))
12171 rtx inner_op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12172 rtx inner_op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0);
12173 HOST_WIDE_INT c0
= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12174 HOST_WIDE_INT c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (op1
, 1));
12175 bool changed
= false;
12177 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (inner_op0
)
12178 && GET_CODE (inner_op1
) == SUBREG
12179 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
)))
12180 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
))
12181 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
)))
12182 && ((~c0
) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
),
12183 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
)))) == 0
12184 && ((~c1
) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
),
12185 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
)))) == 0)
12187 op0
= SUBREG_REG (inner_op0
);
12188 op1
= SUBREG_REG (inner_op1
);
12190 /* The resulting comparison is always unsigned since we masked
12191 off the original sign bit. */
12192 code
= unsigned_condition (code
);
12198 FOR_EACH_MODE_UNTIL (tmode
,
12199 as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (op0
)))
12200 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) c0
== GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
))
12202 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode
, inner_op0
);
12203 op1
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode
, inner_op1
);
12204 code
= unsigned_condition (code
);
12213 /* If both operands are NOT, we can strip off the outer operation
12214 and adjust the comparison code for swapped operands; similarly for
12215 NEG, except that this must be an equality comparison. */
12216 else if ((GET_CODE (op0
) == NOT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == NOT
)
12217 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == NEG
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == NEG
12218 && (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
)))
12219 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0), op1
= XEXP (op1
, 0), code
= swap_condition (code
);
12225 /* If the first operand is a constant, swap the operands and adjust the
12226 comparison code appropriately, but don't do this if the second operand
12227 is already a constant integer. */
12228 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0
, op1
))
12230 std::swap (op0
, op1
);
12231 code
= swap_condition (code
);
12234 /* We now enter a loop during which we will try to simplify the comparison.
12235 For the most part, we only are concerned with comparisons with zero,
12236 but some things may really be comparisons with zero but not start
12237 out looking that way. */
12239 while (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
12241 machine_mode raw_mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
12242 scalar_int_mode int_mode
;
12243 int equality_comparison_p
;
12244 int sign_bit_comparison_p
;
12245 int unsigned_comparison_p
;
12246 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op
;
12248 /* We only want to handle integral modes. This catches VOIDmode,
12249 CCmode, and the floating-point modes. An exception is that we
12250 can handle VOIDmode if OP0 is a COMPARE or a comparison
12253 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (raw_mode
) != MODE_INT
12254 && ! (raw_mode
== VOIDmode
12255 && (GET_CODE (op0
) == COMPARE
|| COMPARISON_P (op0
))))
12258 /* Try to simplify the compare to constant, possibly changing the
12259 comparison op, and/or changing op1 to zero. */
12260 code
= simplify_compare_const (code
, raw_mode
, &op0
, &op1
);
12261 const_op
= INTVAL (op1
);
12263 /* Compute some predicates to simplify code below. */
12265 equality_comparison_p
= (code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
);
12266 sign_bit_comparison_p
= ((code
== LT
|| code
== GE
) && const_op
== 0);
12267 unsigned_comparison_p
= (code
== LTU
|| code
== LEU
|| code
== GTU
12270 /* If this is a sign bit comparison and we can do arithmetic in
12271 MODE, say that we will only be needing the sign bit of OP0. */
12272 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
12273 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (raw_mode
, &int_mode
)
12274 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (int_mode
))
12275 op0
= force_to_mode (op0
, int_mode
,
12277 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode
) - 1), false);
12279 if (COMPARISON_P (op0
))
12281 /* We can't do anything if OP0 is a condition code value, rather
12282 than an actual data value. */
12284 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0))) == MODE_CC
)
12287 /* Get the two operands being compared. */
12288 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == COMPARE
)
12289 tem
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), tem1
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12291 tem
= XEXP (op0
, 0), tem1
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12293 /* Check for the cases where we simply want the result of the
12294 earlier test or the opposite of that result. */
12295 if (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
12296 || (val_signbit_known_set_p (raw_mode
, STORE_FLAG_VALUE
)
12297 && (code
== LT
|| code
== GE
)))
12299 enum rtx_code new_code
;
12300 if (code
== LT
|| code
== NE
)
12301 new_code
= GET_CODE (op0
);
12303 new_code
= reversed_comparison_code (op0
, NULL
);
12305 if (new_code
!= UNKNOWN
)
12316 if (raw_mode
== VOIDmode
)
12318 scalar_int_mode mode
= as_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (raw_mode
);
12320 /* Now try cases based on the opcode of OP0. If none of the cases
12321 does a "continue", we exit this loop immediately after the
12324 unsigned int mode_width
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
);
12325 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
12326 switch (GET_CODE (op0
))
12329 /* If we are extracting a single bit from a variable position in
12330 a constant that has only a single bit set and are comparing it
12331 with zero, we can convert this into an equality comparison
12332 between the position and the location of the single bit. */
12333 /* Except we can't if SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED is set, since we might
12334 have already reduced the shift count modulo the word size. */
12335 if (!SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
12336 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 0))
12337 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == const1_rtx
12338 && equality_comparison_p
&& const_op
== 0
12339 && (i
= exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 0)))) >= 0)
12341 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
12342 i
= BITS_PER_WORD
- 1 - i
;
12344 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 2);
12348 /* Result is nonzero iff shift count is equal to I. */
12349 code
= reverse_condition (code
);
12356 tem
= expand_compound_operation (op0
);
12365 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NOT of the constant. */
12366 if (equality_comparison_p
12367 && (tem
= simplify_unary_operation (NOT
, mode
, op1
, mode
)) != 0)
12369 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12374 /* If just looking at the sign bit, reverse the sense of the
12376 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
)
12378 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12379 code
= (code
== GE
? LT
: GE
);
12385 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NEG of the constant. */
12386 if (equality_comparison_p
12387 && (tem
= simplify_unary_operation (NEG
, mode
, op1
, mode
)) != 0)
12389 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12394 /* The remaining cases only apply to comparisons with zero. */
12398 /* When X is ABS or is known positive,
12399 (neg X) is < 0 if and only if X != 0. */
12401 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
12402 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ABS
12403 || (mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12404 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
12405 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)))
12408 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12409 code
= (code
== LT
? NE
: EQ
);
12413 /* If we have NEG of something whose two high-order bits are the
12414 same, we know that "(-a) < 0" is equivalent to "a > 0". */
12415 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, mode
) >= 2)
12417 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12418 code
= swap_condition (code
);
12424 /* If we are testing equality and our count is a constant, we
12425 can perform the inverse operation on our RHS. */
12426 if (equality_comparison_p
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12427 && (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (ROTATERT
, mode
,
12428 op1
, XEXP (op0
, 1))) != 0)
12430 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12435 /* If we are doing a < 0 or >= 0 comparison, it means we are testing
12436 a particular bit. Convert it to an AND of a constant of that
12437 bit. This will be converted into a ZERO_EXTRACT. */
12438 if (const_op
== 0 && sign_bit_comparison_p
12439 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12440 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12441 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) < mode_width
)
12443 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
12446 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)))));
12447 code
= (code
== LT
? NE
: EQ
);
12451 /* Fall through. */
12454 /* ABS is ignorable inside an equality comparison with zero. */
12455 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
)
12457 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12463 /* Can simplify (compare (zero/sign_extend FOO) CONST) to
12464 (compare FOO CONST) if CONST fits in FOO's mode and we
12465 are either testing inequality or have an unsigned
12466 comparison with ZERO_EXTEND or a signed comparison with
12467 SIGN_EXTEND. But don't do it if we don't have a compare
12468 insn of the given mode, since we'd have to revert it
12469 later on, and then we wouldn't know whether to sign- or
12471 if (is_int_mode (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)), &mode
)
12472 && ! unsigned_comparison_p
12473 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
12474 && trunc_int_for_mode (const_op
, mode
) == const_op
12475 && have_insn_for (COMPARE
, mode
))
12477 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12483 /* Check for the case where we are comparing A - C1 with C2, that is
12485 (subreg:MODE (plus (A) (-C1))) op (C2)
12487 with C1 a constant, and try to lift the SUBREG, i.e. to do the
12488 comparison in the wider mode. One of the following two conditions
12489 must be true in order for this to be valid:
12491 1. The mode extension results in the same bit pattern being added
12492 on both sides and the comparison is equality or unsigned. As
12493 C2 has been truncated to fit in MODE, the pattern can only be
12496 2. The mode extension results in the sign bit being copied on
12499 The difficulty here is that we have predicates for A but not for
12500 (A - C1) so we need to check that C1 is within proper bounds so
12501 as to perturbate A as little as possible. */
12503 if (mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12504 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0
)
12505 && is_a
<scalar_int_mode
> (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)),
12507 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) > mode_width
12508 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)) == PLUS
12509 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0
), 1)))
12511 rtx a
= XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0
), 0);
12512 HOST_WIDE_INT c1
= -INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0
), 1));
12515 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) c1
12516 < HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)
12517 && (equality_comparison_p
|| unsigned_comparison_p
)
12518 /* (A - C1) zero-extends if it is positive and sign-extends
12519 if it is negative, C2 both zero- and sign-extends. */
12520 && (((nonzero_bits (a
, inner_mode
)
12521 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0
12523 /* (A - C1) sign-extends if it is positive and 1-extends
12524 if it is negative, C2 both sign- and 1-extends. */
12525 || (num_sign_bit_copies (a
, inner_mode
)
12526 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
)
12529 || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) c1
12530 < HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 2)
12531 /* (A - C1) always sign-extends, like C2. */
12532 && num_sign_bit_copies (a
, inner_mode
)
12533 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
)
12534 - (mode_width
- 1))))
12536 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
);
12541 /* If the inner mode is narrower and we are extracting the low part,
12542 we can treat the SUBREG as if it were a ZERO_EXTEND. */
12543 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0
))
12545 else if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0
)
12546 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
12547 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)), &inner_mode
)
12548 && (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
12549 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12550 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (op0
)
12551 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0
), inner_mode
)
12552 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
12554 /* Remove outer subregs that don't do anything. */
12555 tem
= gen_lowpart (inner_mode
, op1
);
12557 if ((nonzero_bits (tem
, inner_mode
)
12558 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
12560 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
);
12572 if (is_int_mode (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)), &mode
)
12573 && (unsigned_comparison_p
|| equality_comparison_p
)
12574 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
12575 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
<= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)
12577 && have_insn_for (COMPARE
, mode
))
12579 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12585 /* (eq (plus X A) B) -> (eq X (minus B A)). We can only do
12586 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
12588 if (equality_comparison_p
12589 && (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (MINUS
, mode
,
12590 op1
, XEXP (op0
, 1))) != 0)
12592 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12597 /* (plus (abs X) (const_int -1)) is < 0 if and only if X == 0. */
12598 if (const_op
== 0 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == constm1_rtx
12599 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ABS
&& sign_bit_comparison_p
)
12601 op0
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0);
12602 code
= (code
== LT
? EQ
: NE
);
12608 /* We used to optimize signed comparisons against zero, but that
12609 was incorrect. Unsigned comparisons against zero (GTU, LEU)
12610 arrive here as equality comparisons, or (GEU, LTU) are
12611 optimized away. No need to special-case them. */
12613 /* (eq (minus A B) C) -> (eq A (plus B C)) or
12614 (eq B (minus A C)), whichever simplifies. We can only do
12615 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
12617 if (equality_comparison_p
12618 && (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (PLUS
, mode
,
12619 XEXP (op0
, 1), op1
)) != 0)
12621 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12626 if (equality_comparison_p
12627 && (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (MINUS
, mode
,
12628 XEXP (op0
, 0), op1
)) != 0)
12630 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12635 /* The sign bit of (minus (ashiftrt X C) X), where C is the number
12636 of bits in X minus 1, is one iff X > 0. */
12637 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
12638 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1))
12639 && UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)) == mode_width
- 1
12640 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12642 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12643 code
= (code
== GE
? LE
: GT
);
12649 /* (eq (xor A B) C) -> (eq A (xor B C)). This is a simplification
12650 if C is zero or B is a constant. */
12651 if (equality_comparison_p
12652 && (tem
= simplify_binary_operation (XOR
, mode
,
12653 XEXP (op0
, 1), op1
)) != 0)
12655 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12663 /* The sign bit of (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) is nonzero
12665 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == PLUS
12666 && XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
12667 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12669 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
12670 code
= (code
== GE
? GT
: LE
);
12676 /* Convert (and (xshift 1 X) Y) to (and (lshiftrt Y X) 1). This
12677 will be converted to a ZERO_EXTRACT later. */
12678 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12679 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFT
12680 && XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
)
12682 op0
= gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode
, XEXP (op0
, 1),
12683 XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1));
12684 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, op0
, 1);
12688 /* If we are comparing (and (lshiftrt X C1) C2) for equality with
12689 zero and X is a comparison and C1 and C2 describe only bits set
12690 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE, we can compare with X. */
12691 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12692 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12693 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12694 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
12695 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1))
12696 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)) >= 0
12697 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12699 mask
= ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12700 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)));
12701 if ((~STORE_FLAG_VALUE
& mask
) == 0
12702 && (COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0))
12703 || ((tem
= get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0))) != 0
12704 && COMPARISON_P (tem
))))
12706 op0
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0);
12711 /* If we are doing an equality comparison of an AND of a bit equal
12712 to the sign bit, replace this with a LT or GE comparison of
12713 the underlying value. */
12714 if (equality_comparison_p
12716 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12717 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12718 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12719 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (mode_width
- 1)))
12721 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12722 code
= (code
== EQ
? GE
: LT
);
12726 /* If this AND operation is really a ZERO_EXTEND from a narrower
12727 mode, the constant fits within that mode, and this is either an
12728 equality or unsigned comparison, try to do this comparison in
12733 (ne:DI (and:DI (reg:DI 4) (const_int 0xffffffff)) (const_int 0))
12734 -> (ne:DI (reg:SI 4) (const_int 0))
12736 unless TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION allows it or the register is
12737 known to hold a value of the required mode the
12738 transformation is invalid. */
12739 if ((equality_comparison_p
|| unsigned_comparison_p
)
12740 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12741 && (i
= exact_log2 ((UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12742 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode
))
12744 && const_op
>> i
== 0
12745 && int_mode_for_size (i
, 1).exists (&tmode
))
12747 op0
= gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode
, XEXP (op0
, 0));
12751 /* If this is (and:M1 (subreg:M1 X:M2 0) (const_int C1)) where C1
12752 fits in both M1 and M2 and the SUBREG is either paradoxical
12753 or represents the low part, permute the SUBREG and the AND
12755 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == SUBREG
12756 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12758 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c1
= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12759 /* Require an integral mode, to avoid creating something like
12761 if ((is_a
<scalar_int_mode
>
12762 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0
, 0))), &tmode
))
12763 /* It is unsafe to commute the AND into the SUBREG if the
12764 SUBREG is paradoxical and WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS is
12765 not defined. As originally written the upper bits
12766 have a defined value due to the AND operation.
12767 However, if we commute the AND inside the SUBREG then
12768 they no longer have defined values and the meaning of
12769 the code has been changed.
12770 Also C1 should not change value in the smaller mode,
12771 see PR67028 (a positive C1 can become negative in the
12772 smaller mode, so that the AND does no longer mask the
12774 && ((WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
12775 && mode_width
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
12776 && mode_width
<= BITS_PER_WORD
12777 && trunc_int_for_mode (c1
, tmode
) == (HOST_WIDE_INT
) c1
)
12778 || (mode_width
<= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
12779 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (op0
, 0))))
12780 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12781 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode
)
12782 && (c1
& ~mask
) == 0
12783 && (c1
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)) == 0
12785 && c1
!= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
))
12787 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, tmode
,
12788 SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0
, 0)),
12789 gen_int_mode (c1
, tmode
));
12790 op0
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op0
);
12795 /* Convert (ne (and (not X) 1) 0) to (eq (and X 1) 0). */
12796 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12797 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == const1_rtx
12798 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == NOT
)
12800 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
,
12801 XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), 1);
12802 code
= (code
== NE
? EQ
: NE
);
12806 /* Convert (ne (and (lshiftrt (not X)) 1) 0) to
12807 (eq (and (lshiftrt X) 1) 0).
12808 Also handle the case where (not X) is expressed using xor. */
12809 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12810 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == const1_rtx
12811 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
)
12813 rtx shift_op
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0);
12814 rtx shift_count
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12816 if (GET_CODE (shift_op
) == NOT
12817 || (GET_CODE (shift_op
) == XOR
12818 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (shift_op
, 1))
12819 && CONST_INT_P (shift_count
)
12820 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
)
12821 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (shift_op
, 1))
12822 == HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12823 << INTVAL (shift_count
))))
12826 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode
, XEXP (shift_op
, 0), shift_count
);
12827 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, op0
, 1);
12828 code
= (code
== NE
? EQ
: NE
);
12835 /* If we have (compare (ashift FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12836 the high order N bits of FOO (N+1 if an inequality comparison)
12837 are known to be zero, we can do this by comparing FOO with C
12838 shifted right N bits so long as the low-order N bits of C are
12840 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12841 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) >= 0
12842 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) + ! equality_comparison_p
)
12843 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12844 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12845 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12847 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12848 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
12849 & ~(mask
>> (INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12850 + ! equality_comparison_p
))) == 0)
12852 /* We must perform a logical shift, not an arithmetic one,
12853 as we want the top N bits of C to be zero. */
12854 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT temp
= const_op
& GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
12856 temp
>>= INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12857 op1
= gen_int_mode (temp
, mode
);
12858 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12862 /* If we are doing a sign bit comparison, it means we are testing
12863 a particular bit. Convert it to the appropriate AND. */
12864 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12865 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
12867 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
12870 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)))));
12871 code
= (code
== LT
? NE
: EQ
);
12875 /* If this an equality comparison with zero and we are shifting
12876 the low bit to the sign bit, we can convert this to an AND of the
12878 if (const_op
== 0 && equality_comparison_p
12879 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12880 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == mode_width
- 1)
12882 op0
= simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX
, mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12888 /* If this is an equality comparison with zero, we can do this
12889 as a logical shift, which might be much simpler. */
12890 if (equality_comparison_p
&& const_op
== 0
12891 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
12893 op0
= simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX
, LSHIFTRT
, mode
,
12895 INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)));
12899 /* If OP0 is a sign extension and CODE is not an unsigned comparison,
12900 do the comparison in a narrower mode. */
12901 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12902 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12903 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == ASHIFT
12904 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1)
12905 && (int_mode_for_size (mode_width
- INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)), 1)
12907 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12908 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
) >> 1) + 1)
12909 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)))
12911 op0
= gen_lowpart (tmode
, XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0));
12915 /* Likewise if OP0 is a PLUS of a sign extension with a
12916 constant, which is usually represented with the PLUS
12917 between the shifts. */
12918 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12919 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12920 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == PLUS
12921 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1))
12922 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT
12923 && XEXP (op0
, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), 1)
12924 && (int_mode_for_size (mode_width
- INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)), 1)
12926 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12927 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
) >> 1) + 1)
12928 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode
)))
12930 rtx inner
= XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 0), 0);
12931 rtx add_const
= XEXP (XEXP (op0
, 0), 1);
12932 rtx new_const
= simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFTRT
, mode
,
12933 add_const
, XEXP (op0
, 1));
12935 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, tmode
,
12936 gen_lowpart (tmode
, inner
),
12943 /* If we have (compare (xshiftrt FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12944 the low order N bits of FOO are known to be zero, we can do this
12945 by comparing FOO with C shifted left N bits so long as no
12946 overflow occurs. Even if the low order N bits of FOO aren't known
12947 to be zero, if the comparison is >= or < we can use the same
12948 optimization and for > or <= by setting all the low
12949 order N bits in the comparison constant. */
12950 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12951 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) > 0
12952 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12953 && mode_width
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12954 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12955 + (GET_CODE (op0
) != LSHIFTRT
12956 ? ((GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) >> 1)
12959 <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))))
12961 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits
12962 = (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
12963 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
12964 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))) - 1));
12965 if (low_bits
== 0 || !equality_comparison_p
)
12967 /* If the shift was logical, then we must make the condition
12969 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == LSHIFTRT
)
12970 code
= unsigned_condition (code
);
12972 const_op
= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) const_op
12973 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1));
12975 && (code
== GT
|| code
== GTU
12976 || code
== LE
|| code
== LEU
))
12978 |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1
<< INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))) - 1);
12979 op1
= GEN_INT (const_op
);
12980 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12985 /* If we are using this shift to extract just the sign bit, we
12986 can replace this with an LT or GE comparison. */
12988 && (equality_comparison_p
|| sign_bit_comparison_p
)
12989 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1))
12990 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == mode_width
- 1)
12992 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
12993 code
= (code
== NE
|| code
== GT
? LT
: GE
);
13005 /* Now make any compound operations involved in this comparison. Then,
13006 check for an outmost SUBREG on OP0 that is not doing anything or is
13007 paradoxical. The latter transformation must only be performed when
13008 it is known that the "extra" bits will be the same in op0 and op1 or
13009 that they don't matter. There are three cases to consider:
13011 1. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a register. In this case the bits are don't
13012 care bits and we can assume they have any convenient value. So
13013 making the transformation is safe.
13015 2. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is UNKNOWN.
13016 In this case the upper bits of op0 are undefined. We should not make
13017 the simplification in that case as we do not know the contents of
13020 3. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is not UNKNOWN.
13021 In that case we know those bits are zeros or ones. We must also be
13022 sure that they are the same as the upper bits of op1.
13024 We can never remove a SUBREG for a non-equality comparison because
13025 the sign bit is in a different place in the underlying object. */
13027 rtx_code op0_mco_code
= SET
;
13028 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
13029 op0_mco_code
= code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
? EQ
: COMPARE
;
13031 op0
= make_compound_operation (op0
, op0_mco_code
);
13032 op1
= make_compound_operation (op1
, SET
);
13034 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
&& subreg_lowpart_p (op0
)
13035 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (op0
), &mode
)
13036 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0
)), &inner_mode
)
13037 && (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
))
13039 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0
))
13041 /* For paradoxical subregs, allow case 1 as above. Case 3 isn't
13043 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (op0
)))
13045 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
);
13046 op1
= gen_lowpart (inner_mode
, op1
);
13049 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
13050 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0
), inner_mode
)
13051 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
13053 tem
= gen_lowpart (inner_mode
, op1
);
13055 if ((nonzero_bits (tem
, inner_mode
) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)
13056 op0
= SUBREG_REG (op0
), op1
= tem
;
13060 /* We now do the opposite procedure: Some machines don't have compare
13061 insns in all modes. If OP0's mode is an integer mode smaller than a
13062 word and we can't do a compare in that mode, see if there is a larger
13063 mode for which we can do the compare. There are a number of cases in
13064 which we can use the wider mode. */
13066 if (is_int_mode (GET_MODE (op0
), &mode
)
13067 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < UNITS_PER_WORD
13068 && ! have_insn_for (COMPARE
, mode
))
13069 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter
, mode
)
13071 tmode
= tmode_iter
.require ();
13072 if (!HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode
))
13074 if (have_insn_for (COMPARE
, tmode
))
13078 /* If this is a test for negative, we can make an explicit
13079 test of the sign bit. Test this first so we can use
13080 a paradoxical subreg to extend OP0. */
13082 if (op1
== const0_rtx
&& (code
== LT
|| code
== GE
)
13083 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
13085 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sign
13086 = HOST_WIDE_INT_1U
<< (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) - 1);
13087 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, tmode
,
13088 gen_lowpart (tmode
, op0
),
13089 gen_int_mode (sign
, tmode
));
13090 code
= (code
== LT
) ? NE
: EQ
;
13094 /* If the only nonzero bits in OP0 and OP1 are those in the
13095 narrower mode and this is an equality or unsigned comparison,
13096 we can use the wider mode. Similarly for sign-extended
13097 values, in which case it is true for all comparisons. */
13098 zero_extended
= ((code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
13099 || code
== GEU
|| code
== GTU
13100 || code
== LEU
|| code
== LTU
)
13101 && (nonzero_bits (op0
, tmode
)
13102 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0
13103 && ((CONST_INT_P (op1
)
13104 || (nonzero_bits (op1
, tmode
)
13105 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode
)) == 0)));
13108 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (op0
, tmode
)
13109 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
13110 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))
13111 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op1
, tmode
)
13112 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode
)
13113 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)))))
13115 /* If OP0 is an AND and we don't have an AND in MODE either,
13116 make a new AND in the proper mode. */
13117 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == AND
13118 && !have_insn_for (AND
, mode
))
13119 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (AND
, tmode
,
13120 gen_lowpart (tmode
,
13122 gen_lowpart (tmode
,
13128 op0
= simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, tmode
,
13130 op1
= simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND
, tmode
,
13135 op0
= simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND
, tmode
,
13137 op1
= simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND
, tmode
,
13146 /* We may have changed the comparison operands. Re-canonicalize. */
13147 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0
, op1
))
13149 std::swap (op0
, op1
);
13150 code
= swap_condition (code
);
13153 /* If this machine only supports a subset of valid comparisons, see if we
13154 can convert an unsupported one into a supported one. */
13155 target_canonicalize_comparison (&code
, &op0
, &op1
, 0);
13163 /* Utility function for record_value_for_reg. Count number of
13168 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
13172 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code
) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
13173 || GET_RTX_CLASS (code
) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
)
13175 rtx x0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
13176 rtx x1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
13179 return 1 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0
);
13181 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1
)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
13182 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1
)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
)
13183 && (x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) || x0
== XEXP (x1
, 1)))
13184 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0
)
13185 + count_rtxs (x
== XEXP (x1
, 0)
13186 ? XEXP (x1
, 1) : XEXP (x1
, 0));
13188 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0
)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
13189 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0
)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
)
13190 && (x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) || x1
== XEXP (x0
, 1)))
13191 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x1
)
13192 + count_rtxs (x
== XEXP (x0
, 0)
13193 ? XEXP (x0
, 1) : XEXP (x0
, 0));
13196 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
13197 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
13199 ret
+= count_rtxs (XEXP (x
, i
));
13200 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
13201 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13202 ret
+= count_rtxs (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
13207 /* Utility function for following routine. Called when X is part of a value
13208 being stored into last_set_value. Sets last_set_table_tick
13209 for each register mentioned. Similar to mention_regs in cse.cc */
13212 update_table_tick (rtx x
)
13214 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
13215 const char *fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
13220 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
13221 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (x
);
13224 for (r
= regno
; r
< endregno
; r
++)
13226 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[r
];
13227 rsp
->last_set_table_tick
= label_tick
;
13233 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
13236 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
13237 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
13239 if (i
== 0 && ARITHMETIC_P (x
))
13241 /* Note that at this point x1 has already been
13243 rtx x0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
13244 rtx x1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
13246 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then there is no need to
13251 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then while
13252 processing x1, x0 has already been processed. Thus we
13253 are done with x. */
13254 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1
)
13255 && (x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) || x0
== XEXP (x1
, 1)))
13258 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then we
13259 still have to process the rest of x0. */
13260 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0
)
13261 && (x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) || x1
== XEXP (x0
, 1)))
13263 update_table_tick (XEXP (x0
, x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) ? 1 : 0));
13268 update_table_tick (XEXP (x
, i
));
13270 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
13271 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13272 update_table_tick (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
13275 /* Record that REG is set to VALUE in insn INSN. If VALUE is zero, we
13276 are saying that the register is clobbered and we no longer know its
13277 value. If INSN is zero, don't update reg_stat[].last_set; this is
13278 only permitted with VALUE also zero and is used to invalidate the
13282 record_value_for_reg (rtx reg
, rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx value
)
13284 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (reg
);
13285 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (reg
);
13287 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13289 /* If VALUE contains REG and we have a previous value for REG, substitute
13290 the previous value. */
13291 if (value
&& insn
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, value
))
13295 /* Set things up so get_last_value is allowed to see anything set up to
13297 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
13298 tem
= get_last_value (reg
);
13300 /* If TEM is simply a binary operation with two CLOBBERs as operands,
13301 it isn't going to be useful and will take a lot of time to process,
13302 so just use the CLOBBER. */
13306 if (ARITHMETIC_P (tem
)
13307 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem
, 0)) == CLOBBER
13308 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem
, 1)) == CLOBBER
)
13309 tem
= XEXP (tem
, 0);
13310 else if (count_occurrences (value
, reg
, 1) >= 2)
13312 /* If there are two or more occurrences of REG in VALUE,
13313 prevent the value from growing too much. */
13314 if (count_rtxs (tem
) > param_max_last_value_rtl
)
13315 tem
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (tem
), const0_rtx
);
13318 value
= replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value
), reg
, tem
);
13322 /* For each register modified, show we don't know its value, that
13323 we don't know about its bitwise content, that its value has been
13324 updated, and that we don't know the location of the death of the
13326 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
13328 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
13331 rsp
->last_set
= insn
;
13333 rsp
->last_set_value
= 0;
13334 rsp
->last_set_mode
= VOIDmode
;
13335 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
= 0;
13336 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
= 0;
13337 rsp
->last_death
= 0;
13338 rsp
->truncated_to_mode
= VOIDmode
;
13341 /* Mark registers that are being referenced in this value. */
13343 update_table_tick (value
);
13345 /* Now update the status of each register being set.
13346 If someone is using this register in this block, set this register
13347 to invalid since we will get confused between the two lives in this
13348 basic block. This makes using this register always invalid. In cse, we
13349 scan the table to invalidate all entries using this register, but this
13350 is too much work for us. */
13352 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
13354 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
13355 rsp
->last_set_label
= label_tick
;
13357 || (value
&& rsp
->last_set_table_tick
>= label_tick_ebb_start
))
13358 rsp
->last_set_invalid
= true;
13360 rsp
->last_set_invalid
= false;
13363 /* The value being assigned might refer to X (like in "x++;"). In that
13364 case, we must replace it with (clobber (const_int 0)) to prevent
13366 rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13367 if (value
&& !get_last_value_validate (&value
, insn
, label_tick
, false))
13369 value
= copy_rtx (value
);
13370 if (!get_last_value_validate (&value
, insn
, label_tick
, true))
13374 /* For the main register being modified, update the value, the mode, the
13375 nonzero bits, and the number of sign bit copies. */
13377 rsp
->last_set_value
= value
;
13381 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (reg
);
13382 subst_low_luid
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
13383 rsp
->last_set_mode
= mode
;
13384 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
13385 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
13386 mode
= nonzero_bits_mode
;
13387 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
= nonzero_bits (value
, mode
);
13388 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
13389 = num_sign_bit_copies (value
, GET_MODE (reg
));
13393 /* Called via note_stores from record_dead_and_set_regs to handle one
13394 SET or CLOBBER in an insn. DATA is the instruction in which the
13395 set is occurring. */
13398 record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx dest
, const_rtx setter
, void *data
)
13400 rtx_insn
*record_dead_insn
= (rtx_insn
*) data
;
13402 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
13403 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
13405 if (!record_dead_insn
)
13408 record_value_for_reg (dest
, NULL
, NULL_RTX
);
13414 /* If we are setting the whole register, we know its value. */
13415 if (GET_CODE (setter
) == SET
&& dest
== SET_DEST (setter
))
13416 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
, SET_SRC (setter
));
13417 /* We can handle a SUBREG if it's the low part, but we must be
13418 careful with paradoxical SUBREGs on RISC architectures because
13419 we cannot strip e.g. an extension around a load and record the
13420 naked load since the RTL middle-end considers that the upper bits
13421 are defined according to LOAD_EXTEND_OP. */
13422 else if (GET_CODE (setter
) == SET
13423 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (setter
)) == SUBREG
13424 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (setter
)) == dest
13425 && known_le (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest
)),
13427 && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_DEST (setter
)))
13429 if (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
13430 && word_register_operation_p (SET_SRC (setter
))
13431 && paradoxical_subreg_p (SET_DEST (setter
)))
13432 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
, SET_SRC (setter
));
13433 else if (!partial_subreg_p (SET_DEST (setter
)))
13434 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
,
13435 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (dest
),
13436 SET_SRC (setter
)));
13439 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
,
13440 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (dest
),
13441 SET_SRC (setter
)));
13443 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
;
13444 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (dest
)];
13445 mask
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (setter
)));
13446 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
|= ~mask
;
13447 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
= 1;
13450 /* Otherwise show that we don't know the value. */
13452 record_value_for_reg (dest
, record_dead_insn
, NULL_RTX
);
13454 else if (MEM_P (dest
)
13455 /* Ignore pushes, they clobber nothing. */
13456 && ! push_operand (dest
, GET_MODE (dest
)))
13457 mem_last_set
= DF_INSN_LUID (record_dead_insn
);
13460 /* Update the records of when each REG was most recently set or killed
13461 for the things done by INSN. This is the last thing done in processing
13462 INSN in the combiner loop.
13464 We update reg_stat[], in particular fields last_set, last_set_value,
13465 last_set_mode, last_set_nonzero_bits, last_set_sign_bit_copies,
13466 last_death, and also the similar information mem_last_set (which insn
13467 most recently modified memory) and last_call_luid (which insn was the
13468 most recent subroutine call). */
13471 record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn
*insn
)
13476 for (link
= REG_NOTES (insn
); link
; link
= XEXP (link
, 1))
13478 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_DEAD
13479 && REG_P (XEXP (link
, 0)))
13481 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (link
, 0));
13482 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (XEXP (link
, 0));
13484 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
13486 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13488 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
13489 rsp
->last_death
= insn
;
13492 else if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link
) == REG_INC
)
13493 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (link
, 0), insn
, NULL_RTX
);
13498 HARD_REG_SET callee_clobbers
13499 = insn_callee_abi (insn
).full_and_partial_reg_clobbers ();
13500 hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi
;
13501 EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (callee_clobbers
, 0, i
, hrsi
)
13503 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13505 /* ??? We could try to preserve some information from the last
13506 set of register I if the call doesn't actually clobber
13507 (reg:last_set_mode I), which might be true for ABIs with
13508 partial clobbers. However, it would be difficult to
13509 update last_set_nonzero_bits and last_sign_bit_copies
13510 to account for the part of I that actually was clobbered.
13511 It wouldn't help much anyway, since we rarely see this
13512 situation before RA. */
13513 rsp
= ®_stat
[i
];
13514 rsp
->last_set_invalid
= true;
13515 rsp
->last_set
= insn
;
13516 rsp
->last_set_value
= 0;
13517 rsp
->last_set_mode
= VOIDmode
;
13518 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
= 0;
13519 rsp
->last_set_sign_bit_copies
= 0;
13520 rsp
->last_death
= 0;
13521 rsp
->truncated_to_mode
= VOIDmode
;
13524 last_call_luid
= mem_last_set
= DF_INSN_LUID (insn
);
13526 /* We can't combine into a call pattern. Remember, though, that
13527 the return value register is set at this LUID. We could
13528 still replace a register with the return value from the
13529 wrong subroutine call! */
13530 note_stores (insn
, record_dead_and_set_regs_1
, NULL_RTX
);
13533 note_stores (insn
, record_dead_and_set_regs_1
, insn
);
13536 /* If a SUBREG has the promoted bit set, it is in fact a property of the
13537 register present in the SUBREG, so for each such SUBREG go back and
13538 adjust nonzero and sign bit information of the registers that are
13539 known to have some zero/sign bits set.
13541 This is needed because when combine blows the SUBREGs away, the
13542 information on zero/sign bits is lost and further combines can be
13543 missed because of that. */
13546 record_promoted_value (rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx subreg
)
13548 struct insn_link
*links
;
13550 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (SUBREG_REG (subreg
));
13551 machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (subreg
);
13553 if (!HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode
))
13556 for (links
= LOG_LINKS (insn
); links
;)
13558 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13560 insn
= links
->insn
;
13561 set
= single_set (insn
);
13563 if (! set
|| !REG_P (SET_DEST (set
))
13564 || REGNO (SET_DEST (set
)) != regno
13565 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set
)) != GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subreg
)))
13567 links
= links
->next
;
13571 rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13572 if (rsp
->last_set
== insn
)
13574 if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (subreg
))
13575 rsp
->last_set_nonzero_bits
&= GET_MODE_MASK (mode
);
13578 if (REG_P (SET_SRC (set
)))
13580 regno
= REGNO (SET_SRC (set
));
13581 links
= LOG_LINKS (insn
);
13588 /* Check if X, a register, is known to contain a value already
13589 truncated to MODE. In this case we can use a subreg to refer to
13590 the truncated value even though in the generic case we would need
13591 an explicit truncation. */
13594 reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode mode
, const_rtx x
)
13596 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
13597 machine_mode truncated
= rsp
->truncated_to_mode
;
13600 || rsp
->truncation_label
< label_tick_ebb_start
)
13602 if (!partial_subreg_p (mode
, truncated
))
13604 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
, truncated
))
13609 /* If X is a hard reg or a subreg record the mode that the register is
13610 accessed in. For non-TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION targets we might be
13611 able to turn a truncate into a subreg using this information. Return true
13612 if traversing X is complete. */
13615 record_truncated_value (rtx x
)
13617 machine_mode truncated_mode
;
13618 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13620 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
13622 machine_mode original_mode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
));
13623 truncated_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
13625 if (!partial_subreg_p (truncated_mode
, original_mode
))
13628 truncated_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
13629 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (truncated_mode
, original_mode
))
13632 x
= SUBREG_REG (x
);
13634 /* ??? For hard-regs we now record everything. We might be able to
13635 optimize this using last_set_mode. */
13636 else if (REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
13637 truncated_mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
13641 rsp
= ®_stat
[REGNO (x
)];
13642 if (rsp
->truncated_to_mode
== 0
13643 || rsp
->truncation_label
< label_tick_ebb_start
13644 || partial_subreg_p (truncated_mode
, rsp
->truncated_to_mode
))
13646 rsp
->truncated_to_mode
= truncated_mode
;
13647 rsp
->truncation_label
= label_tick
;
13653 /* Callback for note_uses. Find hardregs and subregs of pseudos and
13654 the modes they are used in. This can help truning TRUNCATEs into
13658 record_truncated_values (rtx
*loc
, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
13660 subrtx_var_iterator::array_type array
;
13661 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_VAR (iter
, array
, *loc
, NONCONST
)
13662 if (record_truncated_value (*iter
))
13663 iter
.skip_subrtxes ();
13666 /* Scan X for promoted SUBREGs. For each one found,
13667 note what it implies to the registers used in it. */
13670 check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn
*insn
, rtx x
)
13672 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
13673 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x
)
13674 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x
)))
13675 record_promoted_value (insn
, x
);
13678 const char *format
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x
));
13681 for (i
= 0; i
< GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x
)); i
++)
13685 check_promoted_subreg (insn
, XEXP (x
, i
));
13689 if (XVEC (x
, i
) != 0)
13690 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13691 check_promoted_subreg (insn
, XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
13697 /* Verify that all the registers and memory references mentioned in *LOC are
13698 still valid. *LOC was part of a value set in INSN when label_tick was
13699 equal to TICK. Return false if some are not. If REPLACE is true, replace
13700 the invalid references with (clobber (const_int 0)) and return true. This
13701 replacement is useful because we often can get useful information about
13702 the form of a value (e.g., if it was produced by a shift that always
13703 produces -1 or 0) even though we don't know exactly what registers it
13704 was produced from. */
13707 get_last_value_validate (rtx
*loc
, rtx_insn
*insn
, int tick
, bool replace
)
13710 const char *fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x
));
13711 int len
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x
));
13716 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
13717 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (x
);
13720 for (j
= regno
; j
< endregno
; j
++)
13722 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[j
];
13723 if (rsp
->last_set_invalid
13724 /* If this is a pseudo-register that was only set once and not
13725 live at the beginning of the function, it is always valid. */
13726 || (! (regno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13727 && regno
< reg_n_sets_max
13728 && REG_N_SETS (regno
) == 1
13729 && (!REGNO_REG_SET_P
13730 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
),
13732 && rsp
->last_set_label
> tick
))
13735 *loc
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x
), const0_rtx
);
13742 /* If this is a memory reference, make sure that there were no stores after
13743 it that might have clobbered the value. We don't have alias info, so we
13744 assume any store invalidates it. Moreover, we only have local UIDs, so
13745 we also assume that there were stores in the intervening basic blocks. */
13746 else if (MEM_P (x
) && !MEM_READONLY_P (x
)
13747 && (tick
!= label_tick
|| DF_INSN_LUID (insn
) <= mem_last_set
))
13750 *loc
= gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x
), const0_rtx
);
13754 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
13758 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
13759 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
13761 if (i
== 1 && ARITHMETIC_P (x
))
13763 /* Note that at this point x0 has already been checked
13764 and found valid. */
13765 rtx x0
= XEXP (x
, 0);
13766 rtx x1
= XEXP (x
, 1);
13768 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then x is also valid. */
13772 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then
13773 while checking x0, x1 has already been checked. Thus
13774 it is valid and so as x. */
13775 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0
)
13776 && (x1
== XEXP (x0
, 0) || x1
== XEXP (x0
, 1)))
13779 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then x is
13780 valid iff the rest of x1 is valid. */
13781 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1
)
13782 && (x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) || x0
== XEXP (x1
, 1)))
13784 get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x1
,
13785 x0
== XEXP (x1
, 0) ? 1 : 0),
13786 insn
, tick
, replace
);
13789 if (!get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x
, i
), insn
, tick
, replace
))
13792 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
13793 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
13794 if (!get_last_value_validate (&XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
),
13795 insn
, tick
, replace
))
13799 /* If we haven't found a reason for it to be invalid, it is valid. */
13803 /* Get the last value assigned to X, if known. Some registers
13804 in the value may be replaced with (clobber (const_int 0)) if their value
13805 is known longer known reliably. */
13808 get_last_value (const_rtx x
)
13810 unsigned int regno
;
13812 reg_stat_type
*rsp
;
13814 /* If this is a non-paradoxical SUBREG, get the value of its operand and
13815 then convert it to the desired mode. If this is a paradoxical SUBREG,
13816 we cannot predict what values the "extra" bits might have. */
13817 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
13818 && subreg_lowpart_p (x
)
13819 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x
)
13820 && (value
= get_last_value (SUBREG_REG (x
))) != 0)
13821 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x
), value
);
13827 rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
13828 value
= rsp
->last_set_value
;
13830 /* If we don't have a value, or if it isn't for this basic block and
13831 it's either a hard register, set more than once, or it's a live
13832 at the beginning of the function, return 0.
13834 Because if it's not live at the beginning of the function then the reg
13835 is always set before being used (is never used without being set).
13836 And, if it's set only once, and it's always set before use, then all
13837 uses must have the same last value, even if it's not from this basic
13841 || (rsp
->last_set_label
< label_tick_ebb_start
13842 && (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13843 || regno
>= reg_n_sets_max
13844 || REG_N_SETS (regno
) != 1
13846 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)->next_bb
), regno
))))
13849 /* If the value was set in a later insn than the ones we are processing,
13850 we can't use it even if the register was only set once. */
13851 if (rsp
->last_set_label
== label_tick
13852 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp
->last_set
) >= subst_low_luid
)
13855 /* If fewer bits were set than what we are asked for now, we cannot use
13857 if (maybe_lt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (rsp
->last_set_mode
),
13858 GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x
))))
13861 /* If the value has all its registers valid, return it. */
13862 if (get_last_value_validate (&value
, rsp
->last_set
,
13863 rsp
->last_set_label
, false))
13866 /* Otherwise, make a copy and replace any invalid register with
13867 (clobber (const_int 0)). If that fails for some reason, return 0. */
13869 value
= copy_rtx (value
);
13870 if (get_last_value_validate (&value
, rsp
->last_set
,
13871 rsp
->last_set_label
, true))
13877 /* Define three variables used for communication between the following
13880 static unsigned int reg_dead_regno
, reg_dead_endregno
;
13881 static int reg_dead_flag
;
13884 /* Function called via note_stores from reg_dead_at_p.
13886 If DEST is within [reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno), set
13887 reg_dead_flag to 1 if X is a CLOBBER and to -1 it is a SET. */
13890 reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx dest
, const_rtx x
, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
13892 unsigned int regno
, endregno
;
13897 regno
= REGNO (dest
);
13898 endregno
= END_REGNO (dest
);
13899 if (reg_dead_endregno
> regno
&& reg_dead_regno
< endregno
)
13900 reg_dead_flag
= (GET_CODE (x
) == CLOBBER
) ? 1 : -1;
13903 /* Return true if REG is known to be dead at INSN.
13905 We scan backwards from INSN. If we hit a REG_DEAD note or a CLOBBER
13906 referencing REG, it is dead. If we hit a SET referencing REG, it is
13907 live. Otherwise, see if it is live or dead at the start of the basic
13908 block we are in. Hard regs marked as being live in NEWPAT_USED_REGS
13909 must be assumed to be always live. */
13912 reg_dead_at_p (rtx reg
, rtx_insn
*insn
)
13917 /* Set variables for reg_dead_at_p_1. */
13918 reg_dead_regno
= REGNO (reg
);
13919 reg_dead_endregno
= END_REGNO (reg
);
13920 reg_dead_reg
= reg
;
13924 /* Check that reg isn't mentioned in NEWPAT_USED_REGS. For fixed registers
13925 we allow the machine description to decide whether use-and-clobber
13926 patterns are OK. */
13927 if (reg_dead_regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
13929 for (i
= reg_dead_regno
; i
< reg_dead_endregno
; i
++)
13930 if (!fixed_regs
[i
] && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (newpat_used_regs
, i
))
13934 /* Scan backwards until we find a REG_DEAD note, SET, CLOBBER, or
13935 beginning of basic block. */
13936 block
= BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
);
13941 if (find_regno_note (insn
, REG_UNUSED
, reg_dead_regno
))
13944 note_stores (insn
, reg_dead_at_p_1
, NULL
);
13946 return reg_dead_flag
== 1 ? 1 : 0;
13948 if (find_regno_note (insn
, REG_DEAD
, reg_dead_regno
))
13952 if (insn
== BB_HEAD (block
))
13955 insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
);
13958 /* Look at live-in sets for the basic block that we were in. */
13959 for (i
= reg_dead_regno
; i
< reg_dead_endregno
; i
++)
13960 if (REGNO_REG_SET_P (df_get_live_in (block
), i
))
13966 /* Note hard registers in X that are used. */
13969 mark_used_regs_combine (rtx x
)
13971 RTX_CODE code
= GET_CODE (x
);
13972 unsigned int regno
;
13983 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC
:
13988 /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any hard registers inside the
13989 address as used. */
13990 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))
13991 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0));
13996 /* A hard reg in a wide mode may really be multiple registers.
13997 If so, mark all of them just like the first. */
13998 if (regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
14000 /* None of this applies to the stack, frame or arg pointers. */
14001 if (regno
== STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
14002 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
14003 && regno
== HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
14004 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
!= ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
14005 && regno
== ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
&& fixed_regs
[regno
])
14006 || regno
== FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
)
14009 add_to_hard_reg_set (&newpat_used_regs
, GET_MODE (x
), regno
);
14015 /* If setting a MEM, or a SUBREG of a MEM, then note any hard regs in
14017 rtx testreg
= SET_DEST (x
);
14019 while (GET_CODE (testreg
) == SUBREG
14020 || GET_CODE (testreg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14021 || GET_CODE (testreg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
14022 testreg
= XEXP (testreg
, 0);
14024 if (MEM_P (testreg
))
14025 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (testreg
, 0));
14027 mark_used_regs_combine (SET_SRC (x
));
14035 /* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
14038 const char *fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
14040 for (i
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
14043 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (x
, i
));
14044 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'E')
14048 for (j
= 0; j
< XVECLEN (x
, i
); j
++)
14049 mark_used_regs_combine (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
));
14055 /* Remove register number REGNO from the dead registers list of INSN.
14057 Return the note used to record the death, if there was one. */
14060 remove_death (unsigned int regno
, rtx_insn
*insn
)
14062 rtx note
= find_regno_note (insn
, REG_DEAD
, regno
);
14065 remove_note (insn
, note
);
14070 /* For each register (hardware or pseudo) used within expression X, if its
14071 death is in an instruction with luid between FROM_LUID (inclusive) and
14072 TO_INSN (exclusive), put a REG_DEAD note for that register in the
14073 list headed by PNOTES.
14075 That said, don't move registers killed by maybe_kill_insn.
14077 This is done when X is being merged by combination into TO_INSN. These
14078 notes will then be distributed as needed. */
14081 move_deaths (rtx x
, rtx maybe_kill_insn
, int from_luid
, rtx_insn
*to_insn
,
14086 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
14090 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (x
);
14091 rtx_insn
*where_dead
= reg_stat
[regno
].last_death
;
14093 /* If we do not know where the register died, it may still die between
14094 FROM_LUID and TO_INSN. If so, find it. This is PR83304. */
14095 if (!where_dead
|| DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead
) >= DF_INSN_LUID (to_insn
))
14097 rtx_insn
*insn
= prev_real_nondebug_insn (to_insn
);
14099 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn
) == BLOCK_FOR_INSN (to_insn
)
14100 && DF_INSN_LUID (insn
) >= from_luid
)
14102 if (dead_or_set_regno_p (insn
, regno
))
14104 if (find_regno_note (insn
, REG_DEAD
, regno
))
14109 insn
= prev_real_nondebug_insn (insn
);
14113 /* Don't move the register if it gets killed in between from and to. */
14114 if (maybe_kill_insn
&& reg_set_p (x
, maybe_kill_insn
)
14115 && ! reg_referenced_p (x
, maybe_kill_insn
))
14119 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (where_dead
) == BLOCK_FOR_INSN (to_insn
)
14120 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead
) >= from_luid
14121 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead
) < DF_INSN_LUID (to_insn
))
14123 rtx note
= remove_death (regno
, where_dead
);
14125 /* It is possible for the call above to return 0. This can occur
14126 when last_death points to I2 or I1 that we combined with.
14127 In that case make a new note.
14129 We must also check for the case where X is a hard register
14130 and NOTE is a death note for a range of hard registers
14131 including X. In that case, we must put REG_DEAD notes for
14132 the remaining registers in place of NOTE. */
14134 if (note
!= 0 && regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
14135 && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (x
), GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0))))
14137 unsigned int deadregno
= REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14138 unsigned int deadend
= END_REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14139 unsigned int ourend
= END_REGNO (x
);
14142 for (i
= deadregno
; i
< deadend
; i
++)
14143 if (i
< regno
|| i
>= ourend
)
14144 add_reg_note (where_dead
, REG_DEAD
, regno_reg_rtx
[i
]);
14147 /* If we didn't find any note, or if we found a REG_DEAD note that
14148 covers only part of the given reg, and we have a multi-reg hard
14149 register, then to be safe we must check for REG_DEAD notes
14150 for each register other than the first. They could have
14151 their own REG_DEAD notes lying around. */
14152 else if ((note
== 0
14154 && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0)),
14156 && regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
14157 && REG_NREGS (x
) > 1)
14159 unsigned int ourend
= END_REGNO (x
);
14160 unsigned int i
, offset
;
14164 offset
= hard_regno_nregs (regno
, GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0)));
14168 for (i
= regno
+ offset
; i
< ourend
; i
++)
14169 move_deaths (regno_reg_rtx
[i
],
14170 maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, &oldnotes
);
14173 if (note
!= 0 && GET_MODE (XEXP (note
, 0)) == GET_MODE (x
))
14175 XEXP (note
, 1) = *pnotes
;
14179 *pnotes
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, x
, *pnotes
);
14185 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == SET
)
14187 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (x
);
14189 move_deaths (SET_SRC (x
), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, pnotes
);
14191 /* In the case of a ZERO_EXTRACT, a STRICT_LOW_PART, or a SUBREG
14192 that accesses one word of a multi-word item, some
14193 piece of everything register in the expression is used by
14194 this insn, so remove any old death. */
14195 /* ??? So why do we test for equality of the sizes? */
14197 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14198 || GET_CODE (dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14199 || (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
14200 && !read_modify_subreg_p (dest
)))
14202 move_deaths (dest
, maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, pnotes
);
14206 /* If this is some other SUBREG, we know it replaces the entire
14207 value, so use that as the destination. */
14208 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == SUBREG
)
14209 dest
= SUBREG_REG (dest
);
14211 /* If this is a MEM, adjust deaths of anything used in the address.
14212 For a REG (the only other possibility), the entire value is
14213 being replaced so the old value is not used in this insn. */
14216 move_deaths (XEXP (dest
, 0), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
,
14221 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == CLOBBER
)
14224 len
= GET_RTX_LENGTH (code
);
14225 fmt
= GET_RTX_FORMAT (code
);
14227 for (i
= 0; i
< len
; i
++)
14232 for (j
= XVECLEN (x
, i
) - 1; j
>= 0; j
--)
14233 move_deaths (XVECEXP (x
, i
, j
), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
,
14236 else if (fmt
[i
] == 'e')
14237 move_deaths (XEXP (x
, i
), maybe_kill_insn
, from_luid
, to_insn
, pnotes
);
14241 /* Return true if X is the target of a bit-field assignment in BODY, the
14242 pattern of an insn. X must be a REG. */
14245 reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx x
, rtx body
)
14249 if (GET_CODE (body
) == SET
)
14251 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (body
);
14253 unsigned int regno
, tregno
, endregno
, endtregno
;
14255 if (GET_CODE (dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
)
14256 target
= XEXP (dest
, 0);
14257 else if (GET_CODE (dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
)
14258 target
= SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest
, 0));
14262 if (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
)
14263 target
= SUBREG_REG (target
);
14265 if (!REG_P (target
))
14268 tregno
= REGNO (target
), regno
= REGNO (x
);
14269 if (tregno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|| regno
>= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
14270 return target
== x
;
14272 endtregno
= end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (target
), tregno
);
14273 endregno
= end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (x
), regno
);
14275 return endregno
> tregno
&& regno
< endtregno
;
14278 else if (GET_CODE (body
) == PARALLEL
)
14279 for (i
= XVECLEN (body
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; i
--)
14280 if (reg_bitfield_target_p (x
, XVECEXP (body
, 0, i
)))
14286 /* Given a chain of REG_NOTES originally from FROM_INSN, try to place them
14287 as appropriate. I3 and I2 are the insns resulting from the combination
14288 insns including FROM (I2 may be zero).
14290 ELIM_I2 and ELIM_I1 are either zero or registers that we know will
14291 not need REG_DEAD notes because they are being substituted for. This
14292 saves searching in the most common cases.
14294 Each note in the list is either ignored or placed on some insns, depending
14295 on the type of note. */
14298 distribute_notes (rtx notes
, rtx_insn
*from_insn
, rtx_insn
*i3
, rtx_insn
*i2
,
14299 rtx elim_i2
, rtx elim_i1
, rtx elim_i0
)
14301 rtx note
, next_note
;
14303 rtx_insn
*tem_insn
;
14305 for (note
= notes
; note
; note
= next_note
)
14307 rtx_insn
*place
= 0, *place2
= 0;
14309 next_note
= XEXP (note
, 1);
14310 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note
))
14314 /* Doesn't matter much where we put this, as long as it's somewhere.
14315 It is preferable to keep these notes on branches, which is most
14316 likely to be i3. */
14320 case REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO
:
14325 gcc_assert (i2
&& JUMP_P (i2
));
14330 case REG_EH_REGION
:
14332 /* The landing pad handling needs to be kept in sync with the
14333 prerequisite checking in try_combine. */
14334 int lp_nr
= INTVAL (XEXP (note
, 0));
14335 /* A REG_EH_REGION note transfering control can only ever come
14338 gcc_assert (from_insn
== i3
);
14339 /* We are making sure there is a single effective REG_EH_REGION
14340 note and it's valid to put it on i3. */
14341 if (!insn_could_throw_p (from_insn
)
14342 && !(lp_nr
== INT_MIN
&& can_nonlocal_goto (from_insn
)))
14343 /* Throw away stray notes on insns that can never throw or
14344 make a nonlocal goto. */
14352 gcc_assert (cfun
->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
);
14353 /* If i3 can still trap preserve the note, otherwise we've
14354 combined things such that we can now prove that the
14355 instructions can't trap. Drop the note in this case. */
14356 if (may_trap_p (i3
))
14363 case REG_ARGS_SIZE
:
14364 /* ??? How to distribute between i3-i1. Assume i3 contains the
14365 entire adjustment. Assert i3 contains at least some adjust. */
14366 if (!noop_move_p (i3
))
14368 poly_int64 old_size
, args_size
= get_args_size (note
);
14369 /* fixup_args_size_notes looks at REG_NORETURN note,
14370 so ensure the note is placed there first. */
14374 for (np
= &next_note
; *np
; np
= &XEXP (*np
, 1))
14375 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (*np
) == REG_NORETURN
)
14379 XEXP (n
, 1) = REG_NOTES (i3
);
14380 REG_NOTES (i3
) = n
;
14384 old_size
= fixup_args_size_notes (PREV_INSN (i3
), i3
, args_size
);
14385 /* emit_call_1 adds for !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
14386 REG_ARGS_SIZE note to all noreturn calls, allow that here. */
14387 gcc_assert (maybe_ne (old_size
, args_size
)
14389 && !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
14390 && find_reg_note (i3
, REG_NORETURN
, NULL_RTX
)));
14397 case REG_CALL_DECL
:
14398 case REG_UNTYPED_CALL
:
14399 case REG_CALL_NOCF_CHECK
:
14400 /* These notes must remain with the call. It should not be
14401 possible for both I2 and I3 to be a call. */
14406 gcc_assert (i2
&& CALL_P (i2
));
14412 /* Any clobbers for i3 may still exist, and so we must process
14413 REG_UNUSED notes from that insn.
14415 Any clobbers from i2 or i1 can only exist if they were added by
14416 recog_for_combine. In that case, recog_for_combine created the
14417 necessary REG_UNUSED notes. Trying to keep any original
14418 REG_UNUSED notes from these insns can cause incorrect output
14419 if it is for the same register as the original i3 dest.
14420 In that case, we will notice that the register is set in i3,
14421 and then add a REG_UNUSED note for the destination of i3, which
14422 is wrong. However, it is possible to have REG_UNUSED notes from
14423 i2 or i1 for register which were both used and clobbered, so
14424 we keep notes from i2 or i1 if they will turn into REG_DEAD
14427 /* If this register is set or clobbered between FROM_INSN and I3,
14428 we should not create a note for it. */
14429 if (reg_set_between_p (XEXP (note
, 0), from_insn
, i3
))
14432 /* If this register is set or clobbered in I3, put the note there
14433 unless there is one already. */
14434 if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
)))
14436 if (from_insn
!= i3
)
14439 if (! (REG_P (XEXP (note
, 0))
14440 ? find_regno_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)))
14441 : find_reg_note (i3
, REG_UNUSED
, XEXP (note
, 0))))
14444 /* Otherwise, if this register is used by I3, then this register
14445 now dies here, so we must put a REG_DEAD note here unless there
14447 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
))
14448 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (note
, 0))
14449 ? find_regno_note (i3
, REG_DEAD
,
14450 REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)))
14451 : find_reg_note (i3
, REG_DEAD
, XEXP (note
, 0))))
14453 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note
, REG_DEAD
);
14457 /* A SET or CLOBBER of the REG_UNUSED reg has been removed,
14458 but we can't tell which at this point. We must reset any
14459 expectations we had about the value that was previously
14460 stored in the reg. ??? Ideally, we'd adjust REG_N_SETS
14461 and, if appropriate, restore its previous value, but we
14462 don't have enough information for that at this point. */
14465 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (note
, 0), NULL
, NULL_RTX
);
14467 /* Otherwise, if this register is now referenced in i2
14468 then the register used to be modified in one of the
14469 original insns. If it was i3 (say, in an unused
14470 parallel), it's now completely gone, so the note can
14471 be discarded. But if it was modified in i2, i1 or i0
14472 and we still reference it in i2, then we're
14473 referencing the previous value, and since the
14474 register was modified and REG_UNUSED, we know that
14475 the previous value is now dead. So, if we only
14476 reference the register in i2, we change the note to
14477 REG_DEAD, to reflect the previous value. However, if
14478 we're also setting or clobbering the register as
14479 scratch, we know (because the register was not
14480 referenced in i3) that it's unused, just as it was
14481 unused before, and we place the note in i2. */
14482 if (from_insn
!= i3
&& i2
&& INSN_P (i2
)
14483 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14485 if (!reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14486 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note
, REG_DEAD
);
14487 if (! (REG_P (XEXP (note
, 0))
14488 ? find_regno_note (i2
, REG_NOTE_KIND (note
),
14489 REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)))
14490 : find_reg_note (i2
, REG_NOTE_KIND (note
),
14501 /* These notes say something about results of an insn. We can
14502 only support them if they used to be on I3 in which case they
14503 remain on I3. Otherwise they are ignored.
14505 If the note refers to an expression that is not a constant, we
14506 must also ignore the note since we cannot tell whether the
14507 equivalence is still true. It might be possible to do
14508 slightly better than this (we only have a problem if I2DEST
14509 or I1DEST is present in the expression), but it doesn't
14510 seem worth the trouble. */
14512 if (from_insn
== i3
14513 && (XEXP (note
, 0) == 0 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note
, 0))))
14518 /* These notes say something about how a register is used. They must
14519 be present on any use of the register in I2 or I3. */
14520 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
)))
14523 if (i2
&& reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14532 case REG_LABEL_TARGET
:
14533 case REG_LABEL_OPERAND
:
14534 /* This can show up in several ways -- either directly in the
14535 pattern, or hidden off in the constant pool with (or without?)
14536 a REG_EQUAL note. */
14537 /* ??? Ignore the without-reg_equal-note problem for now. */
14538 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
))
14539 || ((tem_note
= find_reg_note (i3
, REG_EQUAL
, NULL_RTX
))
14540 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == LABEL_REF
14541 && label_ref_label (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == XEXP (note
, 0)))
14545 && (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
))
14546 || ((tem_note
= find_reg_note (i2
, REG_EQUAL
, NULL_RTX
))
14547 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == LABEL_REF
14548 && label_ref_label (XEXP (tem_note
, 0)) == XEXP (note
, 0))))
14556 /* For REG_LABEL_TARGET on a JUMP_P, we prefer to put the note
14557 as a JUMP_LABEL or decrement LABEL_NUSES if it's already
14559 if (place
&& JUMP_P (place
)
14560 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
14561 && (JUMP_LABEL (place
) == NULL
14562 || JUMP_LABEL (place
) == XEXP (note
, 0)))
14564 rtx label
= JUMP_LABEL (place
);
14567 JUMP_LABEL (place
) = XEXP (note
, 0);
14568 else if (LABEL_P (label
))
14569 LABEL_NUSES (label
)--;
14572 if (place2
&& JUMP_P (place2
)
14573 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
14574 && (JUMP_LABEL (place2
) == NULL
14575 || JUMP_LABEL (place2
) == XEXP (note
, 0)))
14577 rtx label
= JUMP_LABEL (place2
);
14580 JUMP_LABEL (place2
) = XEXP (note
, 0);
14581 else if (LABEL_P (label
))
14582 LABEL_NUSES (label
)--;
14588 /* This note says something about the value of a register prior
14589 to the execution of an insn. It is too much trouble to see
14590 if the note is still correct in all situations. It is better
14591 to simply delete it. */
14595 /* If we replaced the right hand side of FROM_INSN with a
14596 REG_EQUAL note, the original use of the dying register
14597 will not have been combined into I3 and I2. In such cases,
14598 FROM_INSN is guaranteed to be the first of the combined
14599 instructions, so we simply need to search back before
14600 FROM_INSN for the previous use or set of this register,
14601 then alter the notes there appropriately.
14603 If the register is used as an input in I3, it dies there.
14604 Similarly for I2, if it is nonzero and adjacent to I3.
14606 If the register is not used as an input in either I3 or I2
14607 and it is not one of the registers we were supposed to eliminate,
14608 there are two possibilities. We might have a non-adjacent I2
14609 or we might have somehow eliminated an additional register
14610 from a computation. For example, we might have had A & B where
14611 we discover that B will always be zero. In this case we will
14612 eliminate the reference to A.
14614 In both cases, we must search to see if we can find a previous
14615 use of A and put the death note there. */
14618 && from_insn
== i2mod
14619 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0), i2mod_new_rhs
))
14620 tem_insn
= from_insn
;
14624 && CALL_P (from_insn
)
14625 && find_reg_fusage (from_insn
, USE
, XEXP (note
, 0)))
14627 else if (i2
&& reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14629 /* If the new I2 sets the same register that is marked
14630 dead in the note, we do not in general know where to
14631 put the note. One important case we _can_ handle is
14632 when the note comes from I3. */
14633 if (from_insn
== i3
)
14638 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i3
)))
14640 else if (i2
!= 0 && next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2
) == i3
14641 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14643 else if ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), elim_i2
)
14645 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note
, 0),
14647 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), elim_i1
)
14648 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), elim_i0
))
14655 basic_block bb
= this_basic_block
;
14657 for (tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (tem_insn
); place
== 0; tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (tem_insn
))
14659 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn
))
14661 if (tem_insn
== BB_HEAD (bb
))
14666 /* If the register is being set at TEM_INSN, see if that is all
14667 TEM_INSN is doing. If so, delete TEM_INSN. Otherwise, make this
14668 into a REG_UNUSED note instead. Don't delete sets to
14669 global register vars. */
14670 if ((REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
14671 || !global_regs
[REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0))])
14672 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn
)))
14674 rtx set
= single_set (tem_insn
);
14675 rtx inner_dest
= 0;
14678 for (inner_dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
14679 (GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14680 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == SUBREG
14681 || GET_CODE (inner_dest
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
);
14682 inner_dest
= XEXP (inner_dest
, 0))
14685 /* Verify that it was the set, and not a clobber that
14686 modified the register.
14688 If we cannot delete the setter due to side
14689 effects, mark the user with an UNUSED note instead
14692 if (set
!= 0 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set
))
14693 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note
, 0), inner_dest
))
14695 /* Move the notes and links of TEM_INSN elsewhere.
14696 This might delete other dead insns recursively.
14697 First set the pattern to something that won't use
14699 rtx old_notes
= REG_NOTES (tem_insn
);
14701 PATTERN (tem_insn
) = pc_rtx
;
14702 REG_NOTES (tem_insn
) = NULL
;
14704 distribute_notes (old_notes
, tem_insn
, tem_insn
, NULL
,
14705 NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
14706 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (tem_insn
));
14708 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14709 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
14710 if (rsp
->last_set
== tem_insn
)
14711 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (note
, 0), NULL
, NULL_RTX
);
14713 SET_INSN_DELETED (tem_insn
);
14714 if (tem_insn
== i2
)
14719 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note
, REG_UNUSED
);
14721 /* If there isn't already a REG_UNUSED note, put one
14722 here. Do not place a REG_DEAD note, even if
14723 the register is also used here; that would not
14724 match the algorithm used in lifetime analysis
14725 and can cause the consistency check in the
14726 scheduler to fail. */
14727 if (! find_regno_note (tem_insn
, REG_UNUSED
,
14728 REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0))))
14733 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn
))
14734 || (CALL_P (tem_insn
)
14735 && find_reg_fusage (tem_insn
, USE
, XEXP (note
, 0))))
14739 /* If we are doing a 3->2 combination, and we have a
14740 register which formerly died in i3 and was not used
14741 by i2, which now no longer dies in i3 and is used in
14742 i2 but does not die in i2, and place is between i2
14743 and i3, then we may need to move a link from place to
14745 if (i2
&& DF_INSN_LUID (place
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
)
14747 && DF_INSN_LUID (from_insn
) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2
)
14748 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (i2
)))
14750 struct insn_link
*links
= LOG_LINKS (place
);
14751 LOG_LINKS (place
) = NULL
;
14752 distribute_links (links
);
14757 if (tem_insn
== BB_HEAD (bb
))
14763 /* If the register is set or already dead at PLACE, we needn't do
14764 anything with this note if it is still a REG_DEAD note.
14765 We check here if it is set at all, not if is it totally replaced,
14766 which is what `dead_or_set_p' checks, so also check for it being
14769 if (place
&& REG_NOTE_KIND (note
) == REG_DEAD
)
14771 unsigned int regno
= REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14772 reg_stat_type
*rsp
= ®_stat
[regno
];
14774 if (dead_or_set_p (place
, XEXP (note
, 0))
14775 || reg_bitfield_target_p (XEXP (note
, 0), PATTERN (place
)))
14777 /* Unless the register previously died in PLACE, clear
14778 last_death. [I no longer understand why this is
14780 if (rsp
->last_death
!= place
)
14781 rsp
->last_death
= 0;
14785 rsp
->last_death
= place
;
14787 /* If this is a death note for a hard reg that is occupying
14788 multiple registers, ensure that we are still using all
14789 parts of the object. If we find a piece of the object
14790 that is unused, we must arrange for an appropriate REG_DEAD
14791 note to be added for it. However, we can't just emit a USE
14792 and tag the note to it, since the register might actually
14793 be dead; so we recourse, and the recursive call then finds
14794 the previous insn that used this register. */
14796 if (place
&& REG_NREGS (XEXP (note
, 0)) > 1)
14798 unsigned int endregno
= END_REGNO (XEXP (note
, 0));
14799 bool all_used
= true;
14802 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
; i
++)
14803 if ((! refers_to_regno_p (i
, PATTERN (place
))
14804 && ! find_regno_fusage (place
, USE
, i
))
14805 || dead_or_set_regno_p (place
, i
))
14813 /* Put only REG_DEAD notes for pieces that are
14814 not already dead or set. */
14816 for (i
= regno
; i
< endregno
;
14817 i
+= hard_regno_nregs (i
, reg_raw_mode
[i
]))
14819 rtx piece
= regno_reg_rtx
[i
];
14820 basic_block bb
= this_basic_block
;
14822 if (! dead_or_set_p (place
, piece
)
14823 && ! reg_bitfield_target_p (piece
,
14826 rtx new_note
= alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD
, piece
,
14829 distribute_notes (new_note
, place
, place
,
14830 NULL
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
14833 else if (! refers_to_regno_p (i
, PATTERN (place
))
14834 && ! find_regno_fusage (place
, USE
, i
))
14835 for (tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (place
); ;
14836 tem_insn
= PREV_INSN (tem_insn
))
14838 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn
))
14840 if (tem_insn
== BB_HEAD (bb
))
14844 if (dead_or_set_p (tem_insn
, piece
)
14845 || reg_bitfield_target_p (piece
,
14846 PATTERN (tem_insn
)))
14848 add_reg_note (tem_insn
, REG_UNUSED
, piece
);
14861 /* Any other notes should not be present at this point in the
14863 gcc_unreachable ();
14868 XEXP (note
, 1) = REG_NOTES (place
);
14869 REG_NOTES (place
) = note
;
14871 /* Set added_notes_insn to the earliest insn we added a note to. */
14872 if (added_notes_insn
== 0
14873 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_notes_insn
) > DF_INSN_LUID (place
))
14874 added_notes_insn
= place
;
14879 add_shallow_copy_of_reg_note (place2
, note
);
14881 /* Set added_notes_insn to the earliest insn we added a note to. */
14882 if (added_notes_insn
== 0
14883 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_notes_insn
) > DF_INSN_LUID (place2
))
14884 added_notes_insn
= place2
;
14889 /* Similarly to above, distribute the LOG_LINKS that used to be present on
14890 I3, I2, and I1 to new locations. This is also called to add a link
14891 pointing at I3 when I3's destination is changed. */
14894 distribute_links (struct insn_link
*links
)
14896 struct insn_link
*link
, *next_link
;
14898 for (link
= links
; link
; link
= next_link
)
14900 rtx_insn
*place
= 0;
14904 next_link
= link
->next
;
14906 /* If the insn that this link points to is a NOTE, ignore it. */
14907 if (NOTE_P (link
->insn
))
14911 rtx pat
= PATTERN (link
->insn
);
14912 if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
14914 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
14917 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (pat
, 0); i
++)
14919 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
14920 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
14923 reg
= SET_DEST (set
);
14924 while (GET_CODE (reg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14925 || GET_CODE (reg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14926 || GET_CODE (reg
) == SUBREG
)
14927 reg
= XEXP (reg
, 0);
14932 if (REGNO (reg
) == link
->regno
)
14935 if (i
== XVECLEN (pat
, 0))
14941 reg
= SET_DEST (set
);
14943 while (GET_CODE (reg
) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14944 || GET_CODE (reg
) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14945 || GET_CODE (reg
) == SUBREG
)
14946 reg
= XEXP (reg
, 0);
14951 /* A LOG_LINK is defined as being placed on the first insn that uses
14952 a register and points to the insn that sets the register. Start
14953 searching at the next insn after the target of the link and stop
14954 when we reach a set of the register or the end of the basic block.
14956 Note that this correctly handles the link that used to point from
14957 I3 to I2. Also note that not much searching is typically done here
14958 since most links don't point very far away. */
14960 for (insn
= NEXT_INSN (link
->insn
);
14961 (insn
&& (this_basic_block
->next_bb
== EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun
)
14962 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block
->next_bb
) != insn
));
14963 insn
= NEXT_INSN (insn
))
14964 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
14966 else if (INSN_P (insn
) && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg
, PATTERN (insn
)))
14968 if (reg_referenced_p (reg
, PATTERN (insn
)))
14972 else if (CALL_P (insn
)
14973 && find_reg_fusage (insn
, USE
, reg
))
14978 else if (INSN_P (insn
) && reg_set_p (reg
, insn
))
14981 /* If we found a place to put the link, place it there unless there
14982 is already a link to the same insn as LINK at that point. */
14986 struct insn_link
*link2
;
14988 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link2
, place
)
14989 if (link2
->insn
== link
->insn
&& link2
->regno
== link
->regno
)
14994 link
->next
= LOG_LINKS (place
);
14995 LOG_LINKS (place
) = link
;
14997 /* Set added_links_insn to the earliest insn we added a
14999 if (added_links_insn
== 0
15000 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn
) > DF_INSN_LUID (place
))
15001 added_links_insn
= place
;
15007 /* Check for any register or memory mentioned in EQUIV that is not
15008 mentioned in EXPR. This is used to restrict EQUIV to "specializations"
15009 of EXPR where some registers may have been replaced by constants. */
15012 unmentioned_reg_p (rtx equiv
, rtx expr
)
15014 subrtx_iterator::array_type array
;
15015 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter
, array
, equiv
, NONCONST
)
15017 const_rtx x
= *iter
;
15018 if ((REG_P (x
) || MEM_P (x
))
15019 && !reg_mentioned_p (x
, expr
))
15025 /* Make pseudo-to-pseudo copies after every hard-reg-to-pseudo-copy, because
15026 the reg-to-reg copy can usefully combine with later instructions, but we
15027 do not want to combine the hard reg into later instructions, for that
15028 restricts register allocation. */
15030 make_more_copies (void)
15034 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb
, cfun
)
15038 FOR_BB_INSNS (bb
, insn
)
15040 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
15043 rtx set
= single_set (insn
);
15047 rtx dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
15048 if (!(REG_P (dest
) && !HARD_REGISTER_P (dest
)))
15051 rtx src
= SET_SRC (set
);
15052 if (!(REG_P (src
) && HARD_REGISTER_P (src
)))
15054 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set
, REGNO (src
)))
15057 rtx new_reg
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (dest
));
15058 rtx_insn
*new_insn
= gen_move_insn (new_reg
, src
);
15059 SET_SRC (set
) = new_reg
;
15060 emit_insn_before (new_insn
, insn
);
15061 df_insn_rescan (insn
);
15066 /* Try combining insns through substitution. */
15068 rest_of_handle_combine (void)
15070 make_more_copies ();
15072 df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE
+ DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN
);
15073 df_note_add_problem ();
15076 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs ();
15077 reg_n_sets_max
= max_reg_num ();
15079 bool rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
15080 = combine_instructions (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
15082 /* Combining insns may have turned an indirect jump into a
15083 direct jump. Rebuild the JUMP_LABEL fields of jumping
15085 if (rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
)
15087 if (dom_info_available_p (CDI_DOMINATORS
))
15088 free_dominance_info (CDI_DOMINATORS
);
15089 timevar_push (TV_JUMP
);
15090 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
15092 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP
);
15095 regstat_free_n_sets_and_refs ();
15100 const pass_data pass_data_combine
=
15102 RTL_PASS
, /* type */
15103 "combine", /* name */
15104 OPTGROUP_NONE
, /* optinfo_flags */
15105 TV_COMBINE
, /* tv_id */
15106 PROP_cfglayout
, /* properties_required */
15107 0, /* properties_provided */
15108 0, /* properties_destroyed */
15109 0, /* todo_flags_start */
15110 TODO_df_finish
, /* todo_flags_finish */
15113 class pass_combine
: public rtl_opt_pass
15116 pass_combine (gcc::context
*ctxt
)
15117 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_combine
, ctxt
)
15120 /* opt_pass methods: */
15121 bool gate (function
*) final override
{ return (optimize
> 0); }
15122 unsigned int execute (function
*) final override
15124 rest_of_handle_combine ();
15128 }; // class pass_combine
15130 } // anon namespace
15133 make_pass_combine (gcc::context
*ctxt
)
15135 return new pass_combine (ctxt
);